ACL Elite
ACL Elite Pro
Service Manual
P/N 181121-14 (CD version) Revision 00 January 2006
Manufacturer
Instrumentation Laboratory Company
113 Hartwell Avenue - P.O. Box 9113
Lexington, MA 02421-3125 U.S.A.
Telephone: (781) 861-0710
EU Authorized Representative
Instrumentation Laboratory SpA
Viale Monza 338 - 20128 Milan, Italy
Telephone: 39-2-25221
ACL Elite / ElitePro Service Manual
ACL Elite / ElitePro Service Manual
P/N 00018112113 Elite / ElitePro Service Manual (paper version) Revision 00 January 2006
P/N 00018112114 Elite / ElitePro Service Manual (CD version) Revision 00 January 2006
Foreword
This Service Manual contains information necessary to install, service, maintain and troubleshoot the
Instrumentation Laboratory ACL Elite / ElitePro system.
This Service Manual is intended for IL field engineers, or service engineers from organizations duly
recognized and authorized by Instrumentation Laboratory, who have been previously trained on how to
use, maintain and troubleshoot the IL ACL Elite / ElitePro model.
For detailed information on Operator’s interface and other user related topics, reference the ACL Elite /
ElitePro Operator’s Manual.
The ACL Elite / ElitePro system is compatible with the diverse requirements for supply voltage and
frequency encountered throughout the world.
The ACL Elite / ElitePro system conforms to the directives and standards of the Community European
89/336/EEC + 92/31EEC + 93/68EEC and certified by CE marking. This system is approved to CE
standards EN55011:1991 (CISPR 11), Group 1, Class A; EN50082-1:1997 and EN61010-1993 +
A2:1995 (IEC 1010-1).
The ACL Elite / ElitePro system also conforms to the directives and standards of the CSA and certified by
CSA marking. This system is approved to CSA standards with licence number LR24215 and produced
under CSA certification number 161648/1121145.
All instruments bear the CE and CSA monograms.
This publication and any and all materials (including software) concerning the products of IL ACL Elite / Elite Pro
Systems are of proprietary nature and are communicated on a strictly confidential basis; they may not be reproduced,
recorded, stored in a retrieval system, transmitted or disclosed in any way and by any means whatsoever, whether
electronic, mechanical through photocopying or otherwise, without IL’s prior written consent.
Information contained herein is believed by IL to be accurate: in any event, no responsibility, whether express or implied,
is assumed hereby by IL for or in connection with the use thereof, or for infringement of any third party rights which might
arise therefrom, or from any representation or omissions contained therein.
Information is subject to change and/or updating without notice.
Manufacturer
Instrumentation Laboratory Company
113 Hartwell Avenue - P.O. Box 9113
Lexington, MA 02421-3125 U.S.A.
Telephone: (781) 861-0710
EU Authorized Representative
Instrumentation Laboratory SpA
Viale Monza 338 - 20128 Milan, Italy
Telephone: 39-2-25221
Instrumentation Laboratory Co.
113 Hartwell Avenue, Lexington Ma. 02421
ACL Elite / ElitePro Service Manual
ACL Elite / ElitePro Service Manual Index
Foreword
ACL Elite / ElitePro Service Manual Index
Chapter
1
General Information
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.4.1
1.4.2
1.4.3
1.4.4
1.4.5
1.4.6
1.4.7
1.4.8
1.4.9
1.4.10
1.4.11
1.4.12
1.4.13
1.5
1.5.1
1.5.2
1.5.3
1.5.4
1.5.5
1.6
Product Use
Measured Parameters
Presentation of Results
Instrument Description and Operation
Main hardware components
Sample Tray
Reagent Area
Rinse/Waste Area
Rotor loading and Analysis Area
Liquid Crystal Display (LCD)
Keyboard
Interface Connectors
Internal Cooling System
On-board Barcode Reader
External Barcode Scanner
External printer
Floppy disk drive
Additional Features
Standby Status
End of the Cycle
Power loss
Setup and Utility Programs
Fault Detection
Procedural Limitations
Chapter
2
Operator Interface Description
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
Screen areas and main commands description
Available input devices
Instrument status
Password
Analysis and Service programs menu description
Index
Page 1 of 5
ACL Elite / ElitePro Service Manual
Chapter
3
General Description
3.1
3.2
3.2.1
3.2.2
3.3
3.3.1
3.3.2
3.3.3
3.3.4
3.3.5
3.3.6
3.3.7
3.3.8
3.3.9
3.3.10
3.3.11
3.4
3.5
Main Fluidic System Description
Main Optic System Description
Coagulimetric Optic Channel
Chromogenic Optic Channel
Electronic Description
Interconnection schematic
Quick reference board function table
Quick reference board function diagram
CPU Master Board #1 & PC104 Board
Slave Board #2
Acquisition & Sensors Board #3
Rotor Exchange Module Board #4
Motors Board #5
Photometric & Temperatures Control Board #6
Switching Power Supply Board
Instrument Ground Circuit
Main Hardware Components Description
Software Description
Chapter
4
Parts Replacement
4.1
Parts Replacement
4.1.1
Autosampler Assy Replacement
4.1.2
Peltier 1 Assy, Peltier 2 Assy Replacement
4.1.3
Sample Arm Assy Replacement
4.1.4
Rotor Holder Assy Replacement
4.1.5
Rotor Exchange Module Replacement (excluded on ACL Elite)
4.1.6
Rotor Holder Cover Assy Replacement
4.1.7
Halogen Lamp Assy Replacement
4.1.8
Dilutors Replacement
4.1.9
Display Replacement
4.1.10
Hard Disk Drive Replacement
4.1.11
Rotor Preheater Replacement (ACL Elite only)
4.2
Instrument Covers Removing
4.3
Instrument Boards Replacement
Page 2 of 5
Index
ACL Elite / ElitePro Service Manual
Chapter
5
Installation & Maintenance
5.1
Installation
5.1.1
Site requirements
5.1.2
Unpacking and inspection
5.1.3
Mounting Instrument parts
5.1.4
First turn on cycle
5.1.5
Instrument set-up
5.1.6
Performance tests
5.1.7
Installation Procedure & Checklist
5.2
Maintenance
5.2.1
Daily Maintenance
5.2.2
Weekly Maintenance
5.2.3
Bi-Weekly Maintenance
5.2.4
Monthly Maintenance
5.2.5
Yearly Maintenance
5.2.6
As needed Maintenance
5.2.7
Maintenance schedule
5.3
Shut down & Shipment precautions
5.3.1
Long term shut down
5.3.2
Shipment
Chapter
6
Troubleshooting
6.1
Error Messages & Troubleshooting
6.1.1
System errors
6.1.2
Temperature errors
6.1.3
Mechanical errors
6.1.4
R.E.M. errors
6.1.5
Optic errors
6.1.6
Acquisition errors
6.1.7
Liquid sensors errors
6.1.8
Operative errors
6.1.9
Database errors
6.1.10
Sample identification errors
6.1.11
DMS errors
6.1.12
Analytical errors
6.2
Service Tools
6.3
Standard Tools
Index
Page 3 of 5
ACL Elite / ElitePro Service Manual
Chapter
7
Check Out & Adjustment
7.1
7.2
7.3
7.4
7.4.1
7.4.2
7.5
7.5.1
7.5.2
7.5.3
7.6
7.6.1
7.6.2
7.6.3
7.6.4
7.6.5
7.6.6
7.6.7
7.6.8
7.6.9
7.7
7.7.1
7.7.2
7.7.3
7.7.4
7.7.5
7.7.6
7.7.7
7.7.8
7.7.9
7.8
7.8.1
7.8.2
7.9
7.9.1
7.9.2
7.10
7.11
7.12
7.13
7.14
7.15
Quick Reference Guide to Electronic Adjustment
Coagulimetric Channel
Chromogenic Channel
Liquid Sensor
Wash-Reference Emulsion Volume test
Needles Sensor test
Optic Sensor
Rotor Stack.
Rotor Waste container.
Autosampler housing.
Motors Adjust
Rotor motor
Rotor Holder Cover motor
Sample Arm Horizontal motor
Sample Arm Vertical motor
Autosampler motor
Sample / Reagent Dilutor motors
Transport motor
Rotor Arm Horizontal motor
Rotor Arm Vertical motor
Modules Positioning
Sample Arm Assy.
Autosampler Assy.
Rotor Holder Assy.
Needles Block Assy
Rotor Stack Assy.
Rotor Arm Assy.
R.E.M. Centering
Rotor Arm Tilt Adjustment
R.E.M. selftest
Dilutors Module
Dilutors Test
Volume Test
Magnetic Sensor
Rotor Cover Sensor
Rotor Stack Cover Sensor
Rotor Waste Presence Switch
Switching Power Supply check out & Adjustment
Touch Screen Calibration
Interface Test
Temperature Control
Floppy Disk Drive Test
Page 4 of 5
Index
ACL Elite / ElitePro Service Manual
7.16 Software checking & loading
7.16.1
Software Identification
7.16.2
Software Upload & Upgrade
7.16.3
Databases Check
7.16.4
Backup / Restore of the system configuration
7.16.5
Upgrade IL Library
7.16.6
Complete Software Re-Install
7.16.7
Hard Disk Drive Formatting
7.16.8
Main CPU Board BIOS Setup
7.16.9
PC 104 Board Expansion Module Settings
Chapter
8
System Interfacing
8.1
8.2
8.3
8.4
8.5
8.6
8.7
Keyboard
External Parallel Printer
Network
Modem
Mouse
Host Computer
External Bar Code Reader
Chapter
Parts List
9.1
9.2
9.3
9
Start Up Kit
Expendable
Service Parts list
Chapter
Drawings
10
Chapter
11
Service Notes
Chapter
Appendix
A
B
12
Host Communication Protocol
Barcodes Label specifications
Index
Page 5 of 5
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
Chapter 1
General Information
This chapter of the manual contains general information about the ACL Elite/ElitePro
system(s), including its use, measured parameters, presentation of results, hardware
description and operation, additional features and procedural limitations.
Description and use of the ACL Elite/ElitePro Operator’s Interface is addressed in a
separate chapter of this manual. Following are the specific sections.
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
Product Use
Measured Parameters
Presentation of Results
Instrument Description and Operation
Additional Features
Procedural Limitations
Symbols Chart
Chapter 1 – General Information
Page 1 of 22
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
1.1 Product Use
The IL ACL Elite/ElitePro systems are fully automated, high productivity analyzers
designed specifically for clinical use in the hemostasis laboratory, for coagulation
and/or fibrinolysis testing.
The systems provide results for both direct hemostasis measurements and calculated
parameters.
1.2 Measured Parameters
The ACL Elite/ElitePro systems are used to perform the following tests:
Coagulometric Tests
•
•
•
•
PT-FIB (Prothrombin Time and PT-Based Fibrinogen concentration)
APTT (Activated Partial Thromboplastin Time)
TT (Thrombin Time)
Single Factors (VII, X, V, II, XII, XI, IX, VIII)
Absorbance Tests
•
•
•
•
•
•
Antithrombin
Heparin Xa
Protein C
Plasmin Inhibitor (alpha-2-antiplasmin)
Plasminogen
Fibrinogen-C (Clauss method)
Immunological Tests
•
•
D-Dimer
von Willebrand Factor
Special Tests
•
•
•
•
•
ProClot (clotting Protein C)
Protein S
APCR-V
Pro-IL-Complex *
Hepatocomplex *
Note: An (*) indicates that the test is not available in the United States.
Profiles
Page 2 of 22
Chapter 1 – General Information
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
The user may program Profiles on patient samples to be performed on a random
access basis. Refer to the Operator’s Manual for additional information on this
subject.
Tests Groups
Some tests can be run together as a group, thus saving time when the number of
samples to be analyzed is relatively small. Following are some examples:
PT-FIB/APTT
PT-FIB/APTT/TT
Double Tests
The ACL Elite/ElitePro offers the user the capability to set up double tests. Refer to
the Operator’s Manual for additional information on this subject.
1.3 Presentation of Results
The ACL Elite/ElitePro offers the following choices to display and print results of
testing:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
s (seconds)
R (Ratio)
NR (Normalized Ratio)
INR (International Normalized Ratio)
% (Percent activity)
U/mL (units/mL)
mg/dL (for example for Fibrinogen)
g/L (for example for Fibrinogen)
ng/mL (for example for D-Dimer)
microg/L (for example for D-Dimer)
micromol/L
IU/mL (International Unit)
User configurable unit
Chapter 1 – General Information
Page 3 of 22
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
1.4 Instrument Description and Operation
The ACL is a family of fully automated computer-controlled, microcentrifugal
analyzers.
The ACL Elite/ElitePro systems incorporate a Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) unit that
displays the status of the instrument, permits the user to select desired procedures and,
through the use of menus and options, guides the operator through these procedures.
Information and instructions are entered into the system either via a Touch Screen
device, through a standard PC keyboard or through a serial or USB mouse.
When sample testing is initiated, the samples and reagents are sequentially pipetted
into a 20-cuvette polystyrene rotor (loading process). Sample and reagents are then
mixed by centrifugation process. The mixing is carried out by a combination of rapid
acceleration and braking actions that are effective in thoroughly mixing the liquids.
Reaction measurements (data acquisition) via the photometer are made while the rotor
is spinning.
The ACL measures the parameters at 37 oC ± 1 oC (98.6 oF ± 1.8 oF), at an ambient
temperature from 15 oC to 32 oC (59 oF to 89 oF). However, if the ACL is in a
temperature controlled environment where the ambient temperature is held constant,
the measurements are made within a narrower temperature range: 37 oC ± 0.25 oC.
The results are displayed on the LCD and printed by the (optional) external printer,
and/or sent to a host computer. The ACL performs automatic calibration, offers a
series of utility programs for the operator and manages a complete quality control
program.
Page 4 of 22
Chapter 1 – General Information
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
1.4.1
Main hardware components
The ACL Elite/ElitePro analyzers include several hardware components and modules,
which interact with each other to carry out the analytical process.
This section contains descriptions of those components and their functions as well as
the operations that take place during the analytical process.
The figure below highlights some of the main components of the ACL Elite/ElitePro,
as viewed from the front of the system.
7
6
2
8
1
9
3
10
11
5
14
12
13
4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Wash-R Emulsion
Dilutors
Sample Tray
Reagent Area
Sampling Arm
Floppy Disk Drive
LCD
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
Rotor Stack Area
Rotor Holder Cover
Rotor Transport & Rotor Arm (excluded on ACL Elite)
Rotor Waste Area
Keyboard
Adaptors (shown in storage area)
Liquid Waste Outlet
Chapter 1 – General Information
Page 5 of 22
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
More information about the other components on the instrument is given in Chapter 3
“General Description”.
Following are the specific sub-sections with the item descriptions.
1.4.2
1.4.3
1.4.4
1.4.5
1.4.6
1.4.7
1.4.8
1.4.9
1.4.10
1.4.11
1.4.12
1.4.13
Sample Tray
Reagent Area
Rinse/Waste Area
Rotor loading and Analysis Area
Liquid Crystal Display (LCD)
Keyboard
Interface Connectors
Internal Cooling System
On-board Barcode Reader
External Barcode Scanner
External printer
Floppy disk drive
1.4.2
Sample Tray
The ACL Autosampler system includes a rotating sample tray that contains:
40 x 14.2 mm diameter positions for cups and primary tubes and
10 x 23 mm diameter positions to hold accessory materials such as calibrators,
diluents, reagent vials, etc.
Page 6 of 22
Chapter 1 – General Information
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
Optical sensors located around the tray verify that the tray is correctly positioned, and
also detect the presence of cups, tubes and vials.
Three different sample trays can be used with the ACL system, each one appropriate
for different size primary tubes: 3 mL, 5 mL and S11.5; all of them can be used for
0.5, 2 or 4 mL cups.
3 mL
5 mL
S 11.
Primary tube, 3 or 3.5 mL total volume (13x75 mm) 181108-99
Primary tube, 5 mL total volume (13x75 mm and/or 13x100 mL) 181108-98
Sarstedt type primary tube, 3 mL volume (11.5x66 mm) and/or
5 mL volume (11.5x92 mm) 181812-85
Note: The dimensions and volumes mentioned above are all nominal values.
Warning: Do not access sample or reagent area while probe arm is operating.
Chapter 1 – General Information
Page 7 of 22
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
Additional Reagents positions
The ten internal positions of the sample tray - A1 to A10 - are used for placing
materials such as calibrators, diluents or reagents in a choice of containers such as 23
mm vials (10 mL filling volume), 18 mm vials (4 mL filling volume) or cups.
Adapters are needed for the 4 mL vials and cups as seen in the picture below.
Normally, position A1 is usually reserved for a cup containing calibration plasma
(normal pool) and position A10 is reserved for a cup containing IL Factor Diluent, for
use in the calibration procedure.
1.4.3
Reagent Area
The ACL Elite reagent area consists of 8 reservoirs labelled R1 to R8, and the ACL
ElitePro reagent area consists of 12 reservoirs labelled R1 to R12,
designed to hold reagent containers. An area alongside the vial holes is designed to
hold the vial caps while the vials are in use.
Positions R1 to R4 are cooled by a Peltier-effect temperature regulator and are
equipped with a stirring mechanism, (magnetic stirbar).
Positions R5 to R8 are used for reagents at room temperature; these positions do not
have a stirring mechanism.
Positions R9 to R12 (ACL ElitePro), are cooled by a Peltier-effect temperature
regulator however are not equipped with a stirring mechanism, (magnetic stirbar).
The reagents in positions R1 to R6, and R9 to R12 (ACL ElitePro) are aspirated with
the internal needle (reagent needle) while the reagents placed in positions R7 and R8
are aspirated with the external needle (sample needle).
Page 8 of 22
Chapter 1 – General Information
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
Warning: Do not access sample or reagent area while probe arm is operating.
All twelve reagent positions can hold 28 mm vials (16 mL filling volume). Smaller
diameter vials require the use of color coded adapters.
Grey: for 10 mL vials
requiring magnetic stirrer
Purple: for 8 mL vials
not requiring magnetic stirrer
Green: for 4 mL vials
not requiring magnetic stirrer
Dark Blue: for sample tray 4ml
Vials and cups
Chapter 1 – General Information
Page 9 of 22
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
1.4.4
Rinse/Waste Area
The rinse / waste system of the ACL Elite/ElitePro consists of a removable Rinse /
Waste Reservoir positioned between reagent positions R4 and R5. A plastic tube is
connected to the reservoir that drains the waste from the reservoir to a waste container
outside the analyzer (left hand side) where the waste is collected.
The Rinse / Waste Reservoir which is always filled with Wash-R emulsion, is used as
a washing basin for the dispensing needles in-between cycles; the liquid waste is then
drained and collected in the waste container on the outside of the analyzer for proper
disposal.
WARNING !
BIOLOGICAL HAZARDS EXIST. Avoid touching, with bare hands, any parts
of the system which may have come in contact with potentially infectious fluids.
ALWAYS wear gloves when performing any type of Maintenance/Service action
on this area.
1.4.5
Rotor Loading and Analysis Area
The area of the analyzer where the reaction cuvettes are loaded and the analysis takes
place is located under the rotor holder cover in the center of the instrument, on the
right side of the reagent area. This area includes:
•
•
•
•
The reaction cuvettes (rotors) storage system and mechanisms involved in the
transport of the rotors, (excluded on ACL Elite).
The plate where the rotor is placed during loading and analysis (Rotor Holder).
The hardware components responsible for ensuring proper mixing of reagents and
samples in the cuvettes.
The optical system used to make the analytical measurements.
Page 10 of 22
Chapter 1 – General Information
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
Rotor (reaction cuvettes)
The disposable precision reaction cuvettes, made of UV-transparent acrylic, are
radially arranged in groups of 20. The 20-cuvette unit is called a rotor.
Each wedge-shaped cuvette contains two compartments, a small one near the center to
hold the sample and/or reagent and a larger one that holds reagents only. A partial
dam between both compartments maintains their contents separate during the loading
process; as centrifugal action starts, the sample/reagent in the inside compartment
flows over the dam to mix with the contents in the large compartment. The reaction
and analysis take place within the large, outside compartment, while the rotor is
spinning.
Chapter 1 – General Information
Page 11 of 22
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
Rotor Exchange Module (R.E.M.)
The Rotor Stack, the Rotor Transport and the Rotor Arm compose this assembly.
(excluded on ACL Elite)
•
Rotor stack
Before their use, rotors are stored in the rotor stack that holds up to 12 rotors (240
cuvettes). The rotor stack compartment, which may be accessed from the top of the
analyser on the right side, can be filled at any time (continuous rotor loading) either
manually (one rotor at a time) or using a special rotor refill tool (up to 10 rotors at a
time).
The rotor stack area is thermostatically controlled in order to keep the rotors in a
temperature range between 36°C and 39oC and the rotor stack is insulated to help
thermal-regulation.
The ACL Elite has a smaller rotor storage area thermostatically controlled between
36°C and 39oC. Rotors are manually placed into the storage area.
Page 12 of 22
Chapter 1 – General Information
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
•
Rotor Transport
(excluded on ACL Elite)
Below the rotor stack, a rotor transport mechanism moves the bottom rotor out to
make it available to the rotor arm mechanism.
•
Rotor Arm
(excluded on ACL Elite)
The robotic arm takes the rotor and inserts it into the rotor holder. This is the area
where the rotor will remain during the loading and analysis process. Once analysis is
completed, if the rotor is fully utilized (or if requested by the user), the rotor arm
takes the rotor and discards it into the rotor waste container.
The ACL Elite does not contain the robotic mechanism to place rotors onto the Rotor
Holder. With the ACL Elite rotors are manually placed onto the Rotor Holder prior to
sample loading and analysis, and manually removed when the analysis cycle is
completed.
Rotor Holder and Rotor Loading
The Rotor Holder is an aluminium disk that holds the rotor in place during loading
and analysis. The rotor holder is thermostatically controlled to a temperature of 38.5 ±
0.5o C to insure 37 oC inside the cuvette.
Chapter 1 – General Information
Page 13 of 22
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
The loading of samples and reagents into the reaction cuvettes involves the action of
the sampling / dispensing arm and needles. When starting with a new rotor, cuvette 20
is generally filled with a normal pool of calibration plasma. Cuvette 19 is usually
filled with the Wash-Reference Emulsion aspirated from the one-litre bottle housed
against the back wall of the analyzer. The remaining 18 rotor cuvettes (1-18) are filled
with samples and reagents as required by the programmed request.
Rotor Waste Area
The used rotors are dropped inside the Rotor Waste Container. This container is
accessed from a door in the right front area of the analyzer for removal and disposal
of the used rotors, as seen in the figure below. With the ACL Elite rotors are
manually removed from the rotor holder after analysis is complete and may be
disposed of in the Rotor Waste container or other suitable method.
Page 14 of 22
Chapter 1 – General Information
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
WARNING !
BIOLOGICAL HAZARDS EXIST. Avoid touching, with bare hands, any parts
of the system which may have come in contact with potentially infectious fluids.
ALWAYS wear gloves when performing any type of Maintenance/Service action
on this area.
Chapter 1 – General Information
Page 15 of 22
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
1.4.6
Liquid Crystal Display (LCD)
This module consists of a Liquid Crystal Display, 12-inch active matrix (LCD), which
has Touch Screen capability, allowing all operations to be carried out using the LCD.
The LCD guides the operator during the analytical process and displays calibrator
data and patient results. It is also used to display calibration curves, and to perform
several utility programs that are easily accessible through this input device.
The LCD screen system reproduces 256 colors, and shows numeric and alphanumeric
characters. The interaction with the operator is also made user friendly by the
availability of graphics and icons. The screen is divided into three areas:
•
•
•
The upper section displays “Status area and main menu’”.
The central section displays “Working area”.
The lower section displays “Toolbar area”.
Page 16 of 22
Chapter 1 – General Information
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
1.4.7
Keyboard
The ACL Elite/ElitePro has a standard computer keyboard with mechanical keys that
allow the user to access the various operating modes of the instrument.
Although the instrument is equipped with and supports the USA keyboard layout, the
ACL software itself also supports the layout for the following languages: German,
French, Spanish, Italian and English (UK).
1.4.8
•
Interface Connectors
USB connectors (4) to interface USB mouse, USB External Barcode Scanner,
and/or USB Printer.
The ACL Elite/ElitePro includes an interface for a USB external barcode scanner that
allows reading reagent barcodes. The external barcode scanner is a standard accessory
for the ACL ElitePro system and an optional feature for the ACL Elite system.
•
RS-232 C Interface for Host
The ACL Elite/ElitePro contains an RS-232C interface (DTE Standard) for the output
of data to a central computer (Host) or a personal computer. Communication to a host
computer is via ASTM protocol.
•
RS-232 C Interface for an optional serial mouse
(mouse must be serial mouse, PS-2 mouse with adaptor is not supported)
•
Ethernet not supported in this software release
•
External Printer Output (parallel port)
The ACL Elite/ElitePro has an output for an optional external printer. Two emulation
protocols are available for printers: ESC/P2 (Epson like printers) and HP-PCL 5 (for
HP like Laser Printers).
•
Standard PC keyboard
Chapter 1 – General Information
Page 17 of 22
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
Host
1.4.9
USB Ports (4)
Serial
Mouse
Ethernet
Parallel
Printer
Keyboard
Internal Cooling System
The cooling of the system is insured by the presence of fans mounted on the internal
right and left sides of the analyzer. An air filter prevents dust from entering the
system.
A two-level alarm warns the user when the internal temperature of the instrument
rises above damaging levels. The first level alerts the operator of the temperature rise
and displays a warning. The second level switches off the instrument.
1.4.10 On-board Barcode Reader
The on-board barcode reader, a standard feature of the ACL Elite/ElitePro, is located
in the sampling area as indicated in the figure below. A small window indicates its
position.
Following are the numerical and alphanumerical readable codes.
•
•
•
•
Codabar
Code 39
Code 128
Interleave 2 of 5
When using barcoded sample tubes, it is important to position them in the sample tray
such that the labels are facing towards the outside of the sample tray. This will allow a
correct reading of the labels by the on-board barcode reader.
Page 18 of 22
Chapter 1 – General Information
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
1.4.11 External Barcode Scanner
The external barcode scanner for the ACL Elite/ElitePro is able to read numerical and
alphanumerical IL Reagent bottle labels. The maximum barcode label length readable
is 6 cm with a resolution of 0.2 mm.
Following are the numerical and alphanumerical readable codes.
•
Code 128
1.4.12 External Printer (optional)
An external 80-column printer can be interfaced to the ACL Elite/ElitePro.
Two emulation protocols can be used: ESC P2 or HP-PCL 5.
The ESC P2 is a typical Epson like protocol while the HP-PCL 5 is a typical Hewlett
Packard like protocol for Laser and /or Inkjet printers.
1.4.13 Floppy Disk Drive
A floppy disk drive is mounted in the upper right part of the ACL Elite/ElitePro. This
device is used for some of the utility programs.
Chapter 1 – General Information
Page 19 of 22
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
The floppy disk drive is accessible by pushing both sides of the small door to open it.
1.5 Additional Features
This section provides information on any additional features improved in the ACL
Elite/ElitePro.
1.5.1
Standby Status
If the ACL Elite/ElitePro is left ON for a period longer than 30 minutes without any
operator action, the system moves into the Standby status. The LCD screen goes
blank. Pressing the Touch Screen reactivates the display and allows the system to
resume normal operation.
When the system enters the Standby status, all motors are deactivated to reduce power
consumption and the LED source is switched off. While the instrument is in the
Standby status, an automatic priming cycle of Wash Reference Emulsion solution is
performed every 30 minutes. The Database is saved when the instrument goes into
the Standby status.
1.5.2
End of the Cycle
At the end of each analytical cycle, an audible signal notifies the operator that the
cycle has been completed.
1.5.3
Power loss
The ACL contains a Hard Disk Drive to store the database in the event of a power
interruption. The instrument performs an automatic save of the database to retain the
Page 20 of 22
Chapter 1 – General Information
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
data every entry into standby or when exiting from the main program to power the
system off.
The instrument has an internal clock that keeps track of the date and time.
1.5.4
Setup and Utility Programs
The instrument incorporates several utility programs that allow certain functions to be
changed or set according to the user’s needs. These programs also help in
troubleshooting.
For additional information, refer to Chapter 2 “Operator Interface Description” in this
manual.
1.5.5
Fault Detection
The system automatically monitors faults to ensure accuracy of sample data and
proper system performance. Fault monitoring includes display of alarms and
warnings.
For additional information, refer to Chapter 6 “Troubleshooting” in this manual.
1.6 Procedural Limitations
The operating range of the ACL Elite/ElitePro is 15 to 32 oC ( 59 to 89 oF) and at up
to 85% Relative Humidity (not condensing).
The ACL Elite/ElitePro has been tested per EN61010-1 to insure there are no safety
hazards within the temperature range 5 to 40ºC (41 to 104 oF) and functional
performance characteristics are resumed when the instrument re-enters the range of 15
to 32 oC ( 59 to 89 oF).
1.7 Symbols Chart
The following chart displays the various symbols that may be associated with the
ACL Elite/Elite Pro system.
Chapter 1 – General Information
Page 21 of 22
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
CE Mark
Temperature
Limitation
Use By
Manufacturer
Batch Code
Biological Risk
ATTENTION:
See Instructions
For use
CAUTION:
Risk of electric
Shock
NOTE:
Important user
Information
ATTENTION:
Consult
Documents
Serial Number
In Vitro
Diagnostic
Device
Authorized
Representative
Contains
sufficient for <n>
tests
Earth
Off (supply)
On (supply)
End of Life
Disposal (WEEE)
Catalog Number
Protective
Conductor
terminal -Earth
Do Not Actuate
Page 22 of 22
Chapter 1 – General Information
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
Chapter 2
Operator Interface Description
This chapter is designed to familiarize the service engineer with the Operator
Interface (OI) items used during the process of requesting and performing analytical
and service operations, such as the data input devices, elements within menus, buttons
and icons. Following are the specific sections.
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
Screen areas and main commands description.
Available input devices.
Instrument status.
Passwords.
Analysis and Service program menu description.
2.1 Screen areas and main commands description.
This section provides information about the Operator Interface displayed on screen.
The basic interaction with the ACL Elite/ElitePro is done through menus which allow
access to sets of related functions (analysis, calibration, QC, set-up, diagnostics, etc.)
and through the use of windows, dialogue or message boxes to input or retrieve
information.
The screen is divided in the following 3 main areas.
2.1.1
2.1.2
2.1.3
Status area and main menu.
Working area.
Toolbar area.
Note: On the screen, any disabled object (menu, check-box, and button) is displayed
dimmed and it cannot be selected.
2.1.1
Status area and main menu
This is the upper part of the screen that contains the following items.
•
•
•
•
IL Logo
Indication of current instrument status (see section 2.3)
Date and Time
Windows like Menu bar (see section 2.5)
Chapter 2 - Operator Interface Description
Page 1 of 13
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
2.1.2
Working area
This is the central area of the screen, which display windows containing data,
commands or messages.
Within the ACL Elite/ElitePro screens these items are grouped or contained in three
different types of defined windows that are following.
•
Standard window
In the analysis menu, this is a larger area that contains sets of related data, which can
be edited by the user by means of command buttons.
In the service menu, or in any common menu, this is an area that contains
configuration and setting options with command buttons.
•
Dialogue box
This is a small area used to prompt the user to choose one of several options (OK,
Abort, Retry, Ignore, Cancel, Yes, No).
•
Message box
This is an area used only to provide information.
Command buttons allow the user to select options, cause actions and get from one
part of the software to another.
The buttons are positioned in different areas depending on the screen.
Some are identified with text that is self-explanatory of the action.
Some are shown with an icon inside that illustrates an action as defined in the
following table.
Page 2 of 13
Chapter 2 - Operator Interface Description
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
Command
Buttons Icons
Command / Action
Confirm
Cancel
(Dimmed if Edit action not allowed)
Print
Host
Delete
Add
Add an item to the list.
Remove
Remove an item from the list.
Transfer
Transfer an item from one list to another.
Details
Chapter 2 - Operator Interface Description
Page 3 of 13
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
Information
Provide information in different languages.
New Sample
Extract Sample Data
Note
Patient Name
Patient Details
Save
Save information to floppy disk.
Inside the standard windows, “Check boxes” may be present which allow the user to
“mark” an item. If a check box or button is in mutual exclusion with another check
box or button, there is a frame wrapping the two, along with “graphic” information.
Page 4 of 13
Chapter 2 - Operator Interface Description
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
In the dialogue and in the message boxes icons may be present.
Following is the table with all possible icons and their corresponding meanings.
Icon
Meaning
ERROR
To call attention to high priority failures and fault messages.
WARNING !
To deliver different kinds of messages. For example to warn
the user of a “not allowed/wrong” operation, or of
“problems/errors” detected by the instrument during or after
an operation.
QUESTION
To request confirmation by the user before starting an
operation or before cancelling an action.
INFORMATION
To offer general information. In some boxes, but not always,
the message is followed by a request for confirmation.
2.1.3
Toolbar area
This is the bottom part of the screen, which contains a series of command buttons for
immediate and easy access to particular functions.
The status of the buttons (Active or Dimmed) is dependent on the instrument status,
but independent from the type of information displayed in the working area.
The buttons are shown with an icon inside that illustrates an action as defined in the
following table.
Toolbar Command
Buttons Icons
Command / Action
Short Turn Around Time (STAT)
Urgent sample. Pressing this button opens a window that guides
the operator. Confirmation is required.
Instrument Status
Informs the operator about the status of the operation in progress.
Chapter 2 - Operator Interface Description
Page 5 of 13
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
Close/Open Cover
This operation is disabled if there is a possible interference with
the instrument operation.
STOP
Confirmation is required.
Resume
Starts the operations paused due to a STAT request.
Data Base View
The system goes back to the database view or “Main” screen.
Host Status
This icon appears only during communication with the Host to
inform the operator about the status of this action.
Printer Status
This icon appears only during printing to inform the operator
about the status of this action.
Warning !
This icon appears when there is at least one warning. Press to
open “Warning List”.
Exit
Allows the operator to exit the Service menu.
Log Out
Allows the operator to exit the Analysis menu.
Confirmation is required. It is mandatory to follow the proper
Log Out sequence (pressing the Log Out Icon), before powering
off the instrument.
Page 6 of 13
Chapter 2 - Operator Interface Description
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
Reagent Status
Indicates status of reagents by color change
QC Status
By pressing icon, a screen is displayed indicating the last 100 QC
results. A red ! in the icon indicates a QC error.
2.2 Available input devices
This section provides information about the available input devices and their use in
different screens.
Following are the specific sub-sections for each device.
2.2.1 Touch Screen
2.2.2 Standard PC Keyboard
2.2.3 Mouse
2.2.4 External Bar Code Reader
2.2.1 Touch Screen
The main information input device for the user is the touch screen.
To start an “enter command” or “edit value” action the operator touches the area to be
edited, which results in the immediate display of the numerical keypad (if enabled).
If the information to be entered is strictly numerical, the editing is done directly on
the keypad.
If the information requires alphanumeric characters, the input is done through the
external keyboard.
The editing action may be closed by pressing the "Confirm" or the "Cancel" buttons
or in some cases by touching a different area of the screen (implicit confirmation).
Once the confirmation is done, the system performs an automatic check on the entered
value. If an error situation is detected the user is notified by means of dialogue boxes
and the editing action is reactivated.
The touch screen supports auto-repeat functions in order to make lists easier to scroll.
Chapter 2 - Operator Interface Description
Page 7 of 13
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
2.2.2
Standard PC Keyboard
The main function of the PC keyboard is to enter and edit data in the alphanumeric
fields.
To start the editing action, select the field to be edited. Move the cursor from the
current object (it may be the default object if the window was just opened) to the
desired object by pressing [TAB] or [Shift] [TAB].
To close the editing action press [Enter] or select another active object or move the
cursor by pressing the [TAB] or [Shift] [TAB] keys. In all cases, closing the editing
action causes the system to activate checks on the entered data and the user is notified
of any error conditions by means of a dialogue box. If the editing action has been
implicitly closed (touching a different area of the screen) the fault condition of the
entered value will be changed to the pre-existing one.
Pressing the [ESC] key without activating any control may also close the editing
action; in this case the value returns to the pre-existing one.
Main and secondary menus may be selected using the keyboard. Pressing [ALT]
+Character opens the menus; selections within the secondary menus are done using
the Character key.
The keyboard may also be used to activate the Toolbar functions ( [F 1] to [F 10] ).
Pressing [ALT]-[TAB] allows shifting from an activated window to another visible
window. Pressing [CTRL + F4] will activate the Log Out function.
2.2.3
Mouse
The serial mouse or USB mouse is a device that may be used as a selecting device in
place of touching the screen. If at the instrument turn on the mouse is connected to the
proper port of the Interface Board then the Mouse arrow pointer is displayed.
2.2.4
External Barcode Reader
The external barcode reader is a device used to “read” the information encoded in IL
reagent barcode labels.
2.3 Instrument Status
Located in the upper part of the screen, within the “Status Area”, this item identifies
the current state of the instrument as one of the following.
• SYSTEM INIT (BOOT/START-UP)
This indicates that the instrument, after the turn on, is performing start-up operations
(Initializing).
Page 8 of 13
Chapter 2 - Operator Interface Description
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
• LOG-IN
This indicates that the instrument is inoperative and is waiting for the inputting of the
User Identification and the Password of the operator (see section 2.4).
• READY
This indicates that there have been no blocking errors detected, there are no analytical
operations in progress and the instrument is ready to start.
• OPERATING
This indicates that either an analytical function is in progress (Calibration or Sample
Analysis) or a diagnostic function is being performed.
• HOLD
This identifies a system "pause" reached during an analytical session (STAT request,
no rotors, etc.). In order to continue the current session, select “Resume” (green flag
icon in the Toolbar).
• FAILURE
This indicates that the system has detected a blocking malfunction for a software
problem or mechanical assembly (devices, temperature control, etc.).
• STAND-BY
This is the status into which the instrument moves automatically after 30 minutes of
inactivity. The LCD lamp in the video module is turned off and its status led becomes
green. Both the coagulimetric LED and Halogen Lamp are off and the system
performs a Database check then becomes inoperative.
To exit from the stand by status enter any command (Touch the screen, press any key
etc.).
• SERVICE
This is the status assumed when the instrument is in the Service program or in its
menus. To gain access to the Service program it is necessary to insert the proper
identification password at the LOG-IN prompt, (User: Service, Password: System
Fix) and then select on the windows like menu bar “Diagnostic” and then “Service”.
The Service program contains all the software tools and utilities to allow the Service
Engineer to perform a complete check out and adjustment of the whole instrument.
In the Service program the coagulimetric LED and Halogen Lamp are turned on for
default. To exit from the Service program select the “Exit” button on the Toolbar.
Note: When the “Exit” button is touched, the system performs an initialization of the
instrument.
Chapter 2 - Operator Interface Description
Page 9 of 13
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
During this initialization all the motors are moved to the home position and the
instrument attempts to recover from any errors before access to the Analysis program
is allowed.
2.4 Passwords
This section contains the available passwords implemented in the instrument software
together with the description of the allowable functions.
Following are the Log-In passwords:
User
Password
Gained functions description
Lab
Manager
level 3
Gain access only to the Analysis program.
Service
System Fix
Gain access to all Service and Analysis programs
Note: User name and password are case sensitive. In the User as in the Password
fields pay attention to type correctly the “Upper/Lower Case letters” and the “spaces”.
Otherwise the system shows an “Error” message box.
Following is a Service program password:
Password
Function description
ACL8
Allows the service engineer to Reset the Test Counter.
Note: The password is required only if in the Test Counter Menu, the
Reset button is touched.
2.5 Analysis and Service program menu description
This section contains an overview of the configuration of the Windows like Menu
bars contained in the two main programs.
Each of the two programs is basically composed by specific menus (in the Analysis
program: Analysis, QC and Calibration, while for the Service program: Service) and
by common menus (Diagnostic, Setup and Utility).
Specific information about the Analysis menus is provided in the Operator Manual.
A quick description of the menus that are common in the two programs is also
provided. Following are the specific sub-sections.
2.5.1 Analysis program Windows like Menu bar.
2.5.2 Service program Windows like Menu bar.
2.5.3 Common Menu description.
Page 10 of 13
Chapter 2 - Operator Interface Description
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
2.5.1
Analysis program Windows like Menu bar
This sub-section is designed to provide information about the location of the menu in
the Analysis program.
A menu may be opened by selecting the appropriate area of the screen (touch or click
with the mouse) or using the keyboard: [ALT] + Character.
The selection of menus to be opened may be done in all directions: up and down or
right and left.
The displayed items, which have a secondary menu, are identified with a marker (¾).
Selecting a menu item, touching an external area, or pressing [ESC] from the standard
keyboard closes a menu.
The “Analysis Windows Like Menu Expanded Diagrams” is available in the figure
2.5.1 Drawing 1 of the Chapter 10 “Drawings”.
2.5.2
Service program Windows like Menu bar
This sub-section is designed to provide information about the location of the menu in
the Service program.
A menu may be opened by selecting the appropriate area of the screen (touch or click
with the mouse) or using the keyboard: [ALT] + Character.
The selection of menus to be opened may be done in all directions: up and down or
right and left.
The displayed items, which have a secondary menu, are identified with a marker (¾).
Selecting a menu item, touching an external area, or pressing [ESC] from the standard
keyboard closes a menu.
The “Service Windows Like Menu Expanded Diagrams” is available in the figure
2.5.2 Drawing 1 of the chapter 10 “Drawings”.
2.5.3
Common Menu description
This sub-section is designed to provide information on the menus that are common
and present in both the Analysis and the Service program. More information about
these 3 menus is provided in the Operator’s Manual.
Following are the specific sub-section for these 3 menus.
2.5.3.a Diagnostic
2.5.3.b Setup
2.5.5.c Utility
Chapter 2 - Operator Interface Description
Page 11 of 13
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
2.5.3.a Diagnostic
Following is the table with the description of the functionality of each option in the
“Diagnostic” menu.
Option
Description
Priming
This performs a priming cycle of the fluidic system with
Wash-Reference Emulsion by means of the Dilutors.
This performs a configurable cleaning cycle of the Needles
Block with Cleaning Solution by means of the Dilutors.
This is a schedule that reminds the operator of dates and/or
notes about the instrument maintenance actions.
This screen allows monitoring of the temperatures of the
heating and cooling systems.
This is a test that allows the operator to verify/adjust the
Needles Block position.
It’s a table where are traced by the system the errors that
occurred during the last session.
It’s a table where the system saves a trace of the last 100
actions of the operations on the system configuration.
This option allows the Service Engineer to access the
Service program (proper password required to activate).
Cleaning
Maintenance
Temperature Control
Needles Position
Session Error History
Logbook
Service
2.5.3.b Setup
Following is the table with the description of the functionality of each option in the
“Setup” menu.
Option
Description
Tests
This is a second level menu with options that allow the
operator to configure the analytical tests.
This is a second level menu with options that allow the
operator to configure the analytical profile tests.
This is an option that allows the operator to configure the
liquids used by the instrument.
This is a second level menu, with options that allow the
operator to configure the interface with the internal /
external device.
This is an option that allows to the operator to configure the
system.
This is an option that allows the operator to set the date and
the internal clock time.
This is an option that allows at the operator to select the
measuring units for the data.
Profiles
Liquids
Interfaces
System Configuration
Date / Time
Units
Page 12 of 13
Chapter 2 - Operator Interface Description
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
2.5.3.c Utility
Following is the table with the description of the functionality of each option in the
“Utility” menu.
Option
Description
Upgrade IL Library
This option allows the operator to upgrade the IL library
present in the system with new liquids, tests and profiles.
This option allows the operator to backup or restore the
current system configuration (for Hardware, QC, AR, and
Patients).
This option allows the operator to store the data (QC, AR,
Patients database and Calibration) on floppy disks using the
“.TXT” format. If required these floppy disks are then
readable from a PC.
This option allows the operator to check the software ID,
and/or upload and upgrade the instrument software.
This option allows the operator to save on floppy disk the
raw data of all the rotors analyzed in the last session using
the “.TXT” or “.DAT” formats. If required these raw data
disks can be viewed on a PC.
This option allows the operator to save on floppy disk the
file where the instrument stores any operation performed
and any command received. If required, this file may be
delivered to IL for troubleshooting purposes.
This option is dimmed (the Decapper unit is a feature not
available at this time).
This option is always dimmed (only for R&D purposes).
This option is always dimmed (only for R&D purposes).
Backup / Restore
Archive
Software
Save Last Rotor Map
Save Trace
Decapper
Debug
Testing
Chapter 2 - Operator Interface Description
Page 13 of 13
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
Chapter 3
General Description
This chapter of the manual contains general descriptions about the ACL Elite/ElitePro
system, including the use and functionality. Following are the specific sections.
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
Main Fluidic System Description
Main Optic System Description
Electronic Description
Main Hardware Components Description
Software Description
Note: Refer to section 7.0 of this manual for specific adjustment
procedures and locations.
3.1 Main Fluidic System Description
This section provides information about the fluidic system functionality during the
analysis and on its components.
The fluidic functions are sampling, dispensing and flushing the system.
The ACL Elite/ElitePro fluidic system includes the components described in the
following sub-sections.
3.1.1
3.1.2
3.1.3
Wash-Reference Emulsion bottle.
Dilutors Chamber and Electro-Valves.
Sample Arm Assembly.
3.1.1
Wash-Reference Emulsion bottle
This is a plastic bottle containing 1 L of silicon emulsion that is used as a wash
solution for the Needles Block and for the optical reference of the Coagulimetric
Channel.
A capacitive sensor located inside the bottle detects the Wash-Reference Emulsion
level.
Chapter 3 General Description
Page 1 of 40
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
3.1.2
Dilutors Chamber and Electro-Valves
The Dilutor Chamber is an acrylic block with two cylinders which contain a stainless
steel piston and an O ring / Teflon seal.
A stepping motor and lead screw on which the fork actuator for the piston is mounted
drives each piston.
Volumes up to 140 µl can be aspirated or dispensed. Since the pistons do not touch
the walls of the chambers in which they move, the volume of the liquid dispensed
depends entirely upon the accuracy of the piston and the travel.
The travel is determined by the stepping motor and driving lead screw.
Note: Due to the critical adjustment and burn-in procedure required after the O ring
replacement, no service action must be attempted at sub assy level in the field.
In order to keep different liquids separate in the same fluidic line (ex: The in line
Wash-Reference Emulsion and sample or reagent) the instrument loads a small air
bubble between the two liquids.
The two Electro-Valves are mounted within the Dilutors Chamber, each one
connected to one of the pistons. Two Electro-Valves are electronically controlled and
connect the pistons to the Wash-Reference Emulsion bottle as well as to the two
needles of the Needles Block mounted on the Sample Arm.
The “Instrument Fluidic System Diagram” is provided in figure 3.1.2 Drawing 1 of
the Chapter 10 “Drawings”.
Page 2 of 40
Chapter 3 General Description
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
3.1.3
Sample Arm Assembly
Two stainless steel needles (External for Sample, Auxiliary Material and Reagent and
the Internal for Reagent only) are mounted on the end of the Sample Arm that is
moved by the Sample Arm Movement Assy.
The Sample Arm allows the Needles Block to move in the proper positions and to
perform with the dilutors the following operations.
-
Aspiration of sample, reagent and auxiliary material from their respective
locations.
Dispensing into the internal and external compartments of the reaction
cuvettes within the rotor.
Washing of the needles with Wash-Reference Emulsion in the Rinse/Waste
Reservoir.
Two specific capacitive sensors connected to the Needle Block are used to detect the
level of the liquid around the sample (External) and reagent (Internal) needle.
These liquid sensors are integrated into the ACL analytical cycles in such a way that
their operation does not affect the throughput of the system.
For all analytical cycles the verification by the sensors is done “in-line” during the
loading phase. The sampling arm stops when the needle is just below the liquid
surface to allow proper aspiration of the programmed amount of liquid.
Following is the sequence of the sensor operations during a cycle.
-
self-check
liquid test
washing
final sensor self-check
Operators are warned of sensor failures. Results for a sample for which the system
detected insufficient volume will appear with a warning. In the case that all sample
containers in the sample tray are empty the cycle will be aborted after the final selfcheck. No other warnings appear on the video or on the printer.
Chapter 3 General Description
Page 3 of 40
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
3.2 Main Optic System Description
This section provides information about the optic system onboard used by the
instrument to perform the analysis on the samples / reagent reaction during the
acquisition cycle as well as on its main components.
The ACL uses two different optic principles to measure the hemostasis parameters:
-
The light scattering (nephelometry) used for the Coagulimetric Channel.
The light absorption used for the Chromogenic Channel.
Emerging
Light
Rotor
Cuvette
Chromogenic
Channel
Sample
Scattered
Light
Coagulimetric
Channel
Incident
Light
The rotor cuvette loading and analysis area also houses two optical systems for
analysis: Coagulimetric (nephelometric method) and Chromogenic (absorbance
method). Following are the specific sub-section.
3.2.1 Coagulimetric Channel
3.2.2 Chromogenic Channel
Page 4 of 40
Chapter 3 General Description
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
3.2.1
Coagulimetric channel
The ACL coagulimetric channel uses the light scattering method.
The system measures the rise in turbidity caused by the formation of the clot, within
the rotor cuvettes.
When a ray of light passes through a medium containing finely dispersed matter in
suspension, the ray is diffused by the particles (light scattering) due to the reflection
and refraction phenomena.
The diffused light is measured at 90° with respect to the incident light (see next
figure). This system is known as nephelometric measurement.
Nephelometric analysis is particularly suited for the determination of the very finely
dispersed matter. Figure below shows the ACL optic system.
The coagulimetric channel uses a high efficiency light emitter diode (LED) as light
source (wavelength is 660 nm approx.).
The light radiation coming from the LED is transferred to the Rotor Holder using an
optic fibre system.
Due to the narrow bending radius required connecting the LED output to the rotor
mounting assy, the use of a very flexible optic fibre is required.
For this reason a multiple fibres system, composed by a large number of single fibres
(about 1000), is used.
The optic fibre is locked to both the emitter side and the rotor side, using 2 set screws.
Note: When the optic fibre is locked on the diode side, the applied torque cannot
exceed 90° degrees CW or CCW at the rotor holder side.
A specific circuit, powered by the Switching Mode Power Supply Board with the +12
Vdc, provides a constant current to the diode.
Chapter 3 General Description
Page 5 of 40
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
The light emitter is also equipped with a “LED OFF” line, coming from the Motor
Board (Board #5), which de-activates the LED when the instrument enters the Standby status.
The light generated by the light emitter diode is transmitted through the optic fibre
and is scattered by the reaction mixture present in the rotor cuvette. This scattered
light is read by using a solid state optical detector, which is installed below the Rotor
Holder and is directly connected to the Acquisition & Sensors Board (Board #3)
through a coaxial cable.
3.2.2
Chromogenic channel
The Chromogenic Channel is based on the light absorption principle.
A polychromatic source of light hits the cuvette content.
The radiation passes through the solution contained in the cuvette and the unabsorbed
portion of light reaches the photocell that transforms the light energy of the ray
striking it into an electrical signal. Figure below shows the ACL optic system.
The Chromogenic Channel uses a Halogen lamp with an effective life of 1000 hours.
The main characteristics of the lamp are the following:
•
•
Voltage: 6 V
Wattage: 10 W
The lamp is installed into an appropriate socket that allows an easy installation into
the Source Lamp assy. The Halogen Lamp Socket can be replaced by accessing the
area through a removable cover inside the rotor waste area, in the center of the
Page 6 of 40
Chapter 3 General Description
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
instrument. In case of replacement of the halogen lamp, attention must be paid to
avoid that fingerprints are left on the lamp bulb.
The Chromogenic Lamp is powered at a regulated voltage, generated by a particular
electronic circuit located onto the Switch Mode Power Supply. The circuit is provided
with protections against open circuit and short circuit.
The lamp is activated only during the chromogenic cycles, and when the instrument is
in the Service programs.
The lamp beam passes through an optical filter that “removes” the infrared radiation
(named antiheat filter) in order to avoid damage to the fibre, caused by the high
temperature present near the lamp. The filter is mounted in the Halogen Lamp
Assembly. The beam passes through a quartz optic fibre, and then is fed to the rotor
through a focusing system, composed by an optic condenser (the two lenses).
The assembly composed by the focusing system plus the optic fibre is called Optical
Collimator Assembly.
One end of the optic fibre is secured to the source lamp assembly by means of a
setscrew, while the other end, is secured below the rotor mounting assembly.
The quantity of radiation unabsorbed by the cuvette contents, passes through a 405
nm interference filter and than is detected by an optical sensor (solid state
photodiode).
Both the optical detector and the filter are mounted in the Rotor Holder Cover.
The photodetector is directly connected to the Acquisition & Sensor Board #3 through
a coaxial cable.
Note: The optical path width for the Chromogenic Channel is 0.5 cm (cuvette height).
The absorbance values provided by the analyzer are normalized to 1 cm. These values
are generally double the ones obtained on other ACL models, for which the
absorbance values are strictly the ones obtained for the 0.5 cm cuvette path.
3.3 Electronic Description
This section describes the electronic system of the instrument.
Electronic drawings and explanation of the logical functionality are also included.
Following are the specific sub-sections.
3.3.1
3.3.2
3.3.3
3.3.4
3.3.5
3.3.6
3.3.7
3.3.8
3.3.9
3.3.10
Interconnection schematic
Quick reference board function table
Quick reference board function diagram
CPU Master Board #1
Slave Board #2
Acquisition & Sensors Board #3
Rotor Exchange Module Board #4 (Excluded in ACL Elite)
Motors Board #5
Photometric & Temperatures Control Board #6
Switching Power Supply Board
Chapter 3 General Description
Page 7 of 40
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
3.3.11
3.3.12
3.3.1
Instrument Ground Circuit
Interface Board
Interconnection Schematic
The purpose of this drawing is to clarify the starting point and the route of each major
signal present in the Instrument.
The major modules are logically grouped. An exception is made for the big Module
Interconnection Board which is split for better identification of each single module
driven.
The “Mother Board and Interconnections General Block Diagrams” is available in
figure 3.3.1 Drawing 1 of the Chapter 10 “drawings”.
Page 8 of 40
Chapter 3 General Description
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
3.3.2
Quick Reference Board Functions Table
This sub-section is designed to describe the circuits on the main boards and the main
modules and parts driven. Following is the board function table.
BOARDS
CPU Master
Board # 1
MAIN COMPONENTS /
CIRCUITS
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Main Microprocessor
IDE Hard Disk, Floppy
Disk controller
Serial/Parallel/USB Port
controller
Ethernet controller
•
•
Arcnet controller
Serial Port controller
• Communication with Slave
Board # 2
• Interface Board (Host port)
• Touch Screen Board (Touch
Screen)
•
•
•
Slave Microprocessor
Arcnet controller
Serial controller
• Communication with PC104
Board
• Control of Boards #3, #4, #5
and #6
• Internal Bar Code Reader
•
PC104 Board
Slave
Board # 2
Acquisition
& Sensors
Board # 3
MODULES / PARTS
CONTROLLED / DRIVEN
• A/D Converter
• Coagulimetric &
Chromogenic optic channels
amplification circuit
• Samples Tray detectors
circuit
• Needles Sensors drive circuit
• Reference Emulsion
presence circuit
• Analysis Compartment
Cover Hall Sensor circuit
Hard Disk and Floppy Disk
LCD Board (LCD)
Speaker
Interface Board (Mouse,
Printer, Keyboard, Ethernet
and USB ports)
• Coagulimetric &
Chromogenic Optical
channels
• Sample Tray Optical Sensors
• Liquid Level Detection Board
(Needles Block)
• Reference Emulsion Sensor
• Analysis Compartment Cover
Hall sensor
Chapter 3 General Description
Page 9 of 40
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
Rotor
Exchange
Module
Board # 4
(excluded in
ACL Elite)
Motors
Board # 5
Page 10 of 40
• REM Slave Microprocessor
• Power switching step-up
12v-24v
• Rotor Arm Horizontal Motor
drive circuit
• Rotor Arm Vertical Motor
drive circuit
• Transport Motor drive circuit
• REM Motors Dual Channel
Optical Switch reading
circuit
• Infra Red sensors drive
circuit
• Electromagnets drive circuit
• Rotors Feed Stack Cover
Hall sensor circuit
• Rotors Waste presence
detector circuit
• Rotor Arm Horizontal Motor
24Vdc
• Rotor Arm Vertical Motor
24Vdc
• Transport Motor 24Vdc
• REM Motors Dual Channel
Optical Switch
• Rotor Stack & Rotors Waste
Full Infra Red Sensors
• Rotor Arm & Rotor Stack
Electromagnets
• Rotor Stack Cover Sensor
• Rotors Waste Presence
Detector
• Power switching step-up
12v-26v
• Autosampler drive circuit
• Sample Arm Horizontal
Motor drive circuit
• Sample Arm Vertical Motor
drive circuit
• Reagent Dilutor Motor drive
circuit
• Sample Dilutor Motor drive
circuit
• Magnetic Stirrer Motors
drive circuit
• Dilutor Electro-valves drive
circuit
• Coagulimetric Channel LED
drive circuit
• Motors Dual Channel
Optical Switch reading
circuit (W/O REM Motors)
• Autosampler Motor 12Vdc
• Sample Arm Horizontal
Motor 12Vdc
• Sample Arm Vertical Motor
26Vdc
• Reagent Dilutor Motor 12Vdc
• Sample Dilutor Motor 12Vdc
• Magnetic Stirrer Motors
26Vac
• Dilutor Electro-valves 12Vdc
• Coagulimetric Channel LED
12Vdc
• Motors Dual Channel Optical
Switch (W/O REM Motors)
Chapter 3 General Description
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
Photometric
&
Temperature
s Control
Board # 6
• +5VREF generator circuit
• Rotor Motor drive circuit
• Rotor Cover Motor drive
circuit
• Rotor Holder
Thermoregulation
• Peltiers Thermoregulation
• Rotor Transport
Thermoregulation
• Rotors Stack
Thermoregulation
• Rotor Motor 70Vdc
• Analysis Compartment Cover
Motor 12Vdc
• Thermoregulation Rotor
Holder
• Thermoregulation Peltier 1
• Thermoregulation Peltier 2
(ACL ElitePro)
• Thermoregulation Transport
Plate
• Thermoregulation Rotors
Feed Stack
•
•
•
Power line filter
Voltages generators
Main current protection
circuit
Voltages protection circuit
Chromogenic Lamp
Protection circuit
•
All modules
•
USB 1.1 Hub takes single
USB port and generates 4
USB ports
Overcurrent protection for
each individual USB port
(USB port will be disabled
if overcurrent detected)
•
USB ports on Interface
Board
•
If USB port is shut down the
unit must be rebooted to reenable the USB port to active
state
Switching
Power Supply
Board
•
•
Interface
Board
•
3.3.3
Quick Reference Board Functions Diagram
This sub-section provides a graphical representation of the hardware components
correlation. The “Quick Reference Board Function Diagram” is available in figure
3.3.3 Drawing 1 of the Chapter 10 “Drawings”.
3.3.4 CPU Master Board (Board # 1) & PC104 Board
The CPU Master Board and the PC104 Board, located between the system Card
Housing and the Dilutor Assembly, are powered through the Switching Power
Supply, which provides a +5Vdc (DGT) and +12Vdc (DGT).
The CPU Master Board (Board #1) has a Personal Computer architecture design.
Chapter 3 General Description
Page 11 of 40
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
The “CPU Master Board General Block Diagram” is available in figure 3.3.4 Drawing
1, while the “PC104 Board General Block Diagram” is available in figure 3.3.4
Drawing 2 of the chapter 10 “Drawings”.
The main functions reported in the following outline are further expanded and
presented on specific paragraphs.
CPU Master Board General Block Diagram (see paragraph 3.3.4.a)
•
•
•
•
Software runtime.
Internal devices control.
External devices control.
Communication with PC104 Board.
PC104 Board General Block Diagram (see paragraph 3.3.4.b)
• Communication with the Slave Board (Board # 2).
• External devices control.
• Touch Screen control.
3.3.4.a CPU Master Board General Block Diagram (See figure 3.3.4 Drawing 1)
• Software runtime.
At the instrument power on the CPU Master downloads from the Hard Disk Drive
both the Operating System and the Application software. A local MEMORY BANK
is used during the software runtime. After downloading, the Board #1 starts system
initialization testing the instrument hardware through the Slave Board (Board # 2).
The control of the MEMORY BANK is achieved through the SYSTEM & DRAM
CONTROLLER and the MEMORY CONTROLLER. The Hard Disk Drive control is
performed through the SYSTEM & DRAM CONTROLLER and the PERIPHERALS
STANDARD CONTROLLER.
In addition to the Operating System and Application software the Hard Disk Drive
also allows Patient and Analytical Database storage.
The CPU Master Board reads the internal device configuration, through the SYSTEM
& DRAM CONTROLLER from the BIOS MEMORY.
• Internal device control.
The internal devices of the instrument controlled from the Board # 1 are:
The active matrix LCD (Liquid Crystal Display) controlled by the VGA
CONTROLLER and the VIDEO MEMORY (through the LCD ACTIVE
MATRIX CONNECTOR CN6). The VGA CONTROLLER can also support
Page 12 of 40
Chapter 3 General Description
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
standard PC monitor (through PC MONITOR CONNECTOR P1), and/or
passive matrix LCD (through the LCD PASSIVE MATRIX CONNECTOR
CN11).
The Floppy Disk Drive controlled by the PERIPHERAL STANDARD
CONTROLLER (through the FLOPPY DISK DRIVE CONNECTOR CN22).
The Hard Disk Drive (located under the CPU Master Board) controlled by the
PERIPHERAL STANDARD CONTROLLER (through the HARD DISK
DRIVE CONNECTOR CN23).
The SPEAKER (located on the rear of the system Card Housing) controlled by the
SYSTEM & DRAM CONTROLLER (through the UTILITY CONNECTOR
CN21).
• External devices control.
The external devices controlled by Board # 1 (through the Interface Board) are:
The standard PC Keyboard controlled from the SYSTEM & DRAM CONTROLLER
(through the UTILITY CONNECTOR CN21).
An external Ethernet interface controlled from the ETHERNET CONTROLLER
(through the ETHERNET CONNECTOR CN4).
An external Parallel Printer controlled from the PERIPHERAL STANDARD
CONTROLLER (through the PARALLEL PORT CONNECTOR CN26).
A PC serial Mouse controlled from the PERIPHERAL STANDARD CONTROLLER
(through the MOUSE SERIAL PORT CONNECTOR CN30).
Four USB ports (version 1.1) are connected to a integrated USB standard controller
thru connector CN24.
• Communication with PC104 Board.
The CPU Master Board communicates with the PC104 Board through the SYSTEM
& DRAM CONTROLLER and the PC104 CONNECTOR CN13 – CN14 – CN29.
The CPU Master Board receives the signal RESET from the Mother Board through
the UTILITY CONNECTOR CN21. This signal is generated from the Slave Board
(Board # 2) and is sent also to the PC104 Board.
The Board # 1 provides to the PC104 Board a +5Vdc (DGT).
Chapter 3 General Description
Page 13 of 40
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
3.3.4.b PC104 Board General Block Diagram (See figure 3.3.4 Drawing 2)
• Communication with the Slave Board (Board # 2).
The CPU Master Board communicates to the PC104 Board through the connector
CN13 – CN14.
The PC104 Board interfaces with the Slave Board (Board # 2) through the ARCNET
CONTROLLER, which is connected with the ARCNET CONNECTOR CN5 (CN4
could also be used as it replicates CN5 pinout, being parallel connected).
The controller is electrically de-coupled by means of the ISOLATION &
TRANSCEIVER CIRCUIT.
• External device control.
The CPU Master Board communicates to the PC104 Board through the connector
CN13 – CN14.
The PC104 Board, through the SERIAL CONTROLLER, controls the MODEM –
HOST – BAR CODE SERIAL PORT CONNECTOR CN7 – CN8 – CN9. These
serial ports though the Interface Board allow the instrument to communicate with the
external devices.
• Touch Screen control.
The CPU Master Board communicates to the PC104 Board through the connector
CN13 – CN14.
The PC104 Board through the TOUCH SCREEN CONTROL BOARD SERIAL
LINE CN6 and the TOUCH SCREEN CONTROL BOARD POWER CN3, controls
the Touch Screen Board located inside the Display assembly.
3.3.5
Slave Board (Board # 2)
The Slave board (Board #2) is located on the system card housing and powered
through the Switching Power Supply, which provides a +5Vdc (DGT).
The Slave Board is equipped with a microprocessor (MCU U1), a resident memory
bank and a circuitry handling various interrupt signals that are sent to the board.
Multiple data and address busses are employed: (D0 - D15 and A0 - A23) are used to
connect the MCU U1 to the internal bus (DB0 - DB15 and AB0 - AB23). The internal
busses are then buffered to external data and address bus (SLD0 - SLD15 and SLA0 SLA23) through which the Slave board communicates with the Boards # 3, # 5 and
# 6.
The “Slave Board General Block Diagram” is available in figure 3.3.5 Drawing 1 of
the Chapter 10 “Drawings”.
The main functions reported in the following outline are further expanded and
presented on specific paragraphs.
Page 14 of 40
Chapter 3 General Description
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
Slave Board General Block Diagram (see paragraph 3.3.5.a)
•
•
•
•
•
Main Reset circuits.
Power supply presence circuit.
Communication Section (see paragraph 3.3.5.b).
Memory Section (see paragraph 3.3.5.c).
Glue Logic Section (see paragraph 3.3.5.d).
Communication Section (see paragraph 3.3.5.b)
• Receives commands forwarded from the CPU Master Board (Board # 1).
• Controls the REM Board (Board #4) and the internal Bar Code Reader.
Memory Section (see paragraph 3.3.5.c)
• Programs run time and data storage.
Main Logic Section (see paragraph 3.3.5.d)
• Interfaces the Slave board with the external data and address bus.
• Interrupt controller.
3.3.5.a Slave Board General Block Diagram (See figure 3.3.5 Drawing 1)
• Main reset circuit
The RESET CIRCUIT U3 generates the signal RESET used to initialize the whole
system. The RESET CIRCUIT can be triggered by any of the following
devices/signals:
-
The MAIN LOGIC EPLD U12 (Main Logic Section).
The signal INIT generated on the Switching Power Supply.
The local microswitch RESET SWITCH SW1 (used only for manufacturing
testing purposes).
The LED LD1 is illuminated only when the signal RESET is present.
• Power supply presence circuit
Chapter 3 General Description
Page 15 of 40
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
The LED LD4 is illuminated always while the Board # 2 is powered with +5Vdc
(DGT).
3.3.5.b Communication Section (See figure 3.3.5 Drawing 2)
• Receives commands forwarded from the CPU Master Board (Board # 1).
The Slave board communicates with the CPU Master Board by means of an Arcnet
connection, using a dedicated cable and connector P6 (P7 could also be used as it
replicates P6 pinout, being parallel connected). The data transmission is handled by
the ARCNET CONTROLLER CIRCUIT U27.
The controller is electrically de-coupled by means of the ISOLATION CIRCUIT
ISO1 – ISO2. A DC/DC CONVERTER REG1, connected to the LED LD2, provides
a dedicated power supply to the TRANCEIVER CIRCUIT U29. A further circuit
controlled by the CANBUS CONTROLLER U28 is present but not used on the Slave
board.
• Controls the REM Board (Board #4) and the internal Bar Code Reader.
A serial communication is achieved by the SERIAL CONTROLLER CIRCUIT U31 –
U32. The serial controller is electrically de-coupled by means of the ISOLATION
CIRCUIT ISO3 – ISO10. A DC/DC CONVERTER REG2, connected to the LED
LD3, provides a dedicated power supply to the DRIVER CIRCUIT U33 – U34 – U35.
The serial communication line TX0 – RX0 coming from MCU U1, is also linked to
the DRIVER CIRCUIT U33 – U34 – U35, which handles the serial communication
line TXD4 – RXD4 to the REM board (board # 4).
Signals TRIGBARC, TX1 – RX1 are respectively utilized for both enabling
(TRIGBARC) and communicate (TX1 - RX1) with the internal Bar Code reader.
The serial ports P8 - P9 - P10 are not used during the normal operations. Use of these
ports is limited to the manufacturing process when the board is connected to external
devices, which program the resident logic.
3.3.5.c Memory Section (See figure 3.3.5 Drawing 3)
• Programs run time and data storage.
A few memory devices are employed to support the MCU U1 on the Slave Board,
these are:
The SERIAL EPROM U2 is directly linked to a serial port of the MCU U1.
The RAM STATIC MEMORY BANK U22-25 linked to MCU U1 through the data
bus DB0 - DB15 and the address bus AB0 - AB19.
The FLASH EPROM MEMORY U14 - U21 linked to MCU U1 through the data bus
DB0 - DB15 and the address bus AB0 - AB19.
Page 16 of 40
Chapter 3 General Description
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
The MCU U1 is also connected to the BOOT LOADER EPROM U26 from, which
downloads the boot program by sending the command CSBOOT while initializing.
3.3.5.d Main Logic Section (See figure 3.3.5 Drawing 4)
• Interfaces the Slave board with the external data and address bus.
The MCU U1 is connected through the data bus D0 - D15 to the INTERNAL DATA
BUS TRANSCEIVER U4, which outputs DB0 - DB15 as local data bus connecting to
other devices resident on the Slave board.
The local data bus BD0 - DB15, is then linked to the EXTERNAL DATA BUS
TRANSCEIVER U7 – U36. These devices output SLD0 - SLD15 (slave data bus),
which allows MCU U1 to communicate with the Board # 3, # 5 and # 6, located on
the system card housing.
The address bus A0 - A23 links MCU U1 to the INTERNAL ADDRESS BUS
BUFFER U5 – U6 which outputs AB0 - AB23 as local address bus connecting to
other devices resident on the Slave board.
The local address bus AD0 - AD23, is then linked to the EXTERNAL ADDRESS
BUS BUFFER U8 – U9. These devices output SLA0 - SLA23 (slave address bus),
which allows MCU U1 to communicate with the Board # 3, # 5 and # 6, located on
the system card housing.
The control signal R/W is fed to the INTERNAL ADDRESS BUS BUFFER U5 –U6
which outputs a signal BR/W connected to the MAIN LOGIC EPLD U12. The EPLD
generates the individual control signals RD and WR which are routed to the
INTERNAL ADDRESS BUS BUFFER U5 –U6 where they get converted into BRD
and BWR. The EXTERNAL INTERRUPT BUS BUFFER U10 – U11 buffer the
commands and output the commands SLRD and SLWR which become control signals
of the external data and address bus.
The MAIN LOGIC EPLD U12 also handles the chip select signals for the local
devices as well as the board select commands. The board select commands (BS0 BS3) are fed to the EXTERNAL INTERRUPT BUS BUFFER U10 – U11 which
provide outputs SLBS0 - SLBS3 to the Board # 3, # 5 & # 6 located on the system
Card Housing.
• Interrupt controller.
Possible interrupts generated outside the Slave board are input via the EXTERNAL
INTERRUPT BUS BUFFER U10 – U11 and then routed to the INTERRUPT
Chapter 3 General Description
Page 17 of 40
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
CONTROLLER EPLD U13. The EPDL U13 handles the interrupts following a
scheme of priority and sends signals IRQ1 - IRQ7 to the MCU U1.
The interrupts, which can be generated and logged into the Slave board are as follows:
INIT (Initial Reset)
This signal is raised from the Switching Power Supply and has the purpose of keeping
the system reset for a pre-defined period of time thus allowing the power supply
voltages to reach stability.
POWERFAIL
This signal is raised from the Switching Power Supply, which can detect a lack of
supply voltage, and may lead to a decrease of the dc voltages thus impairing proper
functioning of the logic.
STS
This can be raised by the Acquisition & Sensor Board (Board # 3) when the A/D
conversion has been accomplished and the data is available on the bus.
ELETFAIL
This can be raised by the Rotor Exchange Module Board (Board # 4) in case of
malfunction of an electromagnet thus impairing proper rotor displacement.
ROTCUV and ROTCUVZ
These can be raised by the Motor Board (Board # 5) and are utilized to highlight a
possible malfunction of either the rotor motor or associated device, such as the Dual
Channel Optical Switch.
ROTFAIL
This can be raised by the Photometric & Temperature Control Board (Board # 6) in
case of a malfunction of the Rotor Motor.
3.3.6
Acquisition & Sensors Board (Board # 3)
The Acquisition & Sensor Board, is located in the system Card Housing, and powered
through the Switching Power Supply, which provides the +5Vdc (DGT), +15Vdc
(ANA), -15Vdc (ANA) and +12Vdc (PW).
The Acquisition & Sensors Board communicates with the Slave Board (Board # 2)
through the signals SLD0 - SLD15 “slave data bus”, and the signals SLA0 - SLA7
“slave address bus”. This communication is supported by the control signals SLRD,
SLWR, RESET as well as the Board enabling signal SLBS0.
The “Acquisition & Sensors Board General Block Diagram” is available in figure
3.3.6 Drawing 1 of the Chapter 10 “Drawings”.
The main functions reported in the following outline are further expanded and
presented on specific paragraphs.
Acquisition & Sensors Board General Block Diagram (see paragraph 3.3.6.a)
Page 18 of 40
Chapter 3 General Description
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Reading Warning signals from Switching Power Supply.
Control signals for Switching Power Supply.
Multiplexer & Acquisition Section (see paragraph 3.3.6.b).
Channel Amplifier Section (see paragraph 3.3.6.c).
Sample Tray Detectors Emitter & Receiver Sections (see paragraph 3.3.6.d).
Needles Sensor Section (see paragraph 3.3.6.e).
Reference Emulsion Presence Section (see paragraph 3.3.6.f).
Analysis Compartment Cover Sensor Section (see paragraph 3.3.6.g).
Multiplexer & Acquisition Section (see paragraph 3.3.6.b)
• A/D Conversion for most important signals.
• Sends the interrupt signal STS to the Slave Board (Board # 2).
• Frequency generation for Magnetic Stirrer Motors.
Channel Amplifier Section (see paragraph 3.3.6.c)
• Optical channel amplification.
Sample Tray Detectors Emitter & Receiver Sections (see paragraph 3.3.6.d)
• Container on Sample Tray detection.
Needles Sensor Section (see paragraph 3.3.6.e)
• Liquid presence detection during the analysis loading cycle.
Reference Emulsion Presence Section (see paragraph 3.3.6.f)
• Reference Emulsion presence level in the bottle.
Analysis Compartment Cover Hall Sensor Section (see paragraph 3.3.6.g)
• Analysis Compartment Cover position detection.
3.3.6.a Acquisition & Sensors Board General Block Diagram (See figure 3.3.6
Drawing 1)
Chapter 3 General Description
Page 19 of 40
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
• Reading Warning signals from Switching Power Supply.
The Switching Power Supply, in case of malfunction, sends two warning signals to
the Acquisition & Sensor Board (Board # 3). The signal THERFAIL is raised by the
Switching Power Supply in case the temperature of the environment reaches a level
(about 60 C°), which is dangerous for the Switching Power Supply. If overheating is
detected (about 75 C°) the Switching Power Supply enters the Protection Mode
shutting down the power to the instrument.
The second signal MISSLAMP is raised by the Switching Power Supply when the
current for the Halogen Lamp gets too low.
Both signals enter in the PARALLEL I/O U5 and are read by the Slave Board.
• Control signals for Switching Power Supply.
The Slave Board (Board # 2) sends to the PARALLEL I/O U5 two control signals for
the Switching Power Supply. The first is the signal LAMPWR that controls the
Halogen Lamp status.
The second is the signal PWROFF that controls the +9Vdc, +12Vdc and +70Vdc
power voltage status.
3.3.6.b Multiplexer & Acquisition Section (See figure 3.3.6 Drawing 2)
• A/D Conversion for most important signals.
Following are the most important signals converted:
COAG – CHROM for the Analysis Compartment Optical Channels reading.
TPELT1 for the Peltier temperature detection.
TPELT2 for the second Peltier temperature detection (ACL ElitePro).
TROT for the Rotor Holder temperature detection.
TFSLITTA for the Transport Plate temperature detection.
TFSILOS for the Rotors Feed Stack temperature detection.
+5VREF for the 5V Reference voltage detection.
SCUVINT for the Sample Tray internal ring container detection.
SCUVEXT for the Sample Tray middle and external rings container detection.
SLIQ for the liquid presence detection.
SFLUSH for the Reference Emulsion level detection.
SHALL for the Analysis Compartment Cover closed detection.
The Board # 3 uses the multiplexer MPLX CIRCUIT U1 to select that signal will
convert the A/D CONVERTER CIRCUIT U11. This selection is driven by the
PARALLEL I/O U5 that sends the control signals MUX0 - MUX3 to the multiplexer.
The EPLD U6 controls with the start signal ADRC and the end signal ADSTAT the
conversion process of the A/D CONVERTER CIRCUIT U11. The EPLD U6 controls
the timer programmable TIMER PROG. U9 that allows the EPLD of work with the
Rotor Motor’s speed during acquisition at 600 or 1200 Rpm, and introduces a delay in
the acquisition time pre-selected in the Curve Adjustment Service menu (see section
Page 20 of 40
Chapter 3 General Description
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
7.2 for Coag. and section 7.3 for Chrom.). The EPLD U6 receives from the
PARALLEL I/O U5 the control signals AACQ to select the static or the dynamic
acquisition and the signals SCALF to select the delay for Coag. Ch. or Chrom. Ch.
The EPLD U6 receives the signals ROTCUV – ROTCUVZ from the Motors Board
(Board # 5) and they are very important signals to synchronise the data acquisition.
• Sends the interrupt signal STS to the Slave Board (Board # 2).
When the new data is ready the EPLD U6 receives the signal ADSTAT from the A/D
CONVERTER CIRCUIT U11, then enables the BUFFER 3-STATE U12 – U13 with
the signal RDADC and sends the interrupt signal STS to the Slave Board (Board # 2).
• Frequency generation for Magnetic Stirrer Motors.
The timer programmable TIMER PROG. U10 is used to produce the frequency
FREQST for the work of the Magnetic Stirrer Motors drivers on the Motors Board
(Board # 5).
3.3.6.c Channels Amplifier Section (See figure 3.3.6 Drawing 3)
• Optical channel amplification.
The Optical sensor of the Coagulimetric Channel is located under the Rotor Holder.
This sensor is connected to the Acquisition & Sensors Board through a coaxial cable
that enters in the specific amplifier’s box. The sensor’s signal enters in the
AMPLIFIER CIRCUIT U17 – U21, and the output COAG is one of the most
important signals converted in the Multiplexer & Acquisition Section. This circuit is
composed also by the trimmers RV1 used to adjust the Offset and RV2 used to adjust
the Gain during the instrument testing (see section 7.2).
The Optical sensor of the Chromogenic Channel is located under the Analysis
Compartment Cover. This sensor is connected to the Acquisition & Sensors Board
through a coaxial cable that enters in the specific amplifier’s box. The sensor’s signal
enters in the AMPLIFIER CIRCUIT U20 – U22, and the output CHROM is one of
the most important signals converted in the Multiplexer & Acquisition Section. This
circuit is composed also by the trimmers RV4 used to adjust the Offset and RV3 used
to adjust the Gain during the instrument testing (see section 7.3).
3.3.6.d Samples Tray Detectors Emitter & Receiver Sections
(See figures 3.6.6 Drawing 4 and Drawing 5)
• Container on Sample Tray detection.
The Autosampler is designed to accept patient samples, as well as calibrants on the
same tray (Sample Tray).
Chapter 3 General Description
Page 21 of 40
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
Forty positions are available to load patient samples. Two rings (outermost and
middle ring) can accept twenty cup/tubes each. A third ring (innermost) is available
on the Sample Tray and up to ten positions can be loaded with calibrants, controls
and/or reagents.
Two optical sensors are located in the Autosampler housing with the purpose of
detecting the presence of the containers in the Sample Tray. The internal sensor is
placed in the internal wall while the external sensor is placed in the external wall of
the Autosampler housing. Both the sensors detect the presence of the containers using
the refraction principle.
The power section for the infra red light emitter of the sensors is controlled by the
PARALLEL I/O U5 that sends the enabling signals ESCUV – ESCUVINT –
ESCUVEXT to the EPLD U6.
The Sample cup/tubes can be placed in the Sample Tray on two different rings. As the
sample cup/tubes can be placed on both the outermost and the middle ring, two
different levels of current are needed to drive the external sensor which shall detect
the presence of sample containers located either close (outermost ring) or far (middle
ring).
To select the most appropriate current level, the EPLD U6 sends the AUTOC signal
to the SWITCH CIRCUIT U26 which through the signals SCUVL1 – SCUVL2 set
the current level output at the CURRENT GENERATOR U43A – U46A.
The trimmer RV6 allows the adjustment of the current in the emitter during the
instrument testing (see sub-section 7.5.3). The outputs of the power circuit for the
external sensor are ANLED1 – KD1.
The auxiliary materials containers are placed in the innermost ring of the Sample Tray
and are detected by the internal sensor. The trimmer RV7 allows the adjustment of the
current in the emitter during the instrument testing (see sub-section 7.5.3).
The outputs of the power circuit for the internal sensor are ANLED2 – KD2.
The external sensor receives the refracted light and sends to the receiver circuit the
signal ET1 which is filtered and amplifier to produce the signal SCUVEXT. This
signal is then converted in the Multiplexer & Acquisition Section.
To select the right work’s level, the EPLD U6 sends the controls signal AUTOC to
the SWITCH CIRCUIT U26 that can link the trimmer RV10 to control the gain of the
AMPLIFIER CIRCUIT U27A.
The trimmer RV10 allows, for the outermost ring, the adjustment of the amplifier gain
for the receiver signal during the instrument testing (see sub-section 7.5.3).
Another control signal is BLIVSCUV which is sent to the COMPARATOR CIRCUIT
U48A to select the right work level and produce the logical signal PCUVEXT, then
this signal is read from the PARALLEL I/O U5. The DRIVER CIRCUIT U28
controls the LED DL1 that is lighted when the sample containers are detected during
the Autosampler / BCR Test (see sub-section 7.5.3).
The internal sensor receives the refracted light and sends to the receiver circuit the
signal ET2 witch is filtered and amplified to produce the signal SCUVINT, one of the
most important signals converted in the Multiplexer & Acquisition Section.
The circuit produces also the logical signal PCUVINT which is read from the
PARALLEL I/O U5. The DRIVER CIRCUIT U28 controls the LED DL2 that is
Page 22 of 40
Chapter 3 General Description
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
lighted when the auxiliary materials containers are detected during the Autosampler
Test (see sub-section 7.5.3).
3.3.6.e Needles Sensor Section (See figure 3.3.6 Drawing 6)
• Liquid presence detection during the analysis loading cycle.
The Liquid Level Detector Board, connected to the needles block assembly, sends the
signals AGOSS for the sample needle and AGOSR for the reagent needle to the
Acquisition & Sensors Board. The EPLD U36 selects with the enabling signals
EAGOS - EAGOR the sample/reagent needle sensor signal. The EPLD U36 also
controls with the signals EAUTOZEROS – RAUTOZEROS the reading or the reset
of the auto-zero circuit. The selected signals enter in the specific circuit and produce
the output signal SLIQ, which is then converted in the Multiplexer & Acquisition
Section. The EPLD U36 sends the control signals GXL1 – GXL2 to the SWITCH
CIRCUIT U51 which, according with the cycle in progress, sets the gain of the
AMPLIFIER CIRCUIT U39B by connecting either the trimmer RV11 (for the
Reagent) or RV12 (for the Sample) as appropriate.
The trimmer RV11 and RV12 allow the adjustments of the amplifier gain for the
output SLIQ during the instrument testing (see section 6.3.1). The signal SLIQ is also
compared with one of the three threshold signals SG1 – SG2 – SG3, this selection is
controlled by EPLD U36 to produce the logical signal PSAGO, then this signal is read
from the PARALLEL I/O U5. The DRIVER CIRCUIT U28 controls the LED DL4
that is lit when the liquids are detected during the Needles Sensor Test (see subsection 7.4.1). The PARALLEL I/O U5 sends to the EPLD U36 the signal EAGHITIP
aimed at enabling the entire liquid detectors circuit and the signal LGT2 to enables
the timer programmable TIMER PROG. U9.
3.3.6.f Reference Emulsion Presence Section (See figure 3.3.6 Drawing 7)
• Reference Emulsion presence level in the bottle.
The sensor located inside the cap of the Reference Emulsion bottle detects the volume
of the liquid in the bottle. The PARALLEL I/O U5 enables with the signal ECLKLIQ
the timer programmable TIMER PROG. U10, which outputs the clock signal
CLKSENSE, amplified and used with the name of CLKSINE as a reference. This
signal CLKSINE is sent to the sensor and returns to the board attenuated with the
name of BFLUSH. The signal attenuation is proportional to the missing volume of
Reference Emulsion, so the signal MFLUSH is the amplified reading of the sensor.
The EPLD U6 – U36 controls through the signal SFLH the SWITCH CIRCUIT U26.
This circuit then selects between the inputs MFLUSH and CLKSINE the output
signal MSENSE. The signal MSENSE is then amplified and output as SFLUSH from
the AMPLIFIER CIRCUIT U24. The signal SFLUSH is then converted in the
Multiplexer & Acquisition Section.
Chapter 3 General Description
Page 23 of 40
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
The trimmer RV9 allows the adjustments of the amplifier gain for the output signal
SFLUSH during the instrument testing (see sub-section 7.4.1). The trimmer RV8
allows the factory adjustment of the amplifier gain for the reference signal CLKSINE.
3.3.6.g Analysis Compartment Cover Sensor Section (See figure 3.3.6 Drawing 8)
• Analysis Compartment Cover position detection.
The magnetic sensor, located under the Fluidic Plate on the left side of the Analysis
Compartment, detects the presence of the magnet placed in the Analysis Compartment
Cover and outputs the signals COVDET1 – COVDET2 for the Acquisition & Sensor
Board. The circuit output, signal SHALL, is one of the most important signals
converted in the Multiplexer & Acquisition Section. The trimmer RV5 allows the
adjustments of the amplifier for the output signal SHALL during the instrument
testing (see sub-section 7.9.1). The signal SHALL is also used to generate the signal
PHALL which enters in the DRIVER CIRCUIT U28 to control the LED DL3 which
is illuminated when the cover is closed.
3.3.7
Rotor Exchange Module Board (Board # 4) (excluded from ACL Elite)
The Rotor Exchange Module Board, is located in the system Card Housing, and
powered through the Switching Power Supply, which provides the +5Vdc (DGT),
+15Vdc (ANA), -15Vdc (ANA) and +12Vdc (PW).
The R.E.M. Board is equipped with a microprocessor (CPU U1) and a resident
memory bank. The R.E.M. Board communicates with the Slave Board (Board # 2)
through the serial communications line TXD4 – RXD4.
The “Rotor Exchange Module Board General Block Diagram” is available in figure
3.3.7 Drawing 1 of the chapter 10 “Drawings”.
The main functions reported in the following summary are further expanded and
presented on specific paragraphs.
Rotor Exchange Module General Block Diagram (see paragraph 3.3.7.a)
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Reading of the Motor Dual Channel Optical Switch.
Rotors Waste container presence detection.
Rotors Feed Stack cover position detection.
CPU ready condition circuit.
Transport Motors Section (see paragraph 3.3.7.b).
Rotor Arm Motors Section (see paragraph 3.3.7.c).
Memory & Communication Section (see paragraph 3.3.7.d).
Infra Red Sensors Section (see paragraph 3.3.7.e).
Electro Magnets Control Section (see paragraph 3.3.7.f).
Page 24 of 40
Chapter 3 General Description
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
Transport Motor Section (see paragraph 3.3.7.b)
• Transport Motor drives circuit.
Rotor Arm Motors Section (see paragraph 3.3.7.c)
• Rotor Arm Horizontal Motor drives circuit.
• Rotor Arm Vertical Motor drives circuit.
Memory & Communication Section (see paragraph 3.3.7.d)
• Resident Memory Bank and communication with the Slave Board (Board # 2).
Infra Red Sensors Section (see paragraph 3.3.7.e)
• New and used Rotors presence detection.
Electro Magnets Control Section (see paragraph 3.3.7.f)
• Rotors loading from Caliper and Rotors Feed Stack.
• Sends the interrupt signal ELETFAIL to the Slave Board (Board # 2).
3.3.7.a Rotor Exchange Module General Block Diagram (See figure 3.3.7
Drawing 1)
• Reading of the Motor Dual Channel Optical Switch.
Three Dual Channel Optical Switches are mounted on the Transport and on the Rotor
Arm assembly to detect the positions of the motors. The motor position is coded by an
Encoder disk or flag located on the movement assy. The Dual Channel Optical Switch
sends to the Board # 4 the signals read on the Encoders. These signals enter in the
BUFFER CIRCUIT U27 – U28 – U29, which output the signals: SLOT_CAS –
EDGE_CAS for the Transport Motor, SLOT_ROT – EDGE_ROT for the Rotor Arm
Horizontal Motor and SLOT_HIG – EDGE_HIG for the Rotor Arm Vertical Motor.
These signals are routed directly or through the multiplexer MPLX CIRCUIT U6 into
the CPU U1.
The motor rotation, sensed by the Dual Channel Optical Switch, allows the CPU U1
to detect possible “motor failures”.
• Rotors Waste container presence detection.
Chapter 3 General Description
Page 25 of 40
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
The status of the mechanical switch, located inside the Rotors Waste container
compartment, is read through the BUFFER CIRCUIT U27, which outputs the signal
DOOR_WST to the CPU U1.
• Rotors Feed Stack cover position detection.
The magnetic sensor, located over the Rotors Feed Stack, is activated by a magnet
embedded inside the Feed Stack cover. The magnet sensor status is read through the
BUFFER CIRCUIT U30, which outputs the signal COP_SILOS to the CPU U1.
• CPU ready condition circuit.
The CPU U1 through the EPLD U2 controls the LED DL1, which is lit when the CPU
U1 is ready.
3.3.7.b Transport Motor Section (See figure 3.3.7 Drawing 2)
• Transport Motor drive circuit.
The Slave Board sends to the CPU U1 the command relative to the Transport Motor
movement. The CPU U1 controls the TRANSPORT MOTOR DRIVER U14 – DX1,
whose output signals are the motor phases M1A – M1BB. The CPU U1 uses the
demultiplexer DEMPL U29 to send the enable signal M1_PWR_ENA to the driver
circuit, and the multiplexer MPLX U6 to check the presence of the signal MO_CAS
generated by the driver only if there is a malfunction. The TRANSPORT MOTOR
DRIVER U14 – DX1 is powered by the LOCAL GENERATOR +24VPW U10.
The jumpers in M1 are factory pre-set to obtain full or half steps as required.
3.3.7.c Rotor Arm Motors Section (See figure 3.3.7 Drawing 3)
• Rotor Arm Horizontal Motor drives circuit.
The Slave Board sends to the CPU U1 the command relative to the Rotor Arm
Horizontal Motor movement. The CPU U1 controls the ROTOR ARM
HORIZONTAL MOTOR DRIVER U16 – DX2, whose output signals are the motor
phases M2A – M2BB. The CPU U1 uses the demultiplexer DEMPL U29 to send the
enable signal M2_PWR_ENA to the driver circuit, and the multiplexer MPLX U6 to
check the presence of the signal MO_ROT generated by the driver only if there is a
malfunction. The ROTOR ARM HORIZONTAL MOTOR DRIVER U16 – DX2 is
powered by the LOCAL GENERATOR +24VPW U10. The jumpers in M2 are
factory pre-set to obtain full or half steps as required.
• Rotor Arm Vertical Motor drives circuit.
Page 26 of 40
Chapter 3 General Description
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
The Slave Board sends to the CPU U1 the command relative to the Rotor Arm
Vertical Motor movement. The CPU U1 controls the ROTOR ARM VERTICAL
MOTOR DRIVER U18 – DX3, whose output signals are the motor phases M3A –
M3BB. The CPU U1 uses the demultiplexer DEMPL U29 to send the enable signal
M3_PWR_ENA to the driver circuit, and the multiplexer MPLX U6 to check the
presence of the signal MO_HIG generated by the driver only if there is a malfunction.
The ROTOR ARM VERTICAL MOTOR DRIVER U18 – DX3 is powered by the
LOCAL GENERATOR +24VPW U10. The jumpers in M3 are factory pre-set to
obtain the full or half steps as required.
3.3.7.d Memory & Communication Section (See figure 3.3.7 Drawing 4)
• Resident Memory Bank and communication with the Slave Board (Board # 2).
The CPU U1 controls through the data bus D0 – D7, the address bus A8 – A15, and
the BUFFER 3-STATE CIRCUIT U3, the RAM MEMORY U4 and the ROM
FLASH MEMORY U5, used for the program’s run-time and data storage.
The CPU U1 through the EPLD U2 sends the enable signals to the memories.
The serial communication line of the CPU U1 is linked with the SERIAL I/O
CIRCUIT U8, which handles the serial communication line TXD4 – RXD4 to the
Slave Board (Board # 2).
3.3.7.e Infra Red Sensors Section (See figure 3.3.7 Drawing 5)
• New and Waste Rotors presence detection.
Three optical sensors are located on the Rotor Exchange Module assy, with the
purpose of detecting the presence of the rotors along the route. This route begins in
the Rotors Feed Stack and ends in the Rotors Waste container. Two optical sensors
are located in the Rotors Feed Stack and one above the Rotors Waste container.
These three sensors detect the presence of the rotors using the refraction principle.
The upper sensor located inside the Rotors Feed Stack allows the system to detect for
presence of new rotors in the storage area of the Rotor Stack (over the mechanical
movements).
This sensor is powered by the POWER CIRCUIT Q7, which provides the signals
AFCS and CFC.
The sensor receives the refracted light and sends to the receiver circuit the signals
FCS, which is handled by the circuit to produce the signal FC_STR. This signal is
read by the CPU U1 through the multiplexer MPLX CIRCUIT U7. This circuit is
composed also by the trimmer PT1 used to adjust the signal during the instrument
testing (see sub-section 7.5.1).
The lower sensor located inside the Rotors Feed Stack allows the system to detect for
presence of a new rotor on the Rotor Transport plate.
Chapter 3 General Description
Page 27 of 40
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
This sensor is powered by the POWER CIRCUIT Q7, which provides the signals
AFCC and CFC.
The sensor receives the refracted light and sends to the receiver circuit the signals
FCC, which is handled by the circuit to produce the signal FC_CAS. This signal is
read by the CPU U1 through the multiplexer MPLX CIRCUIT U7. This circuit is
composed also by the trimmer PT2 used to adjust the signal during the instrument
testing (see sub-section 7.5.1).
The sensor located above the Rotors Waste container allows the system to detect the
conditions of “Waste container full”.
This sensor is powered by the POWER CIRCUIT Q7, which provides the signals
AFCW and CFC.
The sensor receives the refracted light and sends to the receiver circuit the signals
FCW, which is handled by the circuit to produce the signal FC_WST. This signal is
read by the CPU U1 through the multiplexer MPLX CIRCUIT U7. This circuit is
composed also by the trimmers PT3 used to adjust the reading of the signal during the
instrument testing (see sub-section 7.5.2).
The CPU U1 through the EPLD U2 sends the signal CK_LED, which is used to
enable the circuit.
3.3.7.f Electro Magnets Control Section (See figure 3.3.7 Drawing 6)
• Rotor loading from Caliper and Rotors Feed Stack.
Three similar mechanisms achieve the rotors loading on the Rotor Exchange Module
assembly. One of them is the Caliper, located over the Rotor Arm, used to load and
unload the Analysis Compartment and to move the used rotors to waste. Two of them
are located inside the Rotors Feed Stack to allow the correct rotors loading. These
mechanisms use three identical electromagnets. The CPU U1 through the EPLD U2
controls the POWER CIRCUIT Q1 – Q2 – Q3 – D7 – D8, which outputs the signals
used to power the electromagnets.
These signals are EMCL for the Caliper, EMS1 for the upper movement inside the
Rotors Feed Stack and EMS2 for the lower one. The signal EM_SUPPLY is used as
common to recover the high current produced during the electromagnet opening.
• Sends the interrupt signal ELETFAIL to the Slave Board (Board # 2).
The RESISTIVE CIRCUIT controls the signals for the electromagnets and sends the
warning TEM_CLM for the Caliper, TEM_ST1 for the upper movement, TEM_ST2
for the lower movement, and the signal 24V_MOT for the LOCAL GENERATOR
+24VPW. These signals are read by the CPU U1 through the multiplexer MPLX
CIRCUIT U7. If a warning signal is active the CPU U1 commands the EPLD U2 to
disable the electromagnet with the failure and sends the interrupt signal ELETFAIL to
the Slave Board (Board # 2).
Page 28 of 40
Chapter 3 General Description
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
3.3.8
Motors Board (Board # 5)
The Motors Board, is located in the system Card Housing, and powered through the
Switching Power Supply, which provides the +5Vdc (DGT), and +12Vdc (PW).
The Motors Board communicates with the Slave Board (Board # 2) through the
signals SLD0 - SLD7 “slave data bus”, and the signals SLA0 - SLA7 “slave address
bus”. This communication is supported by the control signals SLRD, SLWR, RESET
as well as the Board enabling signal SLBS2.
The “Motors Board General Block Diagram” is available in figure 3.3.8 Drawing 1 of
the chapter 10 “Drawings”.
The main functions reported in the following summary are further expanded and
presented on specific paragraphs.
Motors Board General Block Diagram (see paragraph 3.3.8.a)
• Reading of the signals originated by the Dual Channel Optical Switch mounted on
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
the Autosampler Motor, the Sample Arm Motors, the Dilutors Motors, the Rotor
Motor and the Analysis Compartment Cover Motor.
Sends the interrupt signals ROTCUV – ROTCUVZ to the Slave Board (Board #
2) and to the Acquisition & Sensor Board (Board #3).
Dilutor Electro Valves control.
Coagulimetric Channel LED status control.
Autosampler Motor Section (see paragraph 3.3.8.b).
Sample Arm Motors Section (see paragraph 3.3.8.c).
Dilutors Motors Section (see paragraph 3.3.8.d).
Magnetic Stirrer Motors Section (see paragraph 3.3.8.e).
Autosampler Motor Section (see paragraph 3.3.8.b)
• Autosampler Motor drives circuit.
Sample Arm Motors Section (see paragraph 3.3.8.c)
• Sample Arm Horizontal Motor drives circuit.
• Sample Arm Vertical Motor drives circuit.
Dilutors Motors Section (see paragraph 3.3.8.d)
• Reagent Dilutor Motor drives circuit.
• Sample Dilutor Motor drives circuit.
Chapter 3 General Description
Page 29 of 40
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
Magnetic Stirrer Motors Section (see paragraph 3.3.8.e)
• Magnetic Stirrer Motors drives circuit.
3.3.8.a Motors Board General Block Diagram (See figure 3.3.8 Drawing 1)
• Reading of the signals originated by the Dual Channel Optical Switch mounted on
the Autosampler Motor, the Sample Arm Motors, the Dilutors Motors, the Rotor
Motor and the Analysis Compartment Cover Motor.
The positions of the motors are coded by Encoder disks or flags located on the
movement assy. The Dual Channel Optical Switch sends to the Board # 5 the signals
read on the Encoders associated. These signals are:
SMALOW – SMAHIGH for the Autosampler Motor
SMOLOW – SMOHIGH for the Sample Arm Horizontal Motor
SMVLOW – SMVHIGH for the Sample Arm Vertical Motor
SMDREAG for the Reagent Dilutor Motor (uses a Single Channel Optical Switch)
SMDSAMP for the Sample Dilutor Motor (uses a Single Channel Optical Switch)
SMRTLOW – SMRTHIG for the Analysis Compartment Cover Motor
SMRLOW – SMRHIGH for the Rotor Motor.
These signals enter in the BUFFER CIRCUIT U7 – U8 then in the PARALLEL I/O
U1, which is controlled through the “slave data and address bus” from the Slave
Board (board # 2).
The motor rotation, sensed by the Dual Channel Optical Switch, allows the Slave
Board to detect possible “motor failures”.
• Sends the interrupt signals ROTCUV – ROTCUVZ to the Slave Board (Board #
2) and to the Acquisition & Sensor Board (Board #3).
The Dual Channel Optical Switch mounted on the Rotor Motor is very important to
achieve a proper reading during the Analysis Acquisition. Its signals SMRLOW –
SMRHIGH through the BUFFER CIRCUIT U7 – U8 enter the EPLD U41, which
sends the signals ROTCUV – ROTCUVZ to the Acquisition & Sensor Board (Board
# 3) and to the Slave Board (Board # 2).
• Dilutor Electro Valves control.
The Slave Board controls through the “slave data and address bus” the PARALLEL
I/O U1, which communicates the request status for the Electro Valves to the DRIVER
CIRCUIT U5. This driver energize/de-energize the Electro Valves through the power
signals EV1 – EV2.
Page 30 of 40
Chapter 3 General Description
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
• Coagulimetric Channel LED status control.
The Slave Board controls through the “slave data and address bus” the PARALLEL
I/O U1, which output enables the power circuit Q1 to send the signal LEDOFF to the
Coagulimetric Channel LED.
3.3.8.b Autosampler Motor Section (See figure 3.3.8 Drawing 2)
• Autosampler Motor drives circuit.
The Slave Board sends to the EPLD U43 the command relative to the Autosampler
Motor movement. The EPLD U43 through the demultiplexer DEMPLX CIRCUIT
U24 controls the AUTOSAMPLER MOTOR DRIVER U21 – U22, which output
signals are the motor phases MFA1 – MFA4.
The Autosampler Motor drives circuit is powered from the LOCAL GENERATOR
+5VPW U40, factory adjusted by means of the trimmer RV6.
The trimmer RV3 is factory adjusted to set the reference voltage to the demultiplexer
DEMPLX CIRCUIT U24.
3.3.8.c Sample Arm Motors Section (See figure 3.3.8 Drawing 3)
• Sample Arm Horizontal Motor drives circuit.
The Slave Board sends to the EPLD U42 the command relative to the Sample Arm
Horizontal Motor movement. The EPLD U42 through the demultiplexer DEMPLX
CIRCUIT U34 controls the SAMPLE ARM HORIZONTAL MOTOR DRIVER U31
– U32, which output signals are the motor phases MFO1 – MFO4.
The Sample Arm Horizontal Motor drive circuit is powered from the LOCAL
GENERATOR +5VPW U40.
The trimmer RV4 is factory adjusted to set the reference voltage to the demultiplexer
DEMPLX CIRCUIT U34.
• Sample Arm Vertical Motor drives circuit.
The Slave Board sends to the EPLD U43 the command relative to the Sample Arm
Vertical Motor movement. The EPLD U43 through the demultiplexer DEMPLX
CIRCUIT U38 controls the SAMPLE ARM VERTICAL MOTOR DRIVER U35 –
U36, which output signals are the motor phases MFV1 – MFV4.
The Sample Arm Vertical Motor drive circuit is powered from the LOCAL
SWITCHING POWER SUPPLY +26VPW U7. This circuit is also powered from the
LOCAL GENERATOR +5VPW U40. The trimmer RV5 is factory adjusted to set the
reference voltage to the demultiplexer DEMPLX CIRCUIT U38.
3.3.8.d Dilutors Motors Section (See figure 3.3.8 Drawing 4)
Chapter 3 General Description
Page 31 of 40
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
• Reagent Dilutor Motor drives circuit.
The Slave Board sends to the EPLD U42 the command relative to the Reagent Dilutor
Motor movement. The EPLD U42 through the demultiplexer DEMPLX CIRCUIT
U16 controls the REAGENT DILUTOR MOTOR DRIVER U13 – U14, which output
signals are the motor phases MFR1 – MFR4.
The Reagent Dilutor Motor drives circuit is powered from the LOCAL
GENERATOR +5VPW U40. The trimmer RV1 is factory adjusted to sets the
reference voltage to the demultiplexer DEMPLX CIRCUIT U16.
• Sample Dilutor Motor drives circuit.
The Slave Board sends to the EPLD U42 the command relative to the Sample Dilutor
Motor movement. The EPLD U42 through the demultiplexer DEMPLX CIRCUIT
U20 controls the SAMPLE DILUTOR MOTOR DRIVER U17 – U18, which output
signals are the motor phases MFS1 – MFS4.
The Sample Dilutor Motor drives circuit is powered from the LOCAL GENERATOR
+5VPW U40. The trimmer RV2 is factory adjusted to set the reference voltage to the
demultiplexer DEMPLX CIRCUIT U20.
3.3.8.e Magnetic Stirrer Motors Section (See figure 3.3.8 Drawing 5)
• Magnetic Stirrer Motors drives stage.
The Slave Board sends to the EPLD U43 the command relative to the Magnetic
Stirrer Motors movement. The EPLD U43 controls the MAGNETIC STIRRER
MOTOR DRIVER U25 – U26 – U27 – U28, which outputs signals are the motor
phases AGTR1A – AGTR4B. The driver circuit is powered from the LOCAL
SWITCHING POWER SUPPLY +26VPW U7. These driver circuits work with AC
motors, so they need the frequency signal STFREQ (50 Hz) from the Acquisition &
Sensors Board.
The REFERENCE VOLTAGE GENERATOR U39 and the THRESHOLD CIRCUIT
U11 allow to the COMPARATOR CIRCUIT U6 – U12 to detect a possible
malfunction of the magnetic stirrers. In case a malfunction is detected the
COMPARATOR CIRCUIT U6 – U12 outputs the warning signals ALAGTR1 ALAGTR4. These warning signals are read through the PARALLEL I/O U1 by the
Slave Board, and by the EPLD U43 that turns off the magnetic stirrer motor raising a
fail warning.
3.3.9
Photometric & Temperatures Control (Board # 6)
The Photometric & Temperatures Control Board, is located in the system Card
Housing, and powered through the Switching Power Supply, which provides the
+5Vdc (DGT), +15Vdc (ANA), -15Vdc (ANA), +9Vdc (PW), +12Vdc (PW) and
+70Vdc (PW).
Page 32 of 40
Chapter 3 General Description
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
The Motors Board communicates with the Slave Board (Board # 2) through the
signals SLD0 - SLD7 “slave data bus”, and the signals SLA0 - SLA7 “slave address
bus”. This communication is supported by the control signals SLRD, SLWR, RESET
as well as the Board enabling signal SLBS3.
The “Photometric & Temperatures Control Board General Block Diagram” is
available in figure 3.3.9 Drawing 1 of the chapter 10 “Drawings”. The main functions
reported in the following outline are further expanded and presented on specific
paragraphs.
Photometric & Temperatures Control General Block Diagram
•
•
•
•
•
Rotor Motor Section (see paragraph 3.3.9.a).
Analysis Compartment Cover Motor Section (see paragraph 3.3.9.b).
Rotor Thermoregulation Section (see paragraph 3.3.9.c).
Peltiers Thermoregulation Section (see paragraph 3.3.9.d).
Transport & Rotors Feed Stack Section (see paragraph 3.3.9.e).
Rotor Motor Section (see paragraph 3.3.9.a)
• Rotor Motor drives circuit.
• Sends the interrupt signal ROTFAIL to the Slave Board (Board # 2).
Analysis Compartment Cover Motor Section (see paragraph 3.3.9.b)
• Analysis Compartment Cover Motor drives circuit.
Rotor Thermoregulation Section (see paragraph 3.3.9.c)
• Rotor Holder temperature detection and control.
Peltier Thermoregulation Section (see paragraph 3.3.9.d)
• Peltier temperature detection and control.
• +5VREF generator circuit.
Transport & Rotors Feed Stack Section (see paragraph 3.3.9.e)
• Transport plate temperature detection and control.
• Rotors Feed Stack temperature detection and control.
Chapter 3 General Description
Page 33 of 40
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
3.3.9.a Rotor Motor Section (See figure 3.3.9 Drawing 2)
• Rotor Motor drives circuit.
The Slave Board through the PARALLEL I/O U4 sends to the EPLD U5 the
command relative to the Rotor Motor movement. The EPLD U5 controls the ROTOR
MOTOR DRIVER U7 – U8 – U10 – U14, which output signals are the motor phases
RF1 – RF4.
The Rotor Motor drive circuits are powered from the LOCAL GENERATOR +5VPW
U13.
• Sends the interrupt signal ROTFAIL to the Slave Board (Board # 2).
The circuits ROTOR MOTOR DRIVER U7 – U8 – U10 – U14 send the signals
VSENSE1 – VSENSE2 to the COMPARATOR CIRCUIT U12, which is aimed to
detect possible motor failure. If a failure is present this circuit outputs the signal
IRFAIL, which enters the BUFFER CIRCUIT U2. The buffer sends the interrupt
signal ROTFAIL to the Slave Board (Board # 2).
The Slave Board disables the interrupt ROTFAIL through the PARALLEL I/O U4,
which sends the signal ROTCLR to the EPLD U5. The EPLD U5 controls with the
signal NROTCLR the SWITCH CIRCUIT U18, which sends the signal CLFAIL to
reset the COMPARATOR CIRCUIT U12.
If there is a warning for high current, the driver circuits output the signals AACHOP –
BBCHOP, which are used to disable the EPLD U5
3.3.9.b Analysis Compartment Cover Motor Section (See figure 3.3.9 Drawing 3)
• Analysis Compartment Cover Motor drives circuit.
The Slave Board through the PARALLEL I/O U4 sends to the EPLD U5 the
command relative to the Analysis Compartment Cover Motor movement. The EPLD
U5 through the demultiplexer DEMPLX CIRCUIT U37 controls the COVER
MOTOR DRIVER U15 – U16, which outputs signals are the motor phases MFT1 –
MFT4.
The Analysis Compartment Cover Motor drives circuit is powered from the LOCAL
GENERATOR +5VPW U13.
The trimmer RV6 is factory adjusted to set the reference voltage to the demultiplexer
DEMPLX CIRCUIT U37.
3.3.9.c Rotor Thermoregulation Section (See figure 3.3.9 Drawing 4)
• Rotor Holder temperature detection and control.
Page 34 of 40
Chapter 3 General Description
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
The thermistor located inside the Rotor Holder sends the signal SROT1 – SROT2 to
the Photometric & Temperatures Control Board.
This signal is connected to the jumper JR1, the reference resistance R59 and to the
trimmer RV1. When the jumper JR1 is on the check position the trimmer RV1 allows
the factory adjustment of the circuit. When the jumper JR1 is in the reading position
the signal SROT1 – SROT2 is amplified and outputs as TROT, which is sent to the
Acquisition & Sensor Board (Board # 3).
The Slave Board through the Acquisition & Sensors Board acquires the temperature
of the Rotor Holder, and controls the PARALLEL I/O U4 that sends the enable signal
INCOIL to the EPLD U6. The EPLD U6 controls the thermoregulation circuit, which
provides the signal Z1 – FOTGND to the heating coil of the Rotor Holder. The circuit
that provides the power is also composed of:
The PACKET DELAY CIRCUIT U26A – U21 output signal TASTD, which controls
the timing of the sinusoidal wave signals packet.
The PHASE DISPLACEMENT CIRCUIT U22 output the signal COMROT that, with
the SWITCH CIRCUIT U19, controls the phase of the sinusoidal wave signal
generated by the OSCILLATOR CIRCUIT U23.
The IMPULSE GENERATOR U24 generate the signal that triggers the POWER
CIRCUIT Q11 that activates the LC oscillator circuit providing heating to the rotor
holder. The trimmer RV2 is factory set to obtain the most suitable time shift to the
power signal and avoid overcurrent which may damage the POWER CIRCUIT Q11.
3.3.9.d Peltiers Thermoregulation Section (See figure 3.3.9 Drawing 5)
• Peltier temperature detection and control.
The thermistor located inside the Peltier sends the signal SPELT1 to the Photometric
& Temperatures Control Board.
This signal is connected to the jumper JR2, with the reference resistance R86 and to
the trimmer RV3. When the jumper JR2 is on the check position the trimmer RV3
allows the factory adjustment of the circuit. When the jumper JR2 is in the reading
position the signals SPELT1 is amplified and outputs as TPELT1, which is sent to the
Acquisition & Sensor Board (Board # 3).
The Slave Board through the Acquisition & Sensors Board acquires the temperature
of the Peltier, and controls the PARALLEL I/O U4 that sends the enable signal
INPELT1 to the SWITCH CIRCUIT U19. This circuit outputs the signal ONPELT1
to active the CURRENT GENERATOR CIUCUIT U32A, which provide the current
signal +VP1 to the Peltier cell used to cool the Peltier assembly.
Another identical circuit, as reported in fig. 3.3.9 Drawing 5, is present on the Board #
6 for the ACL 1000, but not used in the ACL Elite.
• +5VREF generator circuit.
The Board # 6 has a dedicated voltage generator circuit, called REFERENCE
VOLTAGE GENERATOR +5VREF U29, which provides the signal +5VREF.
This reference signal is used in the temperature control sections and is also sent for
the conversion to the Acquisition & Sensor Board (Board # 3).
Chapter 3 General Description
Page 35 of 40
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
The reference value is factory pre-set through the trimmer RV4.
3.3.9.e Transport & Rotors Feed Stack Section (See figure 3.3.9 Drawing 6)
• Transport Plate temperature detection and control.
The thermistor located inside the Transport Plate sends the signal SSLITTA to the
Photometric & Temperatures Control Board.
This signal is amplified and outputs as TFSLITTA to the Acquisition & Sensor Board
(Board # 3).
The Slave Board through the Acquisition & Sensors Board acquires the temperature
of the Transport Plate, and controls the PARALLEL I/O U4 that sends the enable
signal INPREH to the SWITCH CIRCUIT U18. This circuit outputs the signal
ONSLITTA to activate the POWER CIRCUIT Q10, which provides the current signal
PSLITTA to the heating pad used to heat the transport plate.
The Transport Plate temperature detection and control is not used on the ACL Elite.
On the ACL Elite a jumper resistor pack is installed to simulate Transport Plate
temperature.
• Rotors Feed Stack temperature detection and control.
The thermistor located inside the Rotors Feed Stack sends the signal SSILOS to the
Photometric & Temperatures Control Board.
This signal is amplified and outputs as TFSILOS to the Acquisition & Sensor Board
(Board # 3).
The Slave Board through the Acquisition & Sensors Board acquires the temperature
of the Feed Stack, and controls the PARALLEL I/O U4 that sends the enable signal
INPREH to the SWITCH CIRCUIT U19. This circuit outputs the signal ONSILOS to
active the POWER CIRCUIT Q14, which provide the current signal PSILOS to the
heating pad used to heat the Rotors Feed Stack.
For the ACL Elite this circuit controls the rotor storage area pre heating.
Page 36 of 40
Chapter 3 General Description
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
3.3.10 Switching Power Supply Board
The Switching Power Supply Board, located under the dilutor assembly, provides to
the instrument +5VDGT, +12VDGT, +15VANA, -15VANA, +9VPW, +12VPW,
+70VPW and +6VLAMP.
The Power Entry provides the signal LINE-IN that allows the operation of the
Switching Power Supply. This signal must be in the range from 100-120Vac to 220240Vac (50-60 Hz).
The “Switching Power Supply Board General Block Diagram” is available in figure
3.3.10 Drawing 1 of the chapter 10 “Drawings”. The main functions reported in the
following outline are further expanded and presented on specific paragraphs.
Switching Power Supply Board General Block Diagram (see paragraph 3.3.10.a)
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Line filter.
Automatic identification of the line voltage.
Control & Protection stage for all the generators.
Sends the ready signal to the system.
Control the turn off of the power voltages.
Chromogenic Lamp drives circuit.
Communicate warning status to the system.
3.3.10.a Switching Power Supply Board General Block Diagram (See figure
3.3.10 Drawing 1)
• Line filter.
The Switching Power Supply Board has a LINE FILTER integrated on board.
• Automatic identification of the line voltage.
The Board through the POWER FACTOR CORRECTION BOARD PCB1 identifies
the line voltage connected to the instrument, and sets the Switching Power Supply
Board as appropriate. The line voltage acceptable for the Switching Power Supply
Board are100-120Vac to 220-240Vac (50-60 Hz).
Chapter 3 General Description
Page 37 of 40
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
• Control & Protection stage for all the generators.
The POWER CONTROL BOARD PCB2 controls all the voltage generators, and
protects them from short circuit or high voltage. If one of these problems is present on
the voltage GENERATOR +5VDGT, +15VANA and -15VANA, the POWER
CONTROL BOARD PCB2 sets to “Protection Mode”, turns off all the dc voltage and
lights the LED DL1. To recover proper working conditions it is necessary to switch
the system OFF for at least 20 seconds prior switching it back ON.
The TRIMMER RV2 – RV3 – RV4 – RV5 – RV6 are used to adjust the digital and
analog voltage outputs. The Test Points TP1 – TP9 are used for factory testing of the
Switching Power Supply Board.
• Sends the ready signal to the system.
At the instrument turn on, the POWER CONTROL BOARD PCB2 controls all the dc
voltage outputs, when all of them are stabilized, sends the signal INIT to the Slave
Board (Board # 2).
• Control the turn off of the power voltages.
When the POWER CONTROL BOARD PCB2 receives the signal POWEROFF from
the Acquisition & Sensors Board (Board # 3), it disables the power voltages
GENERATOR +9VPW, +12VPW and +70VPW.
• Chromogenic Lamp drives circuit.
When the POWER CONTROL BOARD PCB2 receive the signal LAMPWR from the
Acquisition & Sensors Board (Board # 3), enables the GENERATOR +6VLAMP that
turns on the Chromogenic Lamp.
• Communicate warning status to the system.
The POWER CONTROL BOARD PCB2 sends three warning signals to the system in
case of malfunction, which are detected as follows:
The signal POWERFAIL is sent to the Slave Board (Board # 2) if the output voltages
are lower than the 80% of the normal value, or in any case before that the Switching
Power Supply is turned off.
The signal THERFAIL is sent to the Acquisition & Sensors Board (Board # 3) if the
environment temperature is over 60 C°. If this temperature rises up to read 75 C°, the
Board sets to “Protection Mode” and turns off the instrument.
The signal MISSLAMP is sent to the Acquisition & Sensors Board (Board # 3) if a
Short Circuit or a no load is detected on the GENERATOR +6VLAMP.
Page 38 of 40
Chapter 3 General Description
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
3.3.11 Instrument Ground Circuit
This sub-section provides information about the Instrument Ground System, in order
to help the service engineer in the assembling of the circuit placed in whole the
Instrument.
The diagram of the “Instrument Ground Circuit” is available in figure 3.3.11 Drawing
1 of the chapter 10 “Drawings”.
3.3.12 Interface Board
The interface board provides serial and USB connections to peripheral devices such
as printer, mouse, keyboard and barcode scanner as well as communication to a host
system. A parallel printer port is also supported. The Interface Board connects to the
Pentium CPU.
NOTE: If the USB ports detect an overload the USB Hub disables that port or. To reenable the USB ports the instrument must be re-booted. The interface board is also
protected by 2 onboard fuses.
3.4 Main Hardware Components Description
This section contains a list of the main hardware components and modules, which
interact with each other to carry out the analytical process.
The figure below highlights some of the main hardware components of the ACL
Elite/Elitepro as viewed from the front of the instrument, while the main electronic
boards and system interconnection ports are located on the rear of the system.
Chapter 3 General Description
Page 39 of 40
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
1. Wash-Reference Emulsion Bottle with liquid level sensor.
2. Dilutors Assy.
3. Autosampler Housing with internal BCR and presence sensors for cups/tubes on
Sample Tray.
4. Reagent Tray Area with Peltier Assy for Reagents cooling & stirring. (positions
R9-R12 ACL ElitePro only).
5. Sample Arm with liquid level sensors in the Rinse / Waste position.
6. Floppy Disk Drive (covered).
7. LCD display with Touch Screen.
8. Rotor Stack Assy. (rotor pre-heating area for ACL Elite).
9. Rotor Holder automatic Cover.
10. Rotor Transport and Rotor Arm Assy. (excluded on ACL Elite).
11. Rotor Waste Container compartment with presence and status sensors.
12. Alphanumeric Keyboard.
13. Adapters Area.
14. Liquid Waste Outlet.
3.5 Software Description
This section contains a general description of the main software and its physical
location in the system.
At the turn on the instrument shows the CPU Master Board (Board #1) BIOS boot
screen with the CPU Master initialization.
Then the system loads the operating system and the application program from the
Hard Disk Drive and performs the initialization of both the electronic boards and the
modules.
The Hard Disk Drive stores all the software of the instrument, both the application
program (Analytical and Service programs) and backup files of the software working
on the Slave Board (Board #2) and R.E.M. Board (Board #4).
These two specific softwares are stored in the memories located onboard the Slave
Board and the R.E.M. Board where are located two slave microprocessors.
The two microprocessors load the software directly from the memories (Flash Eprom)
at the instrument turn on.
In order to load a new software revison in the instrument or download the software
from the Hard Disk Drive to the boards memories, the software upgrade procedure
has to be performed as described in the sub-section 7.16.
Page 40 of 40
Chapter 3 General Description
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
Chapter 4
Parts Replacement
This chapter of the manual contains general descriptions about the operations required
to replace the main assemblies as well as the electronic boards and the covers present
on the ACL Elite/ElitePro system.
Following are the specific sections.
4.1
4.2
4.3
Parts Replacement.
Instrument Covers Removal.
Instrument Boards Replacement.
Caution: Prior to any part replacement insure that the unit is turned off
and power cord disconnected.
4.1 Parts Replacement
This section is designed to guide the Service Engineer through the replacement of the
major assemblies contained in the Instrument.
Following are the specific sub-sections for each module.
4.1.1
4.1.2
4.1.3
4.1.4
4.1.5
4.1.6
4.1.7
4.1.8
4.1.9
4.1.10
4.1.11
Autosampler Assy Replacement.
Peltier 1 Assy, Peltier 2 Assy Replacement.
Sample Arm Assy Replacement.
Rotor Holder Assy Replacement.
Rotor Exchange Module Replacement. (excluded on ACL Elite)
Rotor Holder Cover Assy Replacement
Halogen Lamp Assy Replacement
Dilutors Replacement.
Display Replacement.
Hard Disk Drive Replacement.
Rotor Preheater Assy replacement (ACL Elite only)
4.1.1
Autosampler Assembly Replacement
The Autosampler Assembly is composed of a grey upper support called Flange
Adjustable that is moved by the mechanical assembly, located under the Fluidic Plate,
called Autosampler Movement Assy. The whole assembly is connected to the system
through the Module Interconnection Board.
Chapter 4 – Parts Replacement
Page 1 of 28
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
•
Procedure to Remove the Autosampler Assy
Materials / tools necessary:
- Standard tools.
Precaution
Make sure that the Instrument has been switched OFF prior to going through the
following procedure.
1
2
3
4
5
6
Remove the 2 screws that secure the Flange Adjustable.
Remove the Flange Adjustable.
Remove the 2 screws that secure the Internal Ring Sensor to the Fluidic Plate.
Remove from the Module Interconnection Board the connectors P72, P73, P74
and the 2 ground cables (see “Instrument Ground Circuit” figure 3.3.11
Drawing 1 of the chapter 10 “Drawings”).
Remove the 4 column screws that mount the Autosampler Movement Assy to
the Fluidic Plate.
Remove the Autosampler Movement Assy.
The Autosampler Movement Assy P/N 181108-30 includes the following spare parts:
-
•
1 Dual Channel Optical Switch flat (fixed with 2 screws) P/N 182356-80
1 Autosampler Internal Ring Sensor (fixed with 1 strap) P/N 84869-38
Procedure to Replace the Autosampler Assy
Materials / tools necessary:
- Standard tools.
Precaution
Make sure that the Instrument has been switched OFF prior to going through the
following procedure.
Page 2 of 28
Chapter 4 – Parts Replacement
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
1
2
3
4
5
-
Follow in the opposite direction the “Procedure to Remove the Autosampler
Assy” paying attention to the position of the Internal Ring Sensor cable with
respect to the encoder disk.
Perform the Motor Adjustment test for the Autosampler Motor as described in
the sub-section 7.6.5.
Follow the procedure for the Autosampler Assy module centering as described
in the sub-section 7.7.2.
Perform the check out & adjustment for the Internal/External Rings Sensors as
described in the sub-section 7.5.3.
Perform the verification/adjustment of the Needles Sensors as described in the
sub-section 7.4.
Peltier 1 Assy, Peltier 2 Assy Replacement
The Peltier 1 Assembly is located under the Fluidic Plate and is connected to the
system through the Module Interconnection Board.
•
Procedure to Remove the Peltier 1 Assy
Materials / tools necessary:
- Standard tools.
Precaution
Make sure that the Instrument has been switched OFF prior to going through the
following procedure.
1
2
3
Remove the connectors P121, P122, P123, P124, P126 and the 2 ground
cables (see “Instrument Ground Circuit” figure 3.3.11 Drawing 1 of the
chapter 10 “Drawings”).
Remove the 3 screws that secure the Peltier 1 Assembly.
Remove the Peltier 1 Assembly.
The Peltier 1 Assy P/N 181108-34 includes the following spare parts:
-
•
1 Peltier Temperature Sensor (fixed with 2 screws and 1 strap) P/N 181021-28
4 Stirrer Motors (removable after removed the black dissipater, which is fixed
with 3 screws located under the black dissipater) P/N 82433-10
Procedure to Replace the Peltier 1 Assy
Chapter 4 – Parts Replacement
Page 3 of 28
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
Materials / tools necessary:
- Standard tools.
Precaution
Make sure that the Instrument has been switched OFF prior to going through the
following procedure.
1
Follow in the opposite direction the “Procedure to Remove the Peltier 1 Assy”
paying attention to the location of the cables on the rear of the assembly.
Verify with a Magnetic Stirrer Bar the functionality of the 4 Stirrer Motors.
Verify that the Peltier 1 thermoregulation system works correctly as described
in the sub-section 7.14.
2
3
•
Procedure to Remove Peltier 2 Assembly (ACL ElitePro)
Materials / tools necessary:
- Standard tools.
Peltier 2 Assembly part number 181106-34
Precaution
Make sure that the Instrument has been switched OFF prior to going through the
following procedure.
NOTE: It is necessary to remove the Sample Arm Movement Assembly to gain access
to the Peltier 2 Assembly for removal. To remove the Sample Arm Movement
Assembly refer to Section 4.1.3.
1. Remove the sample Arm Movement Assembly (refer to section 4.1.3.)
2. Remove the connectors P131 and P132 and the 2 ground cables (see “Instrument
Ground Circuit” figure 3.3.11 Drawing 1 of the chapter 10 “Drawings”).
3. Remove the 3 screws that secure the Peltier 2 Assembly.
4. Remove the Peltier 2 Assembly.
•
Procedure to Replace the Peltier 2 Assy (ACL ElitePro)
Materials / tools necessary:
- Standard tools.
Precaution
Make sure that the Instrument has been switched OFF prior to going through the
following procedure.
1. Follow in the opposite direction the “Procedure to Remove the Peltier 2 Assy”
paying attention to the location of the cables on the rear of the assembly.
2. Replace the Sample Arm Movement Assembly. (Refer to section 4.1.3).
3. Perform all Sample Arm Movement and Sample Arm Assembly alignments as
described in sections 7.6.3, 7.6.4, 7.7.1, and 7.7.4.
4. Verify that the Peltier 1 thermoregulation system works correctly as described in
the sub-section 7.14.
Page 4 of 28
Chapter 4 – Parts Replacement
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
4.1.3
Sample Arm Assembly Replacement
The Sample Arm Assembly is composed of an upper support called Sample Arm and
a lower assembly, located under the Fluidic Plate, called the Sample Arm Movement
Assy. The whole assembly is connected to the system through the Module
Interconnection Board.
•
Procedure to Remove the Sample Arm
Materials / tools necessary:
- Standard tools.
Precaution
Make sure that the Instrument has been switched OFF prior to going through the
following procedure.
1
Loosen the knob, located on the rear of the Sample Arm, which fixes the
Needles Block.
Remove the Needles Block and then remove its connector for the liquid
sensor.
Remove the upper cover of the Sample Arm fixed with a screw.
Remove the Liquid Level Detection Cable from the Needles & Wash-R
Interconnection Board.
Loosen the 3 setscrews located at 120° on the aluminium support.
Remove the Sample Arm.
2
3
4
5
6
The Sample Arm P/N 181108-95 includes the following spare parts:
•
1 Needles Block P/N 181108-43
1 Liquid Level Detection Board P/N 182356-40
1 Liquid Level Detection Cable P/N 190675-75
Procedure to Remove the Sample Arm Movement Assy
Materials / tools necessary:
- Standard tools.
Precaution
Make sure that the Instrument has been switched OFF prior to going through the
following procedure.
1
2
3
4
Remove the Sample Arm as described in the above procedure.
Remove the connectors P91, P92, P93, P94 and the 2 ground cables (see
“Instrument Ground Circuit” figure 3.3.11 Drawing 1 of the chapter 10
“Drawings”).
Remove the 3 black columns that fix the Sample Arm Movement Assy.
Remove the Sample Arm Movement Assy.
Chapter 4 – Parts Replacement
Page 5 of 28
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
The Sample Arm Movement Assy P/N 190856-06 includes the following spare parts:
-
•
2 Dual Channel Optical Switch flat (fixed with 2 screws) P/N 182356-80
Procedure to Replace the Sample Arm Movement Assy
Materials / tools necessary:
- Standard tools.
- Sample Arm Centring Tool
P/N 190513-00
Precaution
Make sure that the Instrument has been switched OFF prior to going through the
following procedure.
1
2
3
Page 6 of 28
Follow in the opposite direction the “Procedure to Remove the Sample
Arm Movement Assy”.
Center the shaft of the assembly in the hole of the Fluidic Plate using the
Sample Arm Centering Tool P/N 190513-00.
Perform the Motor Adjustment tests for the Sample Arm Horizontal and
Vertical Motor as described in the sub-section 7.6.3 and 7.6.4.
Chapter 4 – Parts Replacement
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
•
Procedure to Replace the Sample Arm
Materials / tools necessary:
- Standard tools.
Precaution
Make sure that the Instrument has been switched OFF prior to going through the
following procedure.
1
2
3
Follow in the opposite direction the “Procedure to Remove the Sample Arm”.
Follow the procedure for the module centering of this assembly as described in
the sub-section 7.7.1. and also the procedure to fine adjust the Needles Block
Assy position as described in the sub-section 7.7.4.
Perform the Liquid Level Sensor test as described in the sub-section 7.4.
4.1.4
Rotor Holder Movement Assy Replacement
The Rotor Holder Movement Assy is located under the Fluidic Plate. The Rotor
Holder Movement Assy is connected to the system through the Photometer Interface
Board.
•
Procedure to Remove the Rotor Holder Movement Assy
Materials / tools necessary:
- Standard tools.
Precaution
Make sure that the Instrument has been switched OFF prior to going through the
following procedure.
1
2
3
4
Remove the Halogen Lamp Assy as described in the sub-section 4.1.7.
Remove the connectors P140, P141, P143, P144, P145, the Coag. Coaxial
Cable from the Board #3 and the 3 ground cables (see “Instrument Ground
Circuit” figure 3.3.11 Drawing 1 of the chapter 10 “Drawings”).
Remove the 3 black columns that fix the Rotor Holder Movement Assy.
Remove the Rotor Holder Movement Assy.
Chapter 4 – Parts Replacement
Page 7 of 28
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
The Rotor Holder Movement Assy P/N 181108-50 includes the following spare parts:
-
1 Dual Channel Optical Switch (fixed with 2 screws) P/N 70908-00
1 Rotor Holder Snap (fixed with 1 side screw) P/N 181108-51
1 Coagulimetric Sensor w/cable (fixed with 1 setscrew and 1 screw for the
ground cable) P/N 84869-46
1 Optical Collimator Assy (fixed with 2 screws) P/N 181021-95
1 Brushes Assembly (fixed with 2 screws and soldered at 2 wires) P/N
181024-43
1 Photometer Interface Board (fixed with 3 screws) P/N 182356-30
1 Coagulimetric Channel LED (fixed with 2 screws and 1 set screw) P/N
181025-15
1 Optic Fiber Assy for Coagulimetric LED P/N 067218-05
Following are notices about particular Spare Parts replacements.
-
-
Coagulimetric Sensor w/cable must be located in the bottom of the sensor
housing and insure the Black Spacer is located between the Coagulimetric
Sensor and its glass windows under the Rotor Holder.
Optical Collimator Assy must be placed in the bottom of its housing and the 2
screws must be properly tightened. The other side of the Optical Collimator
must be placed in the bottom of its Halogen Lamp Assy housing paying
attention not to damage the fibre when tightening the setscrew.
Brushes Assembly must be aligned so that the four brushes completely touch
the two rings under the Rotor Holder.
Coagulimetric Channel LED and Fibre must be located with the Optic fibre in
the bottom of the Rotor Holder housing (see Coagulimetric Channel in section
7.2).
Procedure to Replace the Rotor Holder Movement Assy
Page 8 of 28
Chapter 4 – Parts Replacement
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
Materials / tools necessary:
- Standard tools.
Precaution
Make sure that the Instrument has been switched OFF prior to going through the
following procedure.
1
2
3
4
5
4.1.5
Follow in the opposite direction the “Procedure to Remove the Rotor Holder
Movement Assy”.
Perform the Motor Adjustment test for the Rotor Motor as described in the
sub-section 7.6.1.
Follow the procedure for the module centering of the Rotor Holder as
described in the sub-section 7.7.3.
Verify that the thermoregulation system for the Rotor Holder works correctly
as described in the sub-section 7.14.
Perform the tests for both the Coagulimetric and the Chromogenic Channels as
described in sections 7.2 and 7.3.
Rotor Exchange Module Assembly Replacement (excluded on ACL Elite)
Note: Section 4.1.5 is not applicable to the ACL Elite.
The Rotor Exchange Module (REM) Assembly is composed of several mechanical
assemblies assembled on a common support, located under the Fluidic Plate, called
Rotor Exchange Module Assy (Basic).
The R.E.M. Assembly is located to the right of the Rotor Holder Cover and is covered
by the R.E.M. Cover. This includes the Rotor Stack module cover that allows the
insertion of new rotors in the Rotor Stack.
On the Rotor Exchange Module Assy (Basic) are located: the Rotor Arm, the Rotor
Transport and the Rotor Stack. Under the Rotor Exchange Module Assy (Basic) is
located the Rotor Arm Movement Assy. The Rotor Transport mechanical movement
is not removable as it is incorporated in the Rotor Exchange Module Assy (Basic).
The whole R.E.M. is connected to the system through the Upper and the Lower
R.E.M. Interconnection Boards. Following are the specific paragraph for the R.E.M.
sub-modules replacement.
4.1.5.a Rotor Arm Assembly Replacement
4.1.5.b Rotor Transport Assembly Replacement
4.1.5.c Rotor Stack Assembly Replacement
4.1.5.d Rotor Exchange Module (Basic) Replacement
4.1.5.a Rotor Arm Assembly Replacement
The Rotor Arm Assembly is composed of an upper support called Rotor Arm and by a
lower assembly, located under the R.E.M. and a common support under the Fluidic
Plate, called Rotor Arm Movement Assy. The whole assembly is connected to the
system through the R.E.M. Upper and Lower Interconnection Board.
Chapter 4 – Parts Replacement
Page 9 of 28
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
•
Procedure to Remove the Rotor Arm
Materials / tools necessary:
- Standard tools.
Precaution
Make sure that the Instrument has been switched OFF prior to going through the
following procedure.
1
2
3
Remove the connector P112 of the Electro-Magnet.
Loosen the 3 setscrews located at 120° on the aluminium support securing the
arm to the shaft.
Remove the Rotor Arm.
The Rotor Arm P/N 181108-55 includes the following spare parts:
-
•
1 Spring for Rotor Arm P/N 181103-06
1 Electro-Magnet (fixed with 2 screws) P/N 181108-60
Procedure to Remove the Rotor Arm Movement Assy
Materials / tools necessary:
- Standard tools.
Precaution
Make sure that the Instrument has been switched OFF prior to going through the
following procedure.
1
2
3
4
Remove the connectors P104, P105, P107, P108 and the ground cable (see
“Instrument Ground Circuit” figure 3.3.11 Drawing 1 of the chapter 10
“Drawings”).
Remove the Rotor Exchange Module Assy (Basic) as described in this subsection at the paragraph 4.1.5.d.
Remove the 3 nuts that fix the Rotor Arm Movement Assy.
Remove the Rotor Arm Movement Assy.
Page 10 of 28
Chapter 4 – Parts Replacement
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
The Rotor Arm Movement Assy P/N 181108-54 includes the following spare parts:
-
•
2 Dual Channel Optical Switch flat (fixed with 2 screws) P/N 182356-80
Procedure to Replace the Rotor Arm Movement Assy
Materials / tools necessary:
- Standard tools.
Precaution
Make sure that the Instrument has been switched OFF prior to going through the
following procedure.
1
2
•
Follow in the opposite direction the “Procedure to remove the Rotor Arm
Movement Assy”.
Perform the Motor Adjustment tests for the Rotor Arm Horizontal and
Vertical Motor as described in the sub-sections 7.6.8 and 7.6.9.
Procedure to Replace the Rotor Arm
Materials / tools necessary:
- Standard tools.
Precaution
Make sure that the Instrument has been switched OFF prior to going through the
following procedure.
1
2
3
Follow in the opposite direction the “Procedure to Remove the Rotor Arm”.
Follow the module centering procedure to align the Rotor Arm at the Rotor
Transport as described in the sub-section 7.7.6.
Follow the module centering procedure to align the R.E.M. at the Rotor
Holder as described in the sub-section 7.7.7.
Chapter 4 – Parts Replacement
Page 11 of 28
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
4.1.5.b Rotor Transport Assembly Replacement
The Rotor Transport Assembly is composed of a black upper support (like a Rotor
Holder) called Rotor Transport and by a mechanical movement (moved by the
Transport Motor) incorporated in the R.E.M. Assy (Basic) located under the Fluidic
Plate. The whole assembly is connected to the system through the R.E.M. Lower
Interconnection Board.
•
Procedure to Remove the Rotor Transport
Materials / tools necessary:
- Standard tools.
Precaution
Make sure that the Instrument has been switched OFF prior to going through the
following procedure.
1
2
3
Remove the connector P111 of the thermoregulation.
Loose the 3 screws that fix the Rotor Transport.
Remove the Rotor Transport.
The Rotor Transport P/N 181108-57 doesn’t include spare part.
Page 12 of 28
Chapter 4 – Parts Replacement
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
•
Procedure to Replace the Rotor Transport
Materials / tools necessary:
- Standard tools.
Precaution
Make sure that the Instrument has been switched OFF prior to going through the
following procedure.
1
2
Follow in the opposite direction the “Procedure to Remove the Rotor
Transport”.
Verify that the thermoregulation system for the Rotor Transport works
correctly as described in the section 7.14.
4.1.5.c Rotor Stack Assy Replacement
The Rotor Stack Assy is located on the right side of the R.E.M. The whole assembly
is connected to the system through the R.E.M. Upper Interconnection Board.
•
Procedure to Remove the Rotor Stack Assy
Materials / tools necessary:
- Standard tools.
Precaution
Make sure that the Instrument has been switched OFF prior to going through the
following procedure.
1
2
3
Remove the connectors P113, P114, P116, P117, P118, P119 and the ground
cable (see “Instrument Ground Circuit” figure 3.3.11 Drawing 1 of the chapter
10 “Drawings”).
Remove the 3 screws, located under the common support, which fix the Rotor
Stack Assembly (see “Rotor Exchange Module Replacement” figure 4.1.5
Drawing 1 of the chapter 10 “Drawings”).
Remove the Rotor Stack Assy.
The Rotor Stack Assy P/N 181108-94 includes the following spare parts:
-
2 Electro-Magnet (fixed with 2 screws) P/N 181108-60
2 Spring for Rotor Stack P/N 181103-22
1 Rotor Stack Cover Sensor (fixed with a screw) P/N 182356-70
1 Optical Sensor Rotor Stack Upper P/N 84869-36
1 Optical Sensor Rotor Stack Lower P/N 84869-37
Chapter 4 – Parts Replacement
Page 13 of 28
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
•
Procedure to Replace the Rotor Stack Assy
Materials / tools necessary:
- Standard tools.
- Silos Alignment tool
Precaution
Make sure that the Instrument has been switched OFF prior to going through the
following procedure.
1
2
3
4
5
6
Follow in the opposite direction the “Procedure to Remove the Rotor Stack
Assy”.
Verify that the thermoregulation system for the Rotor Stack works correctly as
described in the section 7.14.
Follow the module centering procedure to align the Rotor Stack and the Rotor
Transport as described in the sub-section 7.7.5.
Perform the Optic Sensor test for the Rotor Stack as described in the subsection 7.5.1.
Verify that the Rotor Stack Cover Sensor works correctly as described in the
sub-section 7.9.2.
Perform the RA – SL – RH test as described in the sub-section 7.7.9 to verify
the proper rotors movements inside the Rotor Stack.
4.1.5.d Rotor Exchange Module Assy (Basic) Replacement
The Rotor Exchange Module Assy (Basic) is an assembly that incorporates the black
R.E.M. Common Support plate, the Rotor Transport mechanical movement and the
Transport Motor.
•
Procedure to Remove the R.E.M. Assy (Basic)
Materials / tools necessary:
- Standard tools.
Precaution
Make sure that the Instrument has been switched OFF prior to going through the
following procedure.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Remove the Halogen Lamp as described in the sub-section 4.1.7.
Remove the 2 screws, which fix the Coag. Channel LED without removing the
Optic Fiber.
Remove the Rotor Arm as described in the paragraph 4.1.5.a.
Remove the Rotor Transport as described in the paragraph 4.1.5.b.
Remove the Rotor Stack as described in the paragraph 4.1.5.c.
Remove the connectors P103, P104, P105, P106, P107, P108, P109, P110 and
the 2 ground (see “Instrument Ground Circuit” figure 3.3.11 Drawing 1 of the
chapter 10 “Drawings”).
Raise the Instrument on the 2 Main Support legs.
Remove the 5 fixing screws, located on the Fluidic Plate, which fix the whole
assembly (See the “REM Common Support Position 3” in the drawing
Page 14 of 28
Chapter 4 – Parts Replacement
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
9
10
11
12
“R.E.M. Replacement” available in the figure 4.1.5 drawing 1 of the chapter
10 “Drawings”).
Hold with one hand the right side, then slowly push down the left side of the
REM Common Support (See the “REM Common Support Position 2” in the
drawing “R.E.M. Replacement” available in the figure 4.1.5 drawing 1 of the
chapter 10 “Drawings”).
Remove the whole REM Common Support following the arrows (See the
“REM Common Support Position 1” in the drawing “R.E.M. Replacement”
available in the figure 4.1.5 drawing 1 of the chapter 10 “Drawings”).
Remove the Rotor Arm Movement Assy fixed with 3 nuts.
The assembly that includes the black R.E.M. Common support plate, the Rotor
Transport mechanical movement and the Transport Motor is called Rotor
Exchange Module Assy (Basic).
The Rotor Exchange Module Assy (Basic) P/N 181108-53 includes the following
spare parts:
-
•
1 Dual Channel Optical Switch flat (fixed with 2 screws) P/N 182356-80
1 Rotor Transport Motor (fixed with 4 screws) P/N 82433-00
1 Optical Sensor Rotor Waste Full (fixed with 4 screws) P/N 84869-47
Procedure to Replace the R.E.M. Assy (Basic)
Materials / tools necessary:
- Standard tools.
Precaution
Make sure that the Instrument has been switched OFF prior to going through the
following procedure.
1
2
3
Secure with the 3 nuts the Rotor Arm Movement Assy in place.
Put the whole REM Common Support under the tilted Instrument (See the
“REM Common Support Position 1” in the drawing “R.E.M. Replacement”
available in the figure 4.1.5 drawing 1 of the chapter 10 “Drawings”).
Following the arrows lift the right side of the REM Common Support, paying
attention to center the 3 Rotor Stack fixing point holes in the Fluidic Plate
(See the “REM Common Support Position 2” in the drawing “R.E.M.
Chapter 4 – Parts Replacement
Page 15 of 28
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
4
5
6
7
Replacement” available in the figure 4.1.5 drawing 1 of the chapter 10
“Drawings”).
Hold with one hand the right side, then slowly lift the left side of the REM
Common Support (See the “REM Common Support Position 3” in the drawing
“R.E.M. Replacement” available in the figure 4.1.5 drawing 1 of the chapter
10 “Drawings”).
Secure the 5 screws, located on the Fluidic Plate, which fix the whole
assembly (See the “5 REM fixing points”).
Now follow in the opposite direction from the point 7 to the point 1 the
procedure for removing the R.E.M. Assy (Basic).
Perform the Motor Adjustment tests for the Transport Motor as described in
the sub-section 7.6.7.
Note: It’s required to perform the relevant check out procedures for all the other
assemblies that had been removed.
Page 16 of 28
Chapter 4 – Parts Replacement
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
4.1.6
Rotor Cover Assembly Replacement
The Rotor Cover Assembly is composed of an upper cover called Rotor Cover, by a
mechanical support called Arm with Pulley and by an assembly, located under the
Fluidic Plate, called Rotor Cover Movement Assy. The whole assembly is connected
to the system through the Photometer Interface Board.
Rotor Cover Assy
Arm with Pulley
Rotor Cover Belt
Rotor Cover
Movement Assy
•
Procedure to Remove the Rotor Cover Assy
Materials / tools necessary:
- Standard tools.
Precaution
Make sure that the Instrument has been switched OFF prior to going through the
following procedure.
1
Remove the 3 screws, located on the lower black side, which fix the upper
white support.
Chapter 4 – Parts Replacement
Page 17 of 28
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
2
3
Remove the 2 screws, located on the metallic mechanical arm, which fix the
black lower support.
Remove the Chromogenic Coaxial Cable.
The Rotor Cover P/N 181108-46 includes the following spare parts:
-
•
1 Chromogenic Coaxial Cable (connected to the Board #3) P/N 84869-44.
1 Filter Optical 405 nm (located in the black “Filter & Sensor Housing”, fixed
with 5 screws, and held in the bottom with a white spacer) P/N 89721-00.
1 Chromogenic Sensor Board (located in the Filter & Sensor Housing color
black and fixed with 6 screws) P/N 82627-00.
Procedure to Replace the Rotor Cover Assy
Materials / tools necessary:
- Standard tools.
Precaution
Make sure that the Instrument has been switched OFF prior to going through the
following procedure.
1
2
•
Follow in the opposite direction the “Procedure to Remove the Rotor Cover”
paying attention to the clearance of the optic parts.
Perform the tests for the Chromogenic Channel as described in the sub section
7.3.
Procedure to Remove the Arm with Pulley
Materials / tools necessary:
- Standard tools.
Precaution
Make sure that the Instrument has been switched OFF prior to going through the
following procedure.
1
2
3
4
Remove the Rotor Holder as described in the sub-sections 4.1.4.
Remove the Rotor Cover and the Rotor Cover Movement Assy as described in
this sub-section 4.1.6.
Remove the Chromogenic Coaxial Cable.
Remove the Arm with Pulley (fixed with 4 screws).
The Arm with Pulley includes the following spare part.
•
1 Rotor Cover Belt P/N 66675-60
Procedure to Replace the Arm with Pulley
Materials / tools necessary:
Page 18 of 28
- Standard tools.
Chapter 4 – Parts Replacement
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
Precaution
Make sure that the Instrument has been switched OFF prior to going through the
following procedure.
1
•
Follow in the opposite direction the “Procedure to Remove the Arm with
Pulley”, paying attention to secure the Chromogenic Coaxial Cable in a proper
position to prevent damage during the Arm with Pulley movement.
Procedure to Remove the Rotor Cover Movement Assy
Materials / tools necessary:
- Standard tools.
Precaution
Make sure that the Instrument has been switched OFF prior to going through the
following procedure.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Remove the Halogen Lamp as described in the sub-section 4.1.7.
Remove the connectors P143, P144 and the ground cable (see “Instrument
Ground Circuit” figure 3.3.11 Drawing 1 of the chapter 10 “Drawings”).
Remove Rotor Holder Movement Assy as described in the sub-section 4.1.4.
Remove all the 5 Boards in the Card Housing.
Remove the bulkhead and the 2 fixing knobs located inside the Card Housing.
Loosen the 3 screws that fix the Cover Movement Assy.
Loosen the tension of the Rotor Cover Belt lifting the Cover Movement Assy
and free the belt from the pulley holding the motor encoder at the top.
Remove the 3 loosen screws and the Cover Movement Assy.
The Rotor Cover Movement Assy P/N 181108-47 (Elite) and P/N 181106-48
(ElitePro)-includes the following spare part:
-
1 Dual Channel Optical Switch (fixed with 2 screws) P/N 70908-00
Chapter 4 – Parts Replacement
Page 19 of 28
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
•
Procedure to Replace the Rotor Cover Movement Assy
- Rotor Cover Motor Centring Tool
P/N 190510-00
- Rotor Cover Encoder Centring Tool
P/N 190575-00
Precaution
Make sure that the Instrument has been switched OFF prior to going through the
following procedure.
1
2
3
4
5
Assemble the Rotor Cover Movement Assy (without tightening the 3 screws).
Lift the Rotor Cover Movement Assy and, with the Encoder at the top, insert
the Rotor Cover Belt on the Rotor Cover Motor pulley.
Using the Rotor Cover Centering Tool in the niche between the support and
the assembly, push down the Rotor Cover Movement Assy until the Rotor
Cover Belt reaches the proper tension (take as example the tension of the other
belts on the assemblies in the instrument). In this condition tighten the 3
screws paying attention to the horizontal positioning of the assembly.
Loosen the 2 setscrews that fix the Encoder to the motor shaft, rotate the
Encoder until it is in the middle of the Dual Channel Optical Switch sensor.
Lower the Encoder until its upper side is horizontal and about 1 mm above the
upper side of the Dual Channel Optical Switch sensor then tighten the 2
setscrews.
Dual Channel
Optical Switch
Note: If available use the Rotor Cover Encoder Centering Tool P/N 190575-00.
6
7
8
9
10
11
Assemble and fix with 2 knobs the bulkhead located inside the rear of the Card
Housing.
Insert and connect the 5 Boards in the Card Housing.
Assemble the Rotor Holder Movement Assy as described in the sub-section
4.1.4.
Connect P143, P144 and the ground (see “Instrument Ground Circuit” figure
3.3.11 Drawing 1 of the chapter 10 “Drawings”).
Assemble the Halogen Lamp Assy as described in the sub-section 4.1.7.
Perform the Motor Adjustment test for the Rotor Cover Motor as described in
the sub-section 7.6.2.
Page 20 of 28
Chapter 4 – Parts Replacement
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
4.1.7
Halogen Lamp Assy Replacement
The Halogen Lamp Assy is located under the Fluidic Plate. The Halogen Lamp
Socket is powered directly through the Switching Power Supply Board.
It is possible, without removing the Front Cover, to change the Halogen Lamp Socket
Assy through the Rotor Waste compartment.
•
Procedure to Remove the Halogen Lamp Assy
Materials / tools necessary:
- Standard tools.
Precaution
Make sure that the Instrument has been switched OFF prior to going through the
following procedure.
1
2
3
4
5
6
Remove the connector of the Halogen Lamp Socket Assy.
Remove the power connector from the Switching Power Supply Board (fixed
with 2 screws) and the 2 ground cables (see “Instrument Ground Circuit”
figure 3.3.11 Drawing 1 of the chapter 10 “Drawings”).
Remove the R.E.M. Cover.
Remove the 2 screws, located on the Fluidic Plate that fixes the Halogen Lamp
Assy.
Remove the Halogen Lamp Assy paying attention not to damage the Optical
Collimator Assy.
Remove the Optical Collimator Assy loosening the setscrew.
The Halogen Lamp Assy includes the following spare part:
-
1 Halogen Lamp Socket (fixed with 1 knob and 1 screw) P/N 181021-81
Chapter 4 – Parts Replacement
Page 21 of 28
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
•
Procedure to Replace the Halogen Lamp Assy
Materials / tools necessary:
- Standard tools.
Precaution
Make sure that the Instrument has been switched OFF prior to going through the
following procedure.
1
Follow in the opposite direction the “Procedure to Remove the Halogen Lamp
Assy” paying attention not to damage the Optical Collimator Assy when
tightening the setscrew.
Perform the “Chromogenic Channel check out & adjustment” test as described
in the sub-section 7.3.1.
2
4.1.8
Dilutor Assy Replacement
The Dilutor Assy is located under the rectangular Transparent Cover behind the
Sample Tray. The Dilutor Assy is connected to the system through the Module
Interconnection Board.
•
Procedure to Remove the Dilutor Assy
Materials / tools necessary:
- Standard tools.
Precaution
Make sure that the Instrument has been switched OFF prior to going through the
following procedure.
1
2
3
4
5
Remove the connectors P81, P82, P83, P84, P85, P86 and the ground cable
(see “Instrument Ground Circuit” figure 3.3.11 Drawing 1 of the chapter 10
“Drawings”).
Remove the fluidic tube that connects the Wash-R Emulsion Bottle to the T
Connector.
Remove the 2 fluidic tubes that connect the 2 Dilutor Electro-Valves to the
Needles Block.
Remove the 3 screws that fix the Dilutor Assy.
Remove the Dilutor Assy.
The Dilutor Assy P/N 181108-58 includes the following spare part:
-
2 Single Channel Optical Switch (fixed with 2 screw) P/N 70907-00
1 Dilutor Chamber (fixed with 2 screw) P/N 181108-56
2 Dilutor Electro-Valve 3 Way (fixed with 2 screw) P/N 181108-38
1 T Connector P/N 74068-00
Page 22 of 28
Chapter 4 – Parts Replacement
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
•
Procedure to Replace the Dilutor Assy
Materials / tools necessary:
- Standard tools.
Precaution
Make sure that the Instrument has been switched OFF prior to going through the
following procedure.
1
2
Follow in the opposite direction the “Procedure to Remove the Dilutor Assy”.
Perform the Motor Adjustment tests for the Sample/Reagent Motors as
described in the sub-section 7.6.6.
Perform the Volume Check and the Dilutor Test as described in “Dilutor
Module” test in the section 7.8.
3
4.1.9
Display Assembly Replacement
The Display Assembly is located on a tower support on the right side of the
Instrument. The Display Assembly is connected to the CPU Master Board and to the
PC104 Board through the Display Cable.
•
Procedure to Remove the Display Assembly
Materials / tools necessary:
- Standard tools
Precaution
Make sure that the Instrument has been switched OFF prior to going through the
following procedure.
1. Disconnect the VGA, Power and Serial Cables from the rear of the monitor.
2. While holding the monitor loosen and remove the black knob. Remove the white
and grey washers.
3. Remove the monitor from the support pole. Remove the metallic washer that sits
between the monitor bracket and the support pole.
Chapter 4 – Parts Replacement
Page 23 of 28
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
clamp
Bracket attached
to monitor
Serial cable
Knob with
washers
underneath
Power cable
VGA cable
•
Procedure to Replace the Display Assembly
Materials / tools necessary:
- Standard tools
Precaution
Make sure that the Instrument has been switched OFF prior to going through the
following procedure.
1. Mount flat metallic washer onto support pole.
2. Mount bracket attached with monitor onto support pole.
3. Mount gray washer so that the outer diameter is touching the surface of the
bracket and the inner diameter raised, then the white washer.
4. Mount black clamping knob onto support pole. Tighten securely.
5. Insert power connector into receptacle at the base of the monitor. Make sure
the orientation of the power cable is similar to what is shown in the picture
above.
6. Connect the serial and VGA cables to the monitor.
7. Perform the Touch Screen Calibration procedure as described in section 7.12.
4.1.10 Hard Disk Drive Replacement
The Hard Disk Drive is located under the CPU Master Board #1 and PC104 Board
support in the middle of the rear side of the Instrument. The Hard Disk Drive is
connected to the CPU Master Board through the HDD data flat cable.
•
Procedure to Remove the Hard Disk Drive
Materials / tools necessary:
Page 24 of 28
- Standard tools.
Chapter 4 – Parts Replacement
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
Precaution
Make sure that the Instrument has been switched OFF prior to going through the
following procedure.
1
2
3
4
5
•
Remove all the cables connected to the CPU Master Board #1 and PC104
Board.
Remove the Needles & Wash-R Sensor Interconnection Board support that is
fixed with 2 screws, and remove Video Cable connector bracket.
Remove the HDD with the CPU Master Board and the PC104 Board removing
the 2 external screws and loosening the 1 internal screw.
Remove the HDD power and data cables connectors.
Remove the HDD that is fixed with 4 screws.
Procedure to Replace the Hard Disk Drive
Materials / tools necessary:
- Standard tools.
Precaution
Make sure that the Instrument has been switched OFF prior to going through the
following procedure.
1
2
Follow in the opposite direction the “Procedure to Remove the Hard Disk
Drive”.
Perform the procedures described in the section 7.16 “Software Checking and
Loading”.
Note: In order to completely restore the system status on the new Hard Disk Drive as
before the replacement of the damaged one, it is necessary to perform the following
operations.
-
Format and partition the new hard disk drive as described in sub-section
7.16.6.
Perform Software Installation procedure as described in section 7.16.5
Perform the Upgrade procedure for the IL Library described in the sub-section
7.16.4.
Perform the Restore procedure of the last Backup of the system configuration
available described in the sub-section 7.16.3.
Chapter 4 – Parts Replacement
Page 25 of 28
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
4.1.11 Rotor Preheater Assembly (ACL Elite only)
The ACL Elite Rotor Preheater Assy is located on the right side of the instrument.
The assembly is connected to the system through the R.E.M. Upper Interconnection
Board by connector P117 and the REM Lower Interconnection Board by connector
P111. Three screws mount the Rotor Preheater assembly to the instrument.
•
Procedure to Remove the Rotor Preheater Assy
Materials / tools necessary:
- Standard tools.
Precaution
Make sure that the Instrument has been switched OFF prior to going through the
following procedure.
1
2
3
Remove the connectors P111 (Lower Interconnection board) and P117 (Upper
Interconnection Board)
Remove the 3 screws, located under the common support, which fix the Rotor
Preheater Assembly.
Remove the Rotor Preheater Assy.
Page 26 of 28
Chapter 4 – Parts Replacement
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
•
Procedure to Replace the Rotor Preheater Assy
Materials / tools necessary:
- Standard tools.
Make sure that the Instrument has been switched OFF prior to going through the
following procedure.
1
2
Follow in the opposite direction the “Procedure to Remove the Rotor
PreheaterAssy”.
Verify that the thermoregulation system for the Rotor Preheater works
correctly as described in the section 7.14.
4.2 Instrument Covers Removal
This section is designed to clarify the Instrument Covers names and positions as well
as the removing / assembling sequence and fixing points.
Following is the Covers lists with the relevant fixing points.
Cover Name
1 Left Side Cover
2 Right Side Cover
3 Upper Cover
6 Front Lower Plate
Fixing point
3 Screws
3 Screws
4 Screws
(2 for each side)
2 Screws
(1 for each side + 2 hook
shape on the bottom)
6 Screws
(2 for each side + 2 under
the Front Lower Plate)
2 Knob
7 R.E.M. Cover
No screws.
8 Reagent
Transparent Cover
9 Dilutors
Transparent Cover
10 Keyboard Support
3 screws.
4 Rear Cover
5 Front Cover
No screws.
Note
Must remove the Left &
Right Side Covers first.
Must remove the Left & the
Right Side Covers first.
Must remove the Left &
Right Side Covers first.
Must remove the Left &
Right Side Covers and the
Front Cover first.
Remove with caution the 3
fixing points at pressure.
Press with cautions the 2
fixing points at pressure.
4 Screws
(2 for each slider)
The table is according with the drawing “Instrument Covers” reported in the figure
4.2 Drawing 1 of the chapter 10 “Drawings”.
Chapter 4 – Parts Replacement
Page 27 of 28
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
4.3 Instrument Boards Replacement
This section provides information on the electronic boards located in several places
inside the instrument that compose the electronic system.
Following is a board list with the proper Check Out & Adjustment required after
board replacement for troubleshooting purposes.
Board Name
P/N
CPU Master Board #1
181120-23
PC104 Board
182355-20
Slave Board #2
182355-30
Acquisition & Sensors
Board #3
182355-40
Rotor Exchange Module
Board #4
(excluded in ACL Elite)
182356-00
Check Out & Adjustment
Section
Check Software revision
Test for functionality.
Verify BIOS settings.
No Adjustment Required.
Verify Expansion Module settings.
No Adjustment Required.
Check Software revision.
Upgrade SW if required
Test for functionality.
No Adjustment Required.
Test for functionality.
Coagulimetric Channel Check Out
Chromogenic Channel Check Out
Liquid Sensors Check Out
Autosampler Optic Sensors Check
Out
Rotor Cover Sensor Check Out
Check Software revision.
Upgrade SW if required (REM
upgrade)
Test for functionality.
REM Optic Sensors Check Out
7.16.1
3.3.4
7.16.7
Test for functionality.
No Adjustment Required.
Test for functionality.
Temperatures Check Out.
No Adjustment Required.
Test for functionality.
No Adjustment Required.
Test for functionality.
No Adjustment Required.
Test for functionality.
No Adjustment Required.
Test for functionality.
No Adjustment Required.
3.3.8
Motors Board #5
182355-50
Photometric &
Temperature Control
Board #6
Switching Power Supply
Board
Interface Board
182355-61
Fan control Board
182356-90
Liquid Level Detection
Board
182356-40
Page 28 of 28
Chapter 4 – Parts Replacement
182356-60
181120-70
7.16.8
7.16.1
7.16.5
3.3.5
3.3.6
7.2
7.3
7.4.2
7.5.3
7.9.1
7.16.1
7.16.5
7.5
3.3.9
7.14
3.3.10
7.13
7.14
7.4.2
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
Chapter 5
Installation & Maintenance
This section provides information related to the instrument installation, as
recommendation for the unpacking and the various set-up procedures necessary to put
the system in working condition, as well as operator maintenance procedures.
Sub-sections detailing instrument cleaning and decontamination procedures, plus shut
down and shipment precautions complete this section.
Following are the specific sub-sections with the relevant procedures.
5.1
5.2
5.3
Installation
Maintenance
Shut down & Shipment precautions
WARNING !
BIOLOGICAL HAZARDS EXIST. Avoid touching, with bare hands, any parts
of the system which may have come in contact with potentially infectious fluids.
ALWAYS wear gloves when performing any type of Maintenance/Service action
on this area.
Warning: Do not access the sample or reagent area while the probe arm is
operating.
As a reminder for the technical personnel, the above warning is also directly shown in
those sub-sections describing the maintenance / cleaning actions on the fluidic lines of
the instrument.
Chapter 5 – Installation & Maintenance
Page 1 of 36
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
5.1 Installation
This sub-section contains all the information necessary to install, set-up and place in
working condition the ACL Elite/ElitePro system.
Before attempting the installation of the ACL Elite/ElitePro system in the laboratory,
inspect the site with laboratory personnel to identify the desired location for the
system and to insure that the environment meets all the requirements for its successful
installation.
In addition ensure that the Coagulimetric Optic Test Kit P/N 97580-50 and the
Chromogenic Optic Test Kit P/N 97579-50 together with the Temperature Probe P/N
70954-00 are available.
Following are the specific sub-sections.
5.1.1
5.1.2
5.1.3
5.1.4
5.1.5
5.1.6
5.1.7
Site requirements
Unpacking and inspection
Mounting Instrument parts
First turn on cycle
Instrument set-up
Performance tests
Installation Procedure and Checklist
Note: The ACL Elite/ElitePro system must only be installed either by
IL personnel or IL authorized personnel.
5.1.1
Site requirement
Following are the specific paragraphs with the required condition to install the ACL
Elite/ElitePro system.
•
•
•
Ambient condition
Space requirements
Electrical requirements
•
Ambient Condition
The instrument will function correctly in an ambient temperature of 15-32 °C (59 °F
to 89 °F) with a relative humidity of up to 85% (non-condensing).
In accordance with the IEC regulations no instrument failures will occur in presence
of short-term ambient temperature as low as 5 °C or as high as 40 °C.
The instrument should be positioned in an area free from dust, fumes, vibrations and
excessive variations of temperature.
Page 2 of 36
Chapter 5 – Installation & Maintenance
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
•
Space requirements
Following are the external dimensions and the weight of the ACL Elite/ElitePro
analyzer.
Height at display level
Height of analysis surface
Width (including LCD)
Depth
Weight
60 cm
27 cm
100 cm
60 cm
63 Kg
23.6inches
10.6 inches
39.4 inches
23.6 inches
139 lbs.
The heat generated by the instrument during normal operation is exhausted from the
bottom, in the front-right and left side of the unit.
Sufficient space must be allowed around the instrument to permit circulation of air for
cooling.
The instrument must be positioned so that a waste tube can be easily connected on its
left side.
If the operator wishes to work from a sitting position in front of the system, leg-space
should be provided under the front of the instrument.
•
Electrical requirements
Voltage
The instrument has been designed to operate correctly with variations of ± 10% on the
nominal line voltage and with line frequencies between 50-60 Hz.
The instrument has a power supply that can operate from 100 to 240 VAC and it
automatically switches to the line voltage required.
Warning:
Check that the nominal line voltage in the laboratory is compatible with the label on
the rear of the instrument as shown in the table below.
Value as shown on the label
100 – 240 VAC
Values of line voltage for
Normal function
100, 110, 115, 120, 125 Vac ±10%
220, 230, 240 Vac ±10%
Power Consumption
Check that the line is capable of supplying 350 VA.
Note: The average power consumption is about 350 VA, but peak loads or current
surges may exceed this value when turning the instrument on and during the
temperature warm-up.
Chapter 5 – Installation & Maintenance
Page 3 of 36
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
Line Frequency
The instrument will function at any frequency between 50-60 Hz.
The power cord provided with the system is specifically designed for it and should
not be substituted.
The cord plugs into the Power Entry socket as shown in the figure below.
The Power Entry module includes the ON/OFF switch.
Fuse
The fuses are enclosed in the compartment to the right of the Power Entry socket.
Fuses have to meet the specification 6.3 A – 250 V. Instruments at 100 – 240vac
utilize 2 fuses rated at 6.3 amps.
Caution: Prior to accessing the fuse holder to install / replace fuses insure the
unit is powered off and the power cord disconnected. Only use fuses rated for
the specified current and voltage.
Page 4 of 36
Chapter 5 – Installation & Maintenance
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
Interface ports
The instrument is provided with several connectors, located on the rear, which are
associated with relevant devices.
NOTE: If the USB ports detect an overload situation the USB ports are disabled. To
re-enable the USB ports the Elite/ElitePro instrument must be powered off and rebooted.
Following are the connectors and the relevant devices.
Serial
Mouse
Host
USB Ports (4)
Ethernet
Parallel
Printer
Connectors names
Devices
Host
Serial Mouse
USB
Ethernet
Parallel Printer
Keyboard
Host Computer
Standard PC Serial Mouse
External BCR, USB Mouse, USB Printer
Ethernet (Future)
Parallel Printer
Standard PC Keyboard
5.1.2
Keyboard
Unpacking and inspection
Before unpacking the boxes containing the ACL Elite/ElitePro and accessories,
visually inspect them to verify that there has been no damage done during shipping
and handling.
In case of damage notify the carrier and your IL Representative immediately.
Remove the box containing the rotors and the Start-up kit. Using the Start-up kit list
included in the box, confirm that all the components are present.
Remove the instrument and place it on the working surface.
Remove the adhesive tape used for transport from the various parts.
Note: Two people should lift the instrument using the space below the
unit at the front and at the back as shown on the figure below.
Chapter 5 – Installation & Maintenance
Page 5 of 36
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
In the figure below are highlighted the instrument carrying points
5.1.3
Mounting Instrument parts
This sub-section provides information about the parts that have to be mounted on the
Instrument before switching it on.
BARCODE READER BRACKET (ACL ElitePro)
Mount the Barcode Reader bracket onto the rear of the LCD Monitor as follows:
1. Remove the monitor mounting bracket (may be white or black) from the rear
of the monitor (4 screws).
2. Place the barcode reader bracket p/n 282104-00 onto the back of the monitor
followed by the original monitor mounting bracket. Secure both brackets to
the monitor using the 4 screws previously removed.
Bracket
mounting
screws 4 places
Monitor bracket (may be black or
white)
Barcode reader bracket p/n 282104-00 mounted
under monitor mounting bracket
Page 6 of 36
Chapter 5 – Installation & Maintenance
Bracket mounting
screws 4 places
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
LCD Monitor
The ACL Elite/ElitePro LCD Monitor must be installed on the instrument during the
installation process. Mount the LCD Monitor as follows.
clamp
Bracket attached
to monitor
Serial cable
Knob with
washers
underneath
Power cable
VGA cable
1. Remove cables from plastic bag on support pole and monitor from packaging.
2. Remove clamping knob, white washer, gray washer, and metallic washer from
the monitor support pole.
3. Mount flat metallic washer onto support pole.
4. Mount bracket attached with monitor onto support pole.
5. Mount gray washer so that the outer diameter is touching the surface of the
bracket and the inner diameter raised, then the white washer.
6. Mount clamping knob onto support pole. Tighten securely.
7. Remove clamp from the back of the monitor by loosening screw.
8. Insert the power cable into the clamp. The distance between the clamp and the
end of the power cable connector should be 6 inches. Insert power connector
into receptacle at the base of the monitor. Make sure the orientation of the
power cable is similar to what is shown in the picture above.
9. Mount the clamp to the back of the monitor using screw, split washer, and flat
washer provided. See picture above for location.
10. Connect the serial and VGA cables to the monitor.
Waste tube
Connect the waste tube to the fitting on the bottom left hand side of the Instrument.
Cut the tube to suitable length to fit into the waste container which must be situated
below the instrument waste outlet port, as shown in the figures below.
Note: The horizontal section of the tube should be kept as short as possible and the
free end should not be immersed in the liquid waste container.
Chapter 5 – Installation & Maintenance
Page 7 of 36
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
CAUTION !
The liquid waste from the instrument is to be considered contaminated and
should be disposed of according to the waste management procedures of the
laboratory and in compliance with local regulations (see also NCCLS GP25-A,
Vol. 13 No. 22: Clinical Laboratory Waste Management, Dec. 1993).
In the figure below are reported the Waste tube connection and waste container proper
position.
Rinse, Sample and Reagent Accessories
Verify that the Needles Waste-Rinse reservoir is placed in its appropriate position.
Fit the appropriate Sample Tray on its corresponding support.
Fit the reagent adapters in their appropriate positions, as shown in the figure below.
Following are the 3 color coded reagent adaptors available for the reagent positions
R1 to R12.
Adaptor Color
Grey
Reagent Vials
10 mL vials requiring magnetic stirrer
Purple
10 mL vials not requiring magnetic stirrer
Green
4 mL vials not requiring magnetic stirrer
Page 8 of 36
Chapter 5 – Installation & Maintenance
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
Place 4 magnetic stirrers inside the reagent vials in reagent positions R1 to R4.
Reagent Adaptors for the R1-R12 positions
Different vial adaptors are used for the additional positions on the Sample Tray.
In the figure below are reported the Reagent Adaptors for the Sample Tray A1-A10
positions.
Wash-Reference Emulsion Bottle
Place a capped 1 litre bottle of Wash-Reference Emulsion in the appropriate position
at the back of the dilutors.
Remove the bottle cap and insert the sensor and siphon cap into the bottle. Insure the
sensor and siphon cap is fully seated into the bottle.
Make sure that the connectors of the Reference Emulsion Sensor and for the Liquid
Level Detection Cable are properly connected on the Needles & Wash-R Sensor
Interconnection Board.
Chapter 5 – Installation & Maintenance
Page 9 of 36
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
Positioning of the Wash-Reference Emulsion Bottle
Electro-Valve / Needle Block connection
Verify that the two fluidic tubes from the Electro-Valve in the Dilutor Assy to the
Needles Block are tightly connected.
Note: The tube from the left hand Electro-Valve fits into the lower position on the
Needles Block (internal Needle, Reagent). The tube from the right hand Electro-Valve
fits into the upper position on the Needles Block (external needle, Sample).
Mouse
Connect the Serial Mouse or USB Mouse to the appropriate port on the rear panel.
External Bar-Code Reader
Connect the External Bar-Code Reader to the USB port in the rear panel. (ElitePro
only)
External Printer (Optional Feature)
Connect the External Printer to its port (Parallel Printer port) in the rear panel.
5.1.4
First turn on cycle
Before turning the Instrument on, check that the line voltage setting of the laboratory
is in accordance with the Instrument label.
Switch the instrument on using the Power Switch on the Power Entry.
The system initializes the instrument with a series of electronics and mechanics selfchecks. During this initialization check that the Sample Arm, the Rotor Arm and the
Rotor Cover may be free to move without obstruction.
Following are some of the messages displayed during the System Init phase.
Page 10 of 36
Chapter 5 – Installation & Maintenance
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
ACL Starting. Please wait…
Checking Database……Check Ok. Continuing Init.
The Init System phase continues with a progress bar in a window where the following
is displayed.
Init System in Progress. Please Wait.
When the progress bar is full and all the sequence of self-checks is ended, then the
Login window appears.
-
Touching the USER window it goes in reverse mode.
Press “Del” (Delete Key) on the main Keyboard, the window becomes empty.
Type the word “Service”.
Touching the PASSWORD window it goes in reverse mode.
Type the word “System Fix” then confirm touching “√”.
The system shows the main Analytical Menu.
Touch Utility on the Main Menu Bar then the Software and the Software
Identification option. Check that in the SW Identification screen all the software is at
the lastest revision. The last software revision is also present in the Instrument Start
Up Kit.
Check for Magnetic Stirrer bar rotation in the R1 – R4 reagents positions.
Note: Any temperature and liquid level sensors warning may be present. In this case
the yellow Warning button on the Tool Bar is active.
Touch Setup on the Main Menu Bar then the Date/Time option. Choose the date
format and set the current date and time. Press “√” to accept.
Mounting (if needed) the Needles Block and then perform/verify the Needle Position
procedure as described in the sub-section 7.7.4.
Select Diagnostic from the Main Menu Bar and click the Priming option.
The following Priming screen is displayed during the priming cycle:
Chapter 5 – Installation & Maintenance
Page 11 of 36
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
During the Priming cycle insure that the air bubbles in the dilutor chambers are
removed. If necessary, pinch the chamber outlet tubes while the piston is descending
and release them before the piston reaches bottom dead point. Repeat the Priming
cycle several times if necessary.
If in the end of the Priming the message “SENSOR FAIL” in the Warning area is
displayed, the priming cycle must be repeated.
Check that there are no blockages or leaks in the fluid path and that the liquid is
flowing smoothly from the bottle to the dilutors and from the dilutors to the needles.
Check that the discharge of liquid from the Wash/Rinse Reservoir to the instrument
outlet and then to the liquid waste container is not impaired.
Check the Air Cooling System. Verify that the 2 Instrument Fans in the right hand
side of the instrument are operating properly as also the 2 Secondary Fans on the left
hand side. Locate the ventilation filter slider on the right side of the instrument and
verify also that the filter is clean.
Before checking the Temperatures wait until all the start up temperature warnings
have disappeared, then enter Diagnostic on the Main Menu Bar and select the
Temperature Control option, which will open the Temperature Control screen.
Page 12 of 36
Chapter 5 – Installation & Maintenance
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
As the temperature is continuously checked the screen is constantly refreshed
showing a blink effect. The temperature should be within the following ranges for
each area (as described in the section 7.14).
Rotor Holder
Peltier
Rotor Transport (ACL ElitePro)
Rotor Stack (ACL ElitePro)
Rotor Preheater (ACL Elite)
5.1.5
38 to 39 °C
10 to 16 °C
34 to 40 °C
34 to 40 °C
34 to 40 °C
Instrument Setup
The purpose of this sub-section is to verify that all the main Setup options have been
already set or otherwise to help the customer to make setup selections.
Select Setup from the Main Menu Bar then set the following options.
System Configuration
Patient Database listing
QC Database listing
Reflex Status
Current Language
Sample Tray type
Sensor Enable
HW Enable
Date / Time
Unit
Chapter 5 – Installation & Maintenance
Page 13 of 36
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
5.1.6
Performance tests
The following test, which we recommend be carried out at the installation, check the
precision and the linearity of the two Optic Channels as well as the precision and the
accuracy of the dilutors.
Perform a Priming cycle then check the Optic Channel precision and accuracy as
described in the sub-sections 7.2.2 (for Coagulimetric) and 7.3.2 (for Chromogenic).
Perform a Priming cycle then check the Dilutors precision as described in the subsection 7.8.1 (for Coagulimetric and Chromogenic Channel).
Perform a Priming cycle then carry out the PT-FIB calibration cycle as described in
the Operator’s Manual.
5.1.7 Installation Procedure & Checklist
The following Installation Checklist should be used as a guide when installing the
ACL Elite/ElitePro instrument.
A reference to detailed procedures contained in the ACL Elite/ElitePro Service
Manual are indicated on the Installation Checklist.
5.1.7.1 Initialization
Plug instrument into suitable power source, 100 - 115V or 220V.
Turn power on and wait for instrument to initialize.
With login displayed, touch USER on the LCD and type Service.
Touch PASSWORD on LCD display and type (including 1 space between
words): System Fix.
NOTE: This procedure is designed to check that adjustments have
been performed. If any step fails the check criteria adjustment
is required.
5.1.7.2
1.
Procedure
ROTOR HOLDER COVER FUNCTION
Touch SERVICE→MOTOR ADJUST→ROTOR HOLDER COVER.
The rotor holder cover sets to its intermediate position (automatic loading
position).
Touch the HOME POSITION icon and the rotor cover will position itself
and open.
Touch icon that shows ROTOR COVER OPEN with arrow upward
repeatedly and observe the rotor cover moves upward until it reaches the full
Page 14 of 36
Chapter 5 – Installation & Maintenance
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
open position. Verify on the LCD display that there is a minimum of two (2)
and a maximum of five (5) minus signs to the right of the home sensor arrow.
Touch HOME POSITION.
Touch NEXT CW POSITION two (2) times and observe that the rotor cover
closes properly.
Touch the check (√) to exit.
▼
Home Sensor
2.
+ + + + + + -- -- --
MAGNETIC STIRRER BARS ROTATION CHECK
Materials / tools necessary
Magnetic Stirrer Bars P/N 97466-06 (4)
8.0 mL Bottles (4)
Place a magnetic stirrer bar in bottle and place the bottle into each reagent
position R1, R2, R3 and R4.
Check that the bar rotates in each position.
Remove bottles from reagent positions.
3.
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION CHECK
Touch SETUP→SYSTEM CONFIGURATION.
Sensor Liquid, Wash R Emulsion and HW Enable – “REM” and “Additional
Reagents” should be enabled for ACL ElitePro, and disabled for ACL Elite.
Visually check that there is an “X” to the left of these parameters to “Enable”
and no “X” to disable. Touch check (√) to exit.
4.
SOFTWARE REVISION CHECK
Touch UTILITY→SOFTWARE→SOFTWARE IDENTIFICATION.
Check that the software identifications are at the latest versions.
Master SW Identification
Slave SW Identification
REM SW Identification
IL Test Library
Touch check (√) to exit.
X.X
X.X
XX.XX
X
Chapter 5 – Installation & Maintenance
Page 15 of 36
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
5.
FLOPPY DISK CHECK
Material / tools necessary for this check: 1.44 MB Floppy Disk (formatted)
Touch SERVICE→FLOPPY DISK DRIVE TEST. Remove disk from
drive if present.
Touch CONTINUE. If a message DISK PRESENT IN DRIVE appears, the
drive has failed this check.
Insert a write-protected floppy disk in the floppy disk drive. Touch
CONTINUE. A message should appear INSERT DISK… Remove disk
from drive and change the switch on the disk to enable it to read and write,
reinsert disk.
Touch CONTINUE.
Check that a message OPERATION IN PROGRESS and a test progress bar
is displayed.
It is not necessary to wait for the disk drive to complete this task.
Touch ABORT to exit.
Touch YES.
Touch CANCEL.
6.
INTERFACE CHECK
Materials / tools necessary:
RS 232 Test Connector P/N 199992-01
Touch SERVICE→INTERFACE TEST.
Touch the down arrow on the side of the test name.
Touch the bottom down arrow to select RS 232 #2 HW loop.
Touch CONTINUE and install RS 232 connector into the mouse serial port.
Touch START. The next window must state TEST PASSED.
Touch OK.
Touch “X” to exit.
Touch SERVICE→INTERFACE TEST.
Touch the down arrow on the side of the test name.
Touch the bottom down arrow to select RS 232 #3 HW loop.
Touch CONTINUE and install RS 232 connector into the host serial port.
Touch START. The next window must state TEST PASSED.
Touch OK.
Touch “X” to exit.
Verify USB ports functionality by connecting a USB device (ie. mouse,
scanner, etc) to the USB port. Reboot system to allow ACL Elite/ElitePro to
recognize USB device connection and verify USB device functions properly.
Page 16 of 36
Chapter 5 – Installation & Maintenance
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
7.
AUTOSAMPLER MOTOR STEP LOSS CHECK
Touch SERVICE→MOTOR ADJUST→AUTOSAMPLER.
Touch HOME POSITION. The system moves the autosampler motor until
the home position is achieved.
Check that the HOME SENSOR and the POSITION SENSOR are both in
the ON condition.
With the step increment set to one (1), repeatedly touch curved CW arrow (or
the curved CCW arrow) until the status changes from plus to minus in the
window to the right of the “Home Sensor” icon. Then reverse the motion by
touching the opposite key until the status changes from plus to minus again.
Check that there are a maximum of three (3) missed steps by counting the
minus signs to the left (or to the right) of the reference arrow.
8.
SAMPLE ARM MODULE CHECK
Material / tools necessary:
Sample Tray
Needle Adjustment Tool P/N 181039-41
0.5 mL Sample Cups
P/N 067992-00
Cup Adapters
2.0 mm Allen Wrench
Lift clear reagent cover.
Check the centering of the sample arm base to the cavity in the system cover.
Gently lift sample arm up to its upper limit and rotate it to check that the three
(3) set screws are tightened properly.
Touch SERVICE→MOTOR ADJ→SAMPLE ARM
MOTOR→HORIZONTAL ARM MOTOR.
Touch HOME POSITION.
The sample arm should position itself over the sample tray position for Elite or
reagent position R12 for ElitePro.
Touch NEXT COUNTERCLOCKWISE POSITION seven (7) times for
Elite or eleven (11) times for ElitePro.
The sample arm should position itself over the wash station.
Gently push sample arm down into the wash station and check that the needles
enter straight into the center of the wash station bath.
Gently lift sampler arm up to its upper limit.
Touch check (√) to exit. Touch NO.
Make sure the rotor cover is open (touch ROTOR COVER OPEN icon).
Install the needle adjustment tool into the rotor position.
Touch SERVICE→MOTOR ADJUST→SAMPLE ARM
MOTOR→HORIZONTAL ARM MOTOR.
Touch NEXT COUNTERCLOCKWISE POSITION several times to move
the sample arm over the rotor position.
Touch check (√) to exit. Touch NO.
Chapter 5 – Installation & Maintenance
Page 17 of 36
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
Touch SERVICE→MOTOR ADJUST→ROTOR MOTOR.
Touch HOME POSITION to set rotor. Touch check (√) to exit. Touch NO.
Touch SERVICE→MOTOR ADJUST→SAMPLE ARM
MOTORS→VERTICAL ARM MOTOR.
Touch HOME POSITION.
Touch NEXT DOWN POSITION. The sample arm should go down.
Check that the needles align over the reference dots. The needles should be
set so they brush the surface of the reference dots.
Touch NEXT UP POSITION. Touch check (√) to exit. Touch YES.
Place cup adaptor and 0.5 mL cup in the A1 position of the sample tray.
Place 0.5mL cups in position 1 and 2 of the sample tray.
Place sample tray in instrument.
Touch SERVICE→MOTOR ADJUST→AUTOSAMPLER. Touch HOME
POSITION. Touch check (√) to exit. Touch NO.
Touch SERVICE→MOTOR ADJUST→SAMPLER ARM
MOTORS→HORIZONTAL ARM MOTOR.
Touch HOME POSITION and the sample arm will move to the sample tray
position.
Remove the alignment tool from the rotor position and touch ROTOR
COVER (Icon) to close the rotor cover.
Gently push the sample arm down into the A1 position.
Check that the needle aligns in the center of the 0.5 mL cup without touching
the inside diameter of the cup. Gently lift sample arm to the upper limit.
Touch NEXT COUNTERCLOCKWISE POSITION. The sample arm will
go to position 2 on the sample tray. Gently push the sample arm down into the
position 2.
Check that the needle aligns in the center of the 0.5 mL cup without touching
the inside diameter of the cup. Gently lift sample arm to the upper limit.
Touch NEXT COUNTERCLOCKWISE POSITION. The sample arm will
go to position 1 on the sample tray. Gently push the sample arm down into the
position 1.
Check that the needle aligns in the center of the 0.5 mL cup without touching
the inside diameter of the cup. Gently lift sample arm to the upper limit.
9.
ROTOR EXCHANGE MODULE CHECK (exclude for ACL Elite)
Material / tools necessary:
Disposable Rotors P/N 068000-00
Magnetic Disk
2.0 mm Allen Wrench
Touch ROTOR COVER and remove the stack cover to gain access. Check
that the three (3) set screws on the Rotor Arm are tightened properly.
Page 18 of 36
Chapter 5 – Installation & Maintenance
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
Place the magnet disk over the sensor board on the stack and secure with a
piece of tape.
Load a stack of fifteen (15) rotors in the rotor stack. Align the notches in the
top five (5) rotors that are above the stack. Empty the rotor waste container
and place it back in the housing.
Touch SERVICE→MODULE POSITIONING→RA-SL-RH TEST.
The instrument initializes the motors of the R.E.M., the rotor holder and the
rotor cover.
Once initialization is completed, the system starts loading / unloading until the
stack of rotors is exhausted.
Check visually that all the rotors in the stack are loaded and removed from the
rotor position. The pliers should secure the rotor around the top of the rotor
when the rotors are being transferred. A message should appear that the waste
container is full. Open the door and remove rotors from container. Reinstall
the waste container and the system should start to load and unload rotors.
Touch check (√) to exit.
10.
AUTOSAMPLER / BCR CHECK
Material / tools necessary:
Sample Tray
0.5 mL Sample Cups (new, unused)
2.0 mL Sample Cups (new, unused)
4.0 mL Bottle
10.0 mL Glass Vials
Bar Code Labels
Take a sample tray and prepare an assortment of cups, sample tubes (including
some with bar code labels) and some empty positions. NOTE: Make sure the
cups are indeed clean and free from any scratches.
Touch SERVICE→AUTOSAMPLER→BCR TEST.
Touch START WITH BCR.
Check for presence: when a cup is present there should be a one (1) in that
position. A zero (0) is reported when there is no cup present.
Check the bar codes by moving the horizontal scroll bar to the right. Check
that each bar code reported is the same as the bar code in that sample tray
position.
Touch check (√) to exit.
11.
LIQUID LEVEL SENSORS CHECK
Materials / tools necessary:
1000 Microliter Pipette w/tips
0.50 mL Sample Cup
4.0 mL Sample Cup
Reference Bottle w/500 mL Ref. Sol.
Chapter 5 – Installation & Maintenance
Page 19 of 36
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
Sample Tray
Remove reference bottle from instrument and place the bottle with 500 mL of
reference solution in its place.
Touch SERVICE→SENSOR TEST→WASH-R EMULSION VOL.
Check that the R-Emulsion value is 500 mL +/- 150 mL.
( adjust RV9, Acquisition & Sensors Board if necessary)
Dispense 150 microliters of reference solution in a 0.5 mL sample cup and
place the cup in position 1 of the Sample Tray.
Dispense 1500 microliters of reference solution in a 4.0 mL bottle and place
the bottle in the R1 position.
Touch SERVICE→SENSOR→NEEDLES SENSOR TEST.
Touch START.
Check expected values: Position 1 liquid value must be ≥ 3.9 volts. ( adj
RV12, Acq & Sen Bd if necessary). Position R1 liquid value must be ≥ 3.5
volts. ( adj RV11, Acq & Sen Bd if necessary)
Touch (X) to exit.
12.
TEMPERATURE CHECK: PERFORM D-DIMER CYCLE USING
DEIONIZED WATER
Materials / tools necessary for this check: Green Bottle Adapter
4.0 mL bottle (1)
8.0 mL Bottles (5)
Deionized Water
Place 4 mL bottle with deionized water in reagent position R4.
Place 8 mL bottles with deionized water in sample tray positions A1, A2, A3,
A4 & A5.
Touch SETUP→TEST→VIEW / DEFINE.
Enable D-Dimer only, disable everything else.
Touch check (√).
Touch DOOR EXIT (located in lower right corner, shown with door open and
arrow going out).
Touch CALIBRATION→CALIBRATE.
Touch START. Wait for cycle to complete (arm will stop).
Touch DIAGNOSTIC→TEMPERATURE CONTROL.
Check that the four (4) temperature values are within specification shown on
the LCD Display.
Remove bottles from reagent position and sample tray.
Page 20 of 36
Chapter 5 – Installation & Maintenance
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
13.
ROTOR HOLDER COVER SENSOR CHECK
Touch SERVICE→A / D CONVERTER TEST.
Check Cover Sensor (Hall) voltage value. The value must be ≥ 2.7 volts.
(adjust RV5, Acquisition & Sensors Board if necessary)
Touch ROTOR COVER (icon) to open rotor cover.
Check Cover Sensor (Hall) voltage value. The value must be between 1.4 to
1.9 volts.
Touch ROTOR COVER (icon) to close rotor cover.
Touch check (√) to exit.
14.
OPTIC CHANNELS CHECK
Materials / tools necessary: Rotors
1000 Microliter Pipette w/tips
Deionized Water
Reference Solution
NOTE: Instrument must be on for a minimum of thirty (30) minutes.
Offset Check
Touch ROTOR COVER (icon that shows cover open) to open the chamber.
Rotate the rotor holder in the analysis compartment to block the LED light’s
optic pathway. Touch ROTOR COVER (icon that shows cover open) to close
rotor cover.
Touch SERVICE→A / D CONVERTER TESTS.
Check that the coagulimetric and the chromogenic channels’ average voltages
are within the specification range of 0.002 to 0.015 volts. (NOTE:
Occasional spikes above this value are allowed.)
Coagulimetric channel: ( Adjust RV 1 Acquisition & Sensors Board if
necessary).
Chromogenic channel: ( Adjust RV 4 Acquisition & Sensors Board if
necessary)
NOTE: It is important to watch the voltage reading for one (1) minute and
observe that the voltage occasionally fluctuates slightly above 0.000.
Touch check (√) to exit.
Gains Check
Touch SERVICE→OPTICAL MODULE TEST→ACQUISITION
ADJUSTMENT.
Touch ROTOR COVER (icon) to open cover. Insure no rotor is in the
chamber.
Touch ROTOR COVER (icon) to close cover.
Touch START.
Check that the chromogenic (V) value is within the specification: 8.700 +/0.050 volts.
(Adjust RV3 Acquisition & Sensors Board if necessary)
Touch ROTOR COVER (icon that shows cover open) to open the chamber.
Chapter 5 – Installation & Maintenance
Page 21 of 36
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
Place 200 microliters of the instrument’s reference solution in position 20 of a
new rotor. Insert rotor into chamber. Touch ROTOR COVER (icon that
shows cover open) to close rotor cover. Wait three (3) minutes for
temperature to stabilize.
Touch START.
Check that the coagulimetric (V) value is within the specification: 2.6 +/- 0.3
volts.
(Adjust RV2 Acquisition & Sensors Board if necessary)
Touch STOP. Touch OK.
Touch check (√) to exit.
Curves Check
NOTE: Dispensed volume, temperature, and time are critical to the results of
this test.
Touch SERVICE→OPTICAL MODULE TEST→CURVE ADJUST
(coagulimetric rotation speed set @ 1200 rpm).
Check that the SELECT DELAY (μs) is the same as the value on the
instrument label next to Coag. “1200 DELAY.” (The label is located on the
drawer under the top right hand corner of the keyboard.)
Note: If this delay value is incorrect, it will be necessary to change
the label when all of the related tests are completed. Keep records of
new values on Checklist.
Touch START.
Check the delay to the left of the 1000 value.
Check that the delay to left of the 1000 value is the same as the SELECT
DELAY value on the LCD display (and the label).
Touch the arrow below SELECT CHANNEL. Touch CHROMOGENIC.
Touch the arrow below SELECT CHANNEL again.
Touch START.
Check the delay to the left of the 1000 value.
Check that the delay to the left of the 1000 value is the same as the SELECT
DELAY value on the instrument label next to Chrom. “1200 DELAY.”
Check that the maximum delay delta (i.e., absolute value of the difference)
between coagulimetric and chromogenic values (@ 1200 rpm) on the
Checklist is ≤ 90.
Touch the arrow below select channel. Touch COAGULIMETRIC.
Touch the arrow below SELECT CHANNEL again.
Touch the arrow below ROTATION SPEED. Touch 600 (rpm)-.
Page 22 of 36
Chapter 5 – Installation & Maintenance
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
Touch the arrow below ROTATION SPEED again.
Touch START.
Check and record on the Checklist the delay to the left of the 1000 value.
Touch the arrow below SELECT CHANNEL. Touch CHROMOGENIC.
Touch the arrow below SELECT CHANNEL again.
Touch START.
Record on the Checklist the delay to the left of the 1000 value.
Check that the maximum delay delta between coagulimetric and chromogenic
values (@ 600 rpm) on the Checklist is ≤ 120.
Touch rotor cover icon to open motor cover. Remove rotor.
Touch rotor cover icon to close rotor cover.
Touch “X” to exit.
Fiber Adjustment Check
Remove rotor – this check is performed without a rotor.
Touch SERVICE→OPTICAL MODULE TEST→FIBER ADJUSTMENT
TEST.
Touch START.
Check that all the cuvette values are < 0.070.
Touch SET TO ENVELOPE MODE.
Check that all the max. / min. values are < 0.050.
Touch STOP. Touch OK.
Place clean rotor in chamber.
Touch START.
Check that the cuvette values are > 0.140.
Touch SET TO ENVELOPE MODE.
Check that all the max. / min. values are < 0.050.
Remove rotor.
15.
DILUTOR CHECK
Materials / tools necessary:
Graduated Capillary P/N 00082589-00
Blue Dye
Tubing Removal Tool
Green Bottle Adapters (3)
4.0 mL Bottles (3)
8.0 mL Bottle
Deionized Water
Instrument’s Reference Solution
Volume Check
Note: Use caution in removing the tubes not to disturb the needles
adjustment
Touch SERVICE→DILUTOR TESTS→VOLUME CHECKS.
Chapter 5 – Installation & Maintenance
Page 23 of 36
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
Touch SAMPLE DILUTOR.
Remove top tube from sample arm and connect capillary to the tube. Hold
tube over 8.0 mL empty bottle.
Touch START. The instrument will prime and then prompt you to place the
capillary in the blue dye.
Touch OK.
Check that the dye is aspirated into the capillary and stops in between the top
two (2) lines on the capillary. After ten (10) seconds the dye will be dispensed
and should stop in between the bottom two (2) lines on the capillary. Perform
this check several times to ensure that the results are repeatable and that the
system has been primed properly.
If the liquid consistently sets above or below the two lines, a correction is
required. The correction can be entered in the window SELECT
CORRECTION VALUE. First attempt decrementing (or incrementing) the
correction value by 1 unit. The allowable range is –8 to +8. Repeat the test to
ensure that the entered value achieves proper volume dispensing. NOTE: If a
value has changed with respect to the original setting, it is necessary to change
the label when all related tests are completed.
Touch check (√) to replace value and exit.
Disconnect the capillary from the sample tube and reinstall the tube on the top
of the sample arm. Remove the bottom tube from the sample arm and connect
the capillary to the tube. Hold the tube over the empty 8.0 mL bottle.
Touch SERVICE→DILUTOR TESTS→VOLUME CHECKS.
Touch REAGENT.
Touch START. The instrument will prime and then prompt you to place the
capillary in the blue dye.
Touch OK.
Check that the dye is aspirated into the capillary and stops in between the top
two (2) lines on the capillary. After ten (10) seconds the dye will be dispensed
and should stop in between the bottom two (2) lines on the capillary. Perform
this check several times to ensure that the results are repeatable and that the
system has been primed properly.
If the liquid consistently sets above or below the two lines, a correction is
required. The correction can be entered in the window SELECT
CORRECTION VALUE. First attempt decrementing (or incrementing) the
correction value by 1 unit. The allowable range is –8 to +8. Repeat the test to
ensure that the entered value achieves proper volume dispensing. NOTE: If a
value has changed with respect to the original setting, it is necessary to change
the label when all related tests are completed.
Touch check (√) to replace value and exit.
Disconnect the capillary from the reagent tube and reinstall the tube on the
bottom of the sample arm.
Touch check (√) to exit.
Page 24 of 36
Chapter 5 – Installation & Maintenance
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
Coagulimetric Check
Note: Use caution in removing the tubes not to disturb the needles
adjustment. Use tubing removal tool to invert the sample and reference
tubes on the sample arm. (Sample tube onto reference and reference
tube onto sample.)
Place deionized water in 4.0 mL bottle and place bottle in position R4. Place
the instrument’s reference solution in a 4.0 mL bottle and place in position R1.
Touch ROTOR COVER icon to open rotor cover. Install a new rotor in
chamber.
Touch ROTOR COVER icon to close rotor cover.
Touch SERVICE→DILUTOR TESTS→DILUTOR TEST.
Touch START MANUAL ROTOR LOADING. Wait for instrument to
complete test.
Check that when the test is completed there are no red values displayed.
Coagulimetric specifications:
CV% (cuvette 1 to 6)
:<=4
CV% (cuvette 7 to 12) :<=5
CV% (cuvette 13 to 18) :<=5
CV% (Reference)
:<=2.5
Mean Reference
: 2.0V to 3.0 V
R2
: >=0.997
If there are red values, repeat the test with a new rotor. If instrument fails
again (red values at the end of the test), corrective action is required. Prime
the dilutors (insure air bubbles are removed from pistons and tubing), check
needle block alignment, repeat dilutor tests volume checks. Repeat the
dilutor test.
Chromogenic Check
Use tubing tool to reinvert sample and reagent tubes on the sample arm.
(Reagent tube on the bottom and sample tube on the top). Remove bottle with
reference solution from position R1 and replace it with PNA 160µmol/l in a
new bottle.
Touch rotor cover icon to open rotor cover.
Replace rotor with a new rotor.
Touch rotor cover icon to close rotor cover.
Touch arrow next to CHANNEL TYPE. Touch the down arrow to choose
CHROMOGENIC.
Touch arrow next to CHANNEL TYPE.
Touch arrow next to LOADING TYPE. Touch the down arrow to choose
REAGENT DILUTOR.
Touch arrow next to LOADING TYPE.
Touch “START IN MANUAL LOADING”
Check that when the test is completed there are no red values displayed,
except for the MEAN value which can be red with the specification of 7.2 to
8.8.
Chapter 5 – Installation & Maintenance
Page 25 of 36
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
Chromogenic specifications:
CV% (cuvette 1 to 6)
:<=1.5
CV% (cuvette 7 to 12) :<=3
CV% (cuvette 13 to 18) :<=5
CV% (Refeence)
:<=0.4
Mean Reference
: 7.2V to 8.8 V
R2
: >=0.997
If there are red values (except for the mean), repeat the test with a new rotor.
If instrument fails again (red values at the end of the test), corrective action is
required. Prime the dilutors (insure air bubbles are removed from pistons and
tubing), check needle block alignment, repeat dilutor tests volume checks.
Repeat the dilutor test.
Touch check (√) to exit.
16.
TOUCH SCREEN CHECK
Exit the Service menu by touching the CLOSE DOOR icon, which should
bring you to the “Ready” screen.
Using a fingertip, touch the (vertical) down scroll arrow. The highlighted bar
should move down.
Using a fingertip, touch the (vertical) up scroll arrow. The highlighted bar
should move up.
Page 26 of 36
Chapter 5 – Installation & Maintenance
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
ACL Elite/ElitePro Installation Checklist
Service Rep:_____________________ Date:________________
Serial Number:___________________ Account:___________________________
Perform adjustments as necessary. Set configurations as necessary. Refer to ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual.
Check overall instrument appearance. Insure accessory kit is complete.
Test
Number
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Action to Check / Perform
Check Air Filter
Check Display Locking Mechanism
Check Software Revision
Check System Configuration
Check System Interfaces Configuration (keyboard, barcodes, printer, host)
Check Magnetic Stirrer Bar Rotation
Check Floppy Disk
Check Mouse / Host / Parallel Printer Ports
Check Waste Line Efficiency
Verify Sample Arm Module Positioning / Alignment
Verify Needles Block Alignment
Check Temperatures (Verify good rotor brush contact)
Insure Sample Arm and Rotor Caliper Arm mounting set screws are tight
Verify Rotor Motor Cover Stored Step setting
Verify Rotor Exchange Module Functionality
R.E.M. -- SA-SL-RH Test
Rotor Waste Container Sensor
Rotor Stack Sensor
Verify Autosampler / BCR Test
Container Presence and Offset
Bar Code Labels Identification and Offset
Verify Liquid Level Detection Sensors
Wash-Reference Emulsion Sensor
Needles Block Sensors
Verify Optic Channels (Coag & Chrom)
Offsets
Gains
Curves
405 Filter Test
Fiber Adjustment Test
Light Source Verification
Perform Dilutor Test
Coagulimetric
Chromogenic
Volume Check
Coagulation Performance Tests
Coagulimetric Precision Test
Coagulimetric Linearity Test
Chromogenic Performance Tests
Chromogenic Precision Test
Chromogenic Linearity Test (level 80)
Chromogenic Linearity Test (level 160)
Chapter 5 – Installation & Maintenance
Reference
Paragraph
5.2.4
5.1.3
7.16.1
5.1.5
8.0
5.1.4
7.15
7.13
5.2.1
7.7.1
7.7.4
7.14
N/A
7.6.2
Pass/Adjust/
Check
7.7.9
7.5.1
7.5.2
7.5.3
7.5.3
7.4.1
7.4.2
7.2.1 / 7.3.1
7.2.1 / 7.3.1
7.2.1 / 7.3.1
7.3.1
7.2.4
7.2.3 / 7.3.3
7.8.1
7.8.1
7.8.2
7.2.2
7.2.2
7.3.2
7.3.2
7.3.2
Page 27 of 36
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
5.2 Maintenance
In order to keep the ACL Elite/ElitePro analyzer in optimal operating condition it is
recommend that the following procedures be carried out by a trained operator at the
frequency specified.
The Maintenance subsection of the Diagnostic menu allows the user to access and
record dates and notes related to the performance of specific maintenance operations.
If any maintenance action is not performed within the recommended period then the
relevant line will appear in red.
Following are the specific sub-sections.
5.2.1
5.2.2
5.2.3
5.2.4
5.2.5
5.2.6
5.2.7
Daily Maintenance
Weekly Maintenance
Bi-Weekly Maintenance
Monthly Maintenance
Yearly Maintenance
As needed Maintenance
Maintenance schedule
WARNING !
BIOLOGICAL HAZARDS EXIST. Avoid touching, with bare hands, any parts
of the system which may have come in contact with potentially infectious fluids.
ALWAYS wear gloves when performing any type of Maintenance/Service action
on this area.
Page 28 of 36
Chapter 5 – Installation & Maintenance
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
5.2.1
Daily Maintenance
At the beginning and at the end of each working day perform a Priming cycle to
ensure the complete removal of all sample or reagent residual along the fluidic paths.
While the priming cycle is in progress, the operator should visually inspect three
items:
• That number of bubbles in the Dilutor Chamber reduces to minimum. If bubbles
are still present, pinch the chamber outlet tubes while the piston is descending and
releases them before the piston reaches the bottom dead center. Repeat the
priming cycle as needed until all bubbles are gone.
• That there are no blockages or leaks in the liquid flow path and the liquid is
flowing smoothly from reservoir to dilutors and from dilutors to needles.
• That there is free flow of the liquid waste from the washing chamber to the
instrument outlet tube and then to the waste container (check the liquid level in
the waste container).
Note: The instrument has sensors to detect the availability of Wash Reference
Emulsion as well as new and waste rotors. In order to start the working day with the
maximum instrument autonomy it’s advisable to empty the Rotor Waste Container
from used rotors, fill the Rotor Stack with brand new rotors and check the level of the
Wash Reference Emulsion in the bottle.
5.2.2
Weekly Maintenance
The weekly preventive maintenance for the ACL Elite/ElitePro consists in cleaning
all the key instrument areas which normally come in contact with sample and reagents
and therefore accumulate residues that will, if allowed to build up, impair the
instrument functionality and affect the tests results. The parts / areas to be cleaned are:
• Instrument exposed surfaces.
• The Needle Block.
• The Rinse / Waste reservoir.
WARNING !
BIOLOGICAL HAZARDS EXIST. Avoid touching, with bare hands, any parts
of the system which may have come in contact with potentially infectious fluids.
ALWAYS wear gloves when performing any type of Maintenance/Service action
on this area.
• Instrument exposed surfaces
Wipe down all exposed surfaces of the analyzer body, the inside of the Autosampler
compartment and the Rotor compartment (excluding the rotor holder) using a cloth
Chapter 5 – Installation & Maintenance
Page 29 of 36
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
soaked in a 0.1 N Hydrochloric Acid (HCl) solution (IL Cleaning Solution P/N
98317-00). Rinse using a cloth soaked in distilled water. Wipe dry.
• The Needle Block
Place 2 glass vials with 4 mL of 0.1 N HCl solution in reagent positions R6 and R7
Click the Diagnostic button on the Main menu bar and select the Cleaning option of
the Diagnostic submenu to display the Cleaning screen.
In this screen the operator defines the configuration of the cleaning operation,
according to the needs of the instrument.
Clicking the Start button starts the cleaning cycle and opens a window displaying a
bar that moves to show the elapsed time of the procedure.
• The Rinse / Waste reservoir
Remove the Rinse / Waste reservoir, wash it thoroughly with 0.1N HCl solution (IL
Cleaning Solution P/N 98317-00) and rinse it with distilled water.
5.2.3
Bi-Weekly Maintenance
The rotor holder and the optical path components located in the analysis area must be
cleaned every two weeks under normal instrument use.
WARNING !
BIOLOGICAL HAZARDS EXIST. Avoid touching, with bare hands, any parts
of the system which may have come in contact with potentially infectious fluids.
ALWAYS wear gloves when performing any type of Maintenance/Service action
on this area.
Press the “Open/Close Cover” icon to open the Rotor Holder Cover.
Proceed as follows using the following figure as a reference:
Page 30 of 36
Chapter 5 – Installation & Maintenance
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
Using a cotton tip applicator moistened with distilled water, clean all 20 holes in the
Rotor Holder and the surfaces of the Channels sensors and fibers. Use a clean, dry
cotton tip applicator to remove all moisture from these areas.
5.2.4
Monthly Maintenance
• Check and clean the Air Filter
In order to check and clean the analyzer air filter, it must first be removed from its
location on the right side of the instrument. The filter slides out when pulled after
inserting a finger in the holder slot (see figure below).
Chapter 5 – Installation & Maintenance
Page 31 of 36
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
Check the filter: if it is dirty or blocked, clean it with compressed air or by washing it
in water and blowing it dry. Do not place a wet filter into its position.
If the filter appears damaged, it should be replaced. Insert the clean or new Air Filter
back in its holder.
5.2.5
Yearly Maintenance
The yearly preventive maintenance for the ACL consists of replacing the following
expandable parts.
•
•
•
•
•
Replace the Air Filter
Replace the sample and reagent tubes
Replace the Needle Block (see sub-section 5.2.6)
Replace the waste tube
Replace the waste reservoir
WARNING !
BIOLOGICAL HAZARDS EXIST. Avoid touching, with bare hands, any parts
of the system which may have come in contact with potentially infectious fluids.
ALWAYS wear gloves when performing any type of Maintenance/Service action
on this area.
5.2.6
As needed Maintenance
WARNING !
BIOLOGICAL HAZARDS EXIST. Avoid touching, with bare hands, any parts
of the system which may have come in contact with potentially infectious fluids.
ALWAYS wear gloves when performing any type of Maintenance/Service action
on this area.
•
Waste Line Cleaning Procedure
The waste line cleaning procedure is performed to prevent formation of clots or to
clean any possible blockages (due to clotting) in the waste line. The frequency with
which this procedure should be done depends on the daily workload.
Materials / Tools needed:
Page 32 of 36
- 20 mL plastic syringe
- 20 cm of PVC tube, 4 mm ID, 6 mm OD.
- 20 mL of distilled water or 10% bleach.
Chapter 5 – Installation & Maintenance
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
1
2
3
4
5
•
Remove the needle from the plastic syringe (if necessary), and fit the PVC
tube on the end on the syringe (the tube’s dimensions must be such that it will
fit onto the syringe on one end and into the waste line at the other end).
Fill the syringe with distilled water or 10% bleach.
Remove the Rinse / Waste Reservoir and clean it if necessary (refer to Section
5.2.2).
Insert the free end of the PVC tube into the waste line, carefully inject the
distilled water or 10% bleach into the waste line and check that the liquid
flows out from the external waste line of the instrument to the waste container.
Repeat the procedure several times to ensure removal of any potential
blockage then replace the Rinse / Waste reservoir.
Cleaning of Sample Spillage
In case of sample / reagent spillage wipe using a clean cloth or cotton tip applicator
soaked in a 0.1N HCl solution (IL Cleaning Solution P/N 98317-00). Follow with
distilled water and dry with a clean cloth or cotton tip applicator.
In case of sample / reagent spillage in the Autosampler or in the Rotor Holder
compartment, it may be required to clean also the 2 sensors in the Autosampler and
the two optical paths in the analysis area (see sub-section 5.2.3).
•
Needles Block replacing
Press the “Open/Close Cover” icon to open the Rotor Cover.
Click “Diagnostic” on the Main menu bar and select “Needles Position”. The
Sample Arm moves over the Rotor Holder.
Loosen the white knob on the back of the Sample Arm, disconnect the tubing (label
tubings for proper reconnection) and the Liquid Sensor Cable and remove the Needle
Block.
Insert the new Needle Block, connect the sensor cable and the two tubings (connect
tubing to proper needle) and position the block higher than the arm’s top surface.
Follow the needle positioning procedure as described in the sub-section 7.7.4.
•
Needle Positioning procedure
The procedure to reposition or adjust the Needles Block is necessary after having
dismantled for cleaning, decontamination or changes of the Needles Block.
The procedure is described in sub-section 7.7.4.
•
Needles Block decontamination procedure
This sub-section describes the procedure to decontaminate the ACL Needles Block.
It’s recommended after using the system to test a highly infectious sample and as a
general precaution to prevent and eliminate potential bacterial contamination.
Chapter 5 – Installation & Maintenance
Page 33 of 36
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
The use of the ACL system for the analysis of known or suspected highly infectious
samples, should be followed by careful disinfecting of the instrument surfaces and
parts which have been in contact with the samples. The disinfecting agent used to
perform the procedure indicated below is a 1:8 dilution of IL Cleaning Agent P/N
98327-00, which is a solution of sodium hypochlorite with a concentration of less
than 0.625% of available chlorine. The 1:8 diluted solution is prepared by mixing 1
part Cleaning Agent with 7 parts of distilled water.
Note!
Use only IL Cleaning Agent (P/N 98327-00) diluted 1:8 with distilled water.
The use of undiluted IL Cleaning Agent may cause corrosion of metal parts.
Materials / Tools needed:
- 2 glass 10 mL vials
- IL Cleaning Agent
P/N 98327-00
- Distilled water
Prepare approximately 16 mL of diluted Cleaning Agent solution (mix 2 part of IL
Cleaning Agent and 14 parts distilled water).
Load the ACL reagent position R6 and R7 with the 2 glass vials filled with 8 mL of
the prepared diluted Cleaning Agent solution
Press “Diagnostic” on the Main menu bar, select “Cleaning” and then press “Start”.
At the end of the cleaning cycle remove the vials in position R6 and R7 and perform a
Priming cycle.
Replace the external waste tube and the waste container.
CAUTION !
The discarded items must be placed in an appropriate container for further
incineration, according to proper local regulations.
In the case of suspected severe contamination, replace the tubing and discard the
old one in an appropriate container for further incineration, according to proper
local regulations
•
Hard Drive Maintenaance
Using the Hard Drive Maintenance Diskette part number 000190357-70, perform the
hard drive maintenance as needed. Refer to procedure 000190357-70 included with
the Hard Drive Maintenance Diskette.
Page 34 of 36
Chapter 5 – Installation & Maintenance
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
5.2.7
Maintenance schedule
Frequency
Maintenance procedure
Daily
At the beginning and at the end of each working day or once per shift,
carry out a priming cycle.
Empty the liquid waste container when needed.
Empty the rotors waste container when needed.
Fill the Rotor Stack with new rotors when needed.
Load a new bottle of Wash – Reference Emulsion when needed.
Clean the exposed instrument surfaces, inside the Autosampler and
the analysis compartments (with the exception of the Rotor Holder).
Clean the Needles Block carrying out the dedicated cleaning cycle
Clean the Rinse / Waste reservoir
Clean the analysis compartment optical parts with a cotton tip
applicator moistened with distilled water:
Clean the LED sensor surface
Clean the LED optic fibre surface
Clean the Halogen Lamp sensor surface
Clean the Halogen Lamp fibre optic surface
Clean the 20 holes of the Rotor Holder
Check the Air Filter
Replace the Air Filter
Replace the sample and reagent tubes
Replace the Needles Block
Replace the waste tube
Replace the waste reservoir
Clean the Waste line
Clean the sample spillage
Replace the Needles Block
Position the Needles Block
Decontaminate the Needles Block
Hard Drive Maintenance
Weekly
Bi-Weekly
Monthly
Yearly
As needed
Chapter 5 – Installation & Maintenance
Page 35 of 36
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
5.3 Shut down & Shipment precautions
This section gives some suggestions in case of long term shut down or shipment of
the instrument. The following procedures describe how to prepare the ACL before a
shut down or a shipment.
5.3.1
5.3.2
Long term shut down
Shipment
5.3.1
Long term shut down
For long period of inactivity, more than one week, the following actions should be
carried out.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Perform a Priming cycle by selecting “Priming” in the “Diagnostic” menu.
Remove any container on board the instrument.
Empty the Rotor Waste Container.
Remove and close the Wash – Reference Emulsion bottle.
Empty the fluidic tubes by performing another Priming cycle.
Close the Wash – Reference Emulsion aspiration tube with adhesive tape.
Log-out and switch the instrument Off.
Empty and remove the waste tube and the waste container.
Disconnect the ACL system electrically from the main power, removing the
Power Cord from the rear of the instrument and from the main line.
Cover the instrument with a dust cover.
5.3.2
Shipment
In case of shipment, carry out the following actions.
1
2
3
4
5
6
Perform the actions suggested in the sub-section 5.3.1.
Remove the Needles Block, wash it with IL Cleaning Solution P/N 98317-00
and rinse with distilled water. Pack it separately. Wipe instrument external
surfaces with 10% bleach and rinse surfaces with a cloth, paper towels, etc.
dampened with DH2O.
Remove and pack separately also all the other accessories (Sample Tray,
Adapters, Keyboard etc…).
Fix with adhesive tape all the parts that could be moving during the transport
(Sample Arm, Rotor Cover, Rotor Stack Cover, Rotor Waste Compartment
Panel etc…).
Close with adhesive tape the waste outlet tube on the left side of the
instrument.
If the original packing is not available is recommended that a suitable box to
isolate the instrument from any external impact to be used (paying particular
attention to the Display Assembly). In this case pack all the accessories in
another box, separately.
Page 36 of 36
Chapter 5 – Installation & Maintenance
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting
This Chapter is designed to provide the Service Engineer information about the error
messages displayed by the instrument as well as suggestions and tools to fix the problem
during the Instrument Troubleshooting.
Following are the specific sections.
6.1
6.2
6.3
Error Messages & Troubleshooting
Service Tools
Standard Tools
6.1 Error Messages and Troubleshooting
This section provides information about instrument error conditions and specific errors
displayed by the instrument.
Following are the specific sub-section for each category of problem.
6.1.1
6.1.2
6.1.3
6.1.4
6.1.5
6.1.6
6.1.7
6.1.8
6.1.9
6.1.10
6.1.11
6.1.12
System errors
Temperature errors
Mechanical errors
R.E.M. error
Optic errors
Acquisition errors
Liquid sensors errors
Operative error
Database errors
Sample identification errors
DMS errors
Analytical errors
Chapter 6 – Troubleshooting
Page 1 of 37
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
6.1.1
System Errors
The following paragraphs provide information about problems related to the PC like
system present inside the instrument.
•
•
•
Unexpected Shut Down and Turn On problems.
Problems detected by the CPU Master Board’s BIOS.
Problems detected by the Main Program
•
Unexpected Shut Down and Turn On problems.
ERROR
MESSAGES
MEANING AND POSSIBLE CAUSES, PARTS TO BE
EFFECTS
CHECKED OR REPLACED
Instrument
Turn On with
Black Screen
At Turn On the
Instrument LCD
(video display) is
Black.
Instrument
Turn On with
Touch Screen
problem
The Instrument
performs the Turn
On cycle but the
Touch Screen is
inoperative.
Instrument
Shut Down for
Voltage
problem
Unexpected Shut
Down for a Short
Circuit or for a
lowering of the
voltages on the
Switching Power
Supply.
The SPS is in
Protection Mode
(DL1 On).
Page 2 of 37
Check that the SPS is not in Protection Mode (DL1
On).
Check the presence of all the output voltages on the
SPS’s Test Point TP1 – TP9 (w/o TP6 for voltage
+6VLAMP).
If the SPS is in protection Mode or output voltages
are less go to the error message “Instrument Shut
Down for Voltage” problem.
Replace the Display Cable.
Replace the CPU Master Board (Board #1).
Replace the Video Display Assembly.
Turn Off the Instrument and verify the proper
Display Cable connection on CN3 and CN6 in the
PC104 Board.
Replace the Display Cable.
Replace the PC104 Board.
Replace the Display Assembly.
Turn Off the Instrument for at least 20 seconds.
Check the Main fuses into the Power Entry.
Unplug the 5 Boards located in the Card Housing,
CN12 on the CPU Master Board and then Turn On:
Check for the presence of the output voltages on the
SPS’s Test Point TP1 – TP9 (w/o TP6 for the voltage
+6VLAMP).
If now the voltages are present then investigate for
which load or Board in Card Housing is the problem.
Turn Off the Instrument, unplug the 3 connectors on
the Power (K1, K2 & K3) and Turn On.
Now Check for the presence of the output voltages
on the SPS’s Test Point TP1 – TP9 (w/o TP6 for the
voltage +6VLAMP).
If the voltages are present, then investigate for which
load or Interconnection Board is present the Short
Circuit.
Replace the SPS Board.
Chapter 6 – Troubleshooting
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
Instrument
Shut Down for
Temperature
problem
•
Unexpected Shut
Down for high
temperature on the
Switching Power
Supply’s thermistor
(over 75 °C).
The SPS is in
Protection Mode
(DL1 On).
Verify that the environment temperature doesn’t
exceed 40°C.
Verify that there is enough space around the
Instrument for the fan’s cooling.
Turn OFF the Main Switch and allow the Instrument
to cool (about 15 minutes).
In the meanwhile check the Air Filter, clean or
replace if necessary.
Now Turn On the Instrument and check that the Fans
work correctly.
Check the presence of all the output voltages on the
SPS’s Test Point TP1 – TP9 (w/o TP6 for voltage
+6VLAMP); pay attention to the +12VPW for the
Fans.
Replace the SPS Board.
Replace the Acquisition & Sensors Board (Board #3)
Problems detected by the CPU Master Board’s BIOS.
ERROR
MESSAGES
MEANING AND POSSIBLE CAUSES, PARTS TO BE
EFFECTS
CHECKED OR REPLACED
Hard Disk
Drive Failure
During the Boot
phase the CPU
Master Board’s
BIOS detects a
problem on the
HDD.
During the Boot
phase the CPU
Master Board’s
BIOS detects a
problem on the
FDD.
During the Boot
phase the CPU
Master Board’s
BIOS detects a
problem on the
RAM Memory.
During the Boot
phase the CPU
Master Board’s
BIOS detects a
problem on the
Keyboard.
Floppy Disk
Drive Failure
RAM Memory
Failure
Keyboard
Failure
Verify that the HDD parameters are present in the
BIOS configuration (No changes are required, only to
check for possible parameters lost).
Replace the CPU Master Board (Board #1).
Replace the Hard Disk Drive.
Verify that the FDD parameters are present in the
BIOS configuration (No changes are required, only to
check for possible parameters lost).
Replace the Floppy Disk Drive.
Replace the CPU Master Board (Board #1).
Replace the CPU Master Board (Board #1).
Replace the Keyboard.
Replace the Interface Board.
Replace the CPU Master Board (Board #1).
Replace the Mother Board.
Chapter 6 – Troubleshooting
Page 3 of 37
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
•
Problems detected by the Main Program
ERROR
MESSAGES
MEANING AND POSSIBLE CAUSES, PARTS TO BE
EFFECTS
CHECKED OR REPLACED
Warning:
Error opening
file
The Main Program
detects a problem
during opening file.
Warning:
Error reading
file
The Main Program
detects a problem
during reading file.
Warning:
Error writing
to file
The Main Program
detects a problem
during writing to
file.
The Main Program
detects a problem
during the loading
of the current
session.
During the
communications
from the CPU
Master to the Slave,
the timeout is
expired.
Warning:
Session loading
Error
Warning:
Master – Slave
communicatio
n timeout
Error
Warning:
Timeout
Expired
Warning:
Error parsing
loading
parameters
Warning:
Invalid
parameters
Warning: Zip /
Unzip Error
Warning:
REM
download
Error
Page 4 of 37
Following the procedure in the sub-section 7.16.2,
make the Upload and then the Upgrade of the Master
Software.
Replace the CPU Master Board (Board #1).
Following the procedure in the sub-section 7.16.2,
make the Upload and then the Upgrade of the Master
Software.
Replace the CPU Master Board (Board #1).
Following the procedure in the sub-section 7.16.2,
make the Upload and then the Upgrade of the Master
Software.
Replace the CPU Master Board (Board #1).
Following the procedure in the sub-section 7.16.2,
make the Upload and then the Upgrade of the Master
and of the Slave Software.
Replace the CPU Master Board (Board #1).
Following the procedure in the sub-section 7.16.2,
make the Upload and then the Upgrade of the Master
and of the Slave Software.
Replace the CPU Master Board (Board #1). Replace
the Slave Board (Board #2).
Invalid parameters
are detected during
the sending from
the CPU Master to
the Slave.
Following the procedure in the sub-section 7.16.2,
make the Upload and then the Upgrade of the Master
and of the Slave Software.
Replace the CPU Master Board (Board #1). Replace
the Slave Board (Board #2).
The Main program
detects a problem
during the
Download of the
R.E.M Software.
Following the procedure in the sub-section 7.16.2,
make the Upload and then the Upgrade of the REM
Software.
Replace the R.E.M. Board (Board #4).
Replace the Slave Board (Board #2).
Chapter 6 – Troubleshooting
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
Alarm: Slave
Absent
Alarm: Slave
program not
loaded
Alarm: Flash
Memory Error
Alarm: Arcnet
Connection
Error
Alarm: A/D
Converter
Error
Alarm: OI
Error
Alarm: Error
Creating
Window
Alarm:
Timeout
Expired
Alarm:
Unknown
message
Alarm: Error
sending
message
Alarm: Error
creating timer
Alarm: Master
– Slave
message has
incorrect
length
Alarm: Master
The CPU Master
doesn’t find the
Slave.
The CPU Master
doesn’t find the
software onboard
of the Slave Bd
The CPU Master
detects a problem
on the Flash
Memory on the
Slave Board.
The Main program
detects a problem
in the
communications
with the Slave
through Arcnet.
Following the procedure in the sub-section 7.16.2, make
the Upload and then the Upgrade of the Slave Software.
Replace the Slave Board (Board #2).
Following the procedure in the sub-section 7.16.2, make
the Upload and then the Upgrade of the Slave Software.
Replace the Slave Board (Board #2).
The Main Program
detects a problem
during the creating
of a window for the
Operator Interface
graphic program.
Following the procedure in the sub-section 7.16.2, make
the Upload and then the Upgrade of the Master Software.
Replace the CPU Master Board (Board #1).
The Main Program
detects a problem
during the creating
of a timer.
The Main Program
detects a problem
in the length of a
message sent from
the CPU Master to
the Slave.
The Main Program
Following the procedure in the sub-section 7.16.2, make
the Upload and then the Upgrade of the Master Software.
Replace the CPU Master Board (Board #1).
Following the procedure in the sub-section 7.16.2, make
the Upload and then the Upgrade of the Slave Software.
Replace the Slave Board (Board #2).
Verify the Arcnet interconnection cable.
Try also to use the connector CN4 (on the PC104 Board)
and P7 (on the Slave Board).
Replace the Slave Board (Board #2).
Replace the PC104 Board.
Following the procedure in the sub-section 7.16.2, make
the Upload and then the Upgrade of the Master Software.
Replace the CPU Master Board (Board #1).
Following the procedure in the sub-section 7.16.2, make
Chapter 6 – Troubleshooting
Page 5 of 37
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
– Slave
message has
incorrect code
6.1.2
detects a problem
in the code of a
message sent from
the CPU Master to
the Slave.
the Upload and then the Upgrade of the Master Software.
Replace the CPU Master Board (Board #1).
Temperatures Errors
ERROR
MESSAGES
MEANING AND POSSIBLE CAUSES, PARTS TO BE
EFFECTS
CHECKED OR REPLACED
Warning:
Incubation
temperature
out of range in
startup
The Instrument is
powered On less
then 30 minutes
and the Rotor
Holder is warming
up.
The Instrument is
powered On more
then 30 minutes
and the Rotor
Holder temperature
is out of range 3839 C°.
Warning:
Incubation
temperature
out of range
Warning:
Peltier 1
temperature
out of range in
startup
Warning:
Peltier 1
temperature
out of range
Warning:
Peltier 2
temperature
out of range in
startup
Page 6 of 37
The Instrument is
powered On less
then 30 minutes
and the Peltier 1 is
cooling.
Wait for the the Rotor Holder warm up.
If after 30 minutes the Rotor Holder hasn’t achieved
the right temperature (38-39 °C) the error message
becomes: “Warning: Incubation temperature out of
range”.
Verify the Rotor Holder movement assy:
Verify, with a DVM that on the connector P148 is
present the resistance of the thermistor (If it’s a Short
Circuit or an Open Circuit verify the Brushes assy. If
the Brushes Assy is correct then read the thermistor’s
resistance directly on the 2 rings. If the thermistor is
defective replace the whole Rotor Holder movement
Assy).
Verify on the connector P148 that the Heater Coil
isn’t interrupted or the capacitor unsoldered.
Verify the Photometric and Temperature Control
Board (Board #6) functionality as described in the
sub-section 3.3.9.
Verify the Photometer Interface Board.
Waiting for the Peltier 1 to cool.
If after 30 minutes the Peltier 1 hasn’t achieves the
right temperature (10-16 °C) the error message
becomes: “Warning: Peltier 1 temperature out of
range”.
The Instrument is powered On more then 30 minutes
and the Peltier 1 temperature is out of range 10-16
C°.
The Instrument is powered On less then 30 minutes
and the Peltier 2 is cooling.
Chapter 6 – Troubleshooting
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
Warning:
Peltier 2
temperature
out of range
The Instrument is
powered On more
then 30 minutes
and the Peltier 2
temperature is out
of range 10-16 C°.
Warning:
Rotor
Transport
temperature
out of range in
startup
Warning:
Rotor
Transport
temperature
out of range
The Instrument is
powered On less
then 30 minutes
and the Rotor
Transport is
warming up.
The Instrument is
powered On more
then 30 minutes
and the Rotor
Transport
temperature is out
of range 34-40 C°.
Warning:
Rotor Stack
temperature
out of range in
startup
Warning:
Rotor Stack
temperature
out of range
The Instrument is
powered On less
then 30 minutes
and the Rotor Stack
is warming up.
The Instrument is
powered On more
then 30 minutes
and the Rotor Stack
temperature is out
of range 34-40 C°.
Verify the Peltier 2 assy:
Verify, with a DVM, which on the connector P131 is
present the resistance of the thermistor (If it’s a Short
Circuit or an Open Circuit replaces the thermistor).
Verify, with a DVM, which on the connector P131 is
present also the resistance of the Peltier Cell (If it’s a
Short Circuit or an Open Circuit replaces the whole
Peltier 2 Assy).
Verify the Photometric and Temperature Control
Board (Board #6) functionality as described in the
sub-section 3.3.9.
Verify the Modules Interconnection Board.
Wait for the Rotor Transport warm up.
If after 30 minutes the Rotor Transport hasn’t
achieves the right temperature (34-40 °C) the error
message becomes: “Warning: Rotor Transport
temperature out of range”.
Verify the Rotor Transport assy:
Verify, with a DVM, which on the connector P111 is
present the resistance of the thermistor (If it’s a Short
Circuit or an Open Circuit replaces the Rotor
Transport).
Verify, with a DVM, which on the connector P111 is
present also the resistance of the Heating Pad (If it’s
a Short Circuit or an Open Circuit replaces the Rotor
Transport).
Verify the Photometric and Temperature Control
Board (Board #6) functionality as described in the
sub-section 3.3.9.
Verify the REM Lower Interconnection Board.
Wait for the Rotor Stack warm up.
If after 30 minutes the Rotor Stack has not achieved
the right temperature (34-40 °C) the error message
becomes: “Warning: Rotor Stack temperature out of
range”.
Verify the Rotor Stack assy:
Verify, with a DVM, which on the connector P117 is
present the resistance of the thermistor (If it’s a Short
Circuit or an Open Circuit replaces the Rotor Stack).
Verify, with a DVM, which on the connector P117 is
present also the resistance of the Heating Pad (If it’s
a Short Circuit or an Open Circuit replaces the Rotor
Stack).
Verify the Photometric and Temperature Control
Board (Board #6) functionality as described in the
sub-section 3.3.9.
Verify the REM Lower Interconnection Board.
Chapter 6 – Troubleshooting
Page 7 of 37
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
Warning:
Instrument
Temperature
Error
Alarm:
Temperature
Power off
Page 8 of 37
The internal
temperature of the
Instrument,
detected by the
Switching Power
Supply’s
thermistor, reaches
the critical
temperature of 60
C°.
If it reaches 75 C°
then the SPS Board
will enter in
Protection Mode
and the whole
Instrument Shut
Down (see
Instrument Shut
Down for
temperature).
One of the
Assembly’s
temperatures
reached a critical
value or is OUT OF
RANGE since more
then 15 minutes.
The Instrument for
protection purposes
Turns Off the
thermoregulation
system for the
Rotor Holder,
Peltier and/or
REM’s Modules.
Verify that the environment temperature doesn’t
exceed 40°C.
Verify that there is enough space around the
Instrument for the fan’s cooling.
Turn OFF the Main Switch and wait for Instrument
cooling (about 15 minutes).
In the meanwhile check the Air Filter for cleaning or
replacement.
Now Turn On the Instrument and check that the Fans
work correctly.
Check the presence of all the output voltages on the
SPS’s Test Point TP1 – TP9 (w/o TP6 for voltage
+6VLAMP); pay attention to the +12VPW for the
Fans.
Replace the SPS Board.
Replace the Acquisition & Sensors Board (Board #3).
Is possible remove the Alarm’s message and restore
the normal situation only with a Log-Out, a Turn Off
and after few seconds a Turn On.
Now is possible investigate about the assembly with
the problem and perform the troubleshooting with the
help of the Temperature Warning’s message
associated in this section.
If the problem is extended at all the temperatures then
go in the A/D Converter test, check if all the values
on the screen are ***** or -----, in this case replace
the Acquisition & Sensors Board (Board #3).
Chapter 6 – Troubleshooting
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
6.1.3
Mechanical Errors
ERROR
MESSAGES
MEANING AND POSSIBLE CAUSES, PARTS TO BE
EFFECTS
CHECKED OR REPLACED
Warning:
Autosampler
Motor Error
The Instrument
detects a problem
during the
Autosampler Motor
movement.
Warning:
Stirrer R1
Error
The Instrument
detects a problem
on the Magnetic
Stirrer Motor 1
(Reagent Position
R1).
The Instrument
detects a problem
on the Magnetic
Stirrer Motor 2
(Reagent Position
R2).
The Instrument
detects a problem
on the Magnetic
Stirrer Motor 3
(Reagent Position
R3).
The Instrument
detects a problem
on the Magnetic
Stirrer Motor 4
(Reagent Position
R4).
The Instrument
detects a problem
during the Sample
Dilutor Motor
movement.
Warning:
Stirrer R2
Error
Warning:
Stirrer R3
Error
Warning:
Stirrer R4
Error
Warning:
Sample line
Dilutor Motor
Error
Warning:
Reagent line
Dilutor Motor
Error
The Instrument
detects a problem
during the Reagent
Dilutor Motor
movement.
Check for mechanical obstruction during the
movement.
Check Motor Phase setting.
Check for the plug in of the connectors P74 (for the
motor) and P73 (for DCOS).
Check for the functionality of the Motor and of the
DCOS as described in the sub-section 7.6.5.
Replace the Motors Board (Board #5).
Replace the Modules Interconnection Board.
Replace the Magnetic Stirrer Motor 1.
Replace the Motors Board (Board #5).
Replace the Modules Interconnection Board.
Replace the Magnetic Stirrer Motor 2.
Replace the Motors Board (Board #5).
Replace the Modules Interconnection Board.
Replace the Magnetic Stirrer Motor 3.
Replace the Motors Board (Board #5).
Replace the Modules Interconnection Board.
Replace the Magnetic Stirrer Motor 4.
Replace the Motors Board (Board #5).
Replace the Modules Interconnection Board.
Check for the plug in of the connectors P83 (for the
motor) and P81 (for SCOS).
Check for the functionality of the Motor and of the
SCOS as described in the sub-section 7.6.6.
Replace the Motors Board (Board #5).
Replace the Modules Interconnection Board.
Check for the plug in of the connectors P84 (for the
motor) and P82 (for SCOS).
Check for the functionality of the Motor and of the
SCOS as described in the sub-section 7.6.6.
Replace the Motors Board (Board #5).
Replace the Modules Interconnection Board.
Chapter 6 – Troubleshooting
Page 9 of 37
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
Warning:
Sample Arm
Horizontal
Motor Error
The Instrument
detects a problem
during the Sample
Arm Horizontal
Motor movement.
Warning:
Sample Arm
Vertical Motor
Error
The Instrument
detects a problem
during the Sample
Arm Vertical
Motor movement.
Warning:
Rotor Holder
Motor Error
The Instrument
detects a problem
during the Rotor
Holder Motor
movement.
Warning:
Rotor Cover
Motor Error
The Instrument
detects a problem
during the Rotor
Cover Motor
movement.
Check for mechanical obstruction during the
movement.
Check Motor Phase setting.
Check for the plug in of the connectors P93 (for the
motor) and P92 (for DCOS).
Check for the functionality of the Motor and of the
DCOS as described in the sub-section 7.6.3.
Replace the Motors Board (Board #5).
Replace the Modules Interconnection Board.
Check for mechanical obstruction during the
movement.
Check for the plug in of the connectors P94 (for the
motor) and P91 (for DCOS).
Check for the functionality of the Motor and of the
DCOS as described in the sub-section 7.6.4.
Replace the Motors Board (Board #5).
Replace the Modules Interconnection Board.
Check for mechanical obstruction during the
movement.
Check Motor Phase setting.
Check for the plug in of the connectors P147 (for the
motor) and P142 (for DCOS).
Check for the functionality of the Motor and of the
DCOS as described in the sub-section 7.6.1.
Replace the Photometric and Temperatures Control
Board (Board #6).
Replace the Motors Board (Board #5).
Replace the Photometer Interface Board.
Check for mechanical obstruction during the
movement.
Check for the plug in of the connectors P144 (for the
motor) and P143 (for DCOS).
Check for the functionality of the Motor and of the
DCOS as described in the sub-section 7.6.2; pay
attention to tension of the Cover movement Belt.
Replace the Photometric and Temperatures Control
Board (Board #6).
Replace the Motors Board (Board #5).
Replace the Photometer Interface Board.
Warning:
Home Position
not found
Alarm: Motor
Phase and
Delay Error
Page 10 of 37
Chapter 6 – Troubleshooting
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
Alarm:
Autosampler
Motor Error
The Instrument
detects a problem
during the
Autosampler Motor
movement.
Alarm: Sample
line Dilutor
Motor Error
The Instrument
detects a problem
during the Sample
Dilutor Motor
movement.
Alarm:
Reagent line
Dilutor Motor
Error
The Instrument
detects a problem
during the Reagent
Dilutor Motor
movement.
Alarm: Sample
Arm
Horizontal
Motor Error
The Instrument
detects a problem
during the Sample
Arm Horizontal
Motor movement.
Alarm: Sample
Arm Vertical
Motor Error
The Instrument
detects a problem
during the Sample
Arm Vertical
Motor movement.
Alarm: Rotor
Holder Motor
Error
The Instrument
detects a problem
during the Rotor
Holder Motor
movement.
Check for mechanical obstruction during the
movement.
Check Motor Phase setting.
Check for the plug in of the connectors P74 (for the
motor) and P73 (for DCOS).
Check for the functionality of the Motor and of the
DCOS as described in the sub-section 7.6.5.
Replace the Motors Board (Board #5).
Replace the Modules Interconnection Board.
Check for the plug in of the connectors P83 (for the
motor) and P81 (for SCOS).
Check for the functionality of the Motor and of the
SCOS as described in the sub-section 7.6.6.
Replace the Motors Board (Board #5).
Replace the Modules Interconnection Board.
Check for the plug in of the connectors P84 (for the
motor) and P82 (for SCOS).
Check for the functionality of the Motor and of the
SCOS as described in the sub-section 7.6.6.
Replace the Motors Board (Board #5).
Replace the Modules Interconnection Board.
Check for mechanical obstruction during the
movement.
Check Motor Phase setting.
Check for the plug in of the connectors P93 (for the
motor) and P92 (for DCOS).
Check for the functionality of the Motor and of the
DCOS as described in the sub-section 7.6.3.
Replace the Motors Board (Board #5).
Replace the Modules Interconnection Board.
Check for mechanical obstruction during the
movement.
Check for the plug in of the connectors P94 (for the
motor) and P91 (for DCOS).
Check for the functionality of the Motor and of the
DCOS as described in the sub-section 7.6.4.
Replace the Motors Board (Board #5).
Replace the Modules Interconnection Board.
Check for mechanical obstruction during the
movement.
Check Motor Phase setting.
Check for the plug in of the connectors P147 (for the
motor) and P142 (for DCOS).
Check for the functionality of the Motor and of the
DCOS as described in the sub-section 7.6.1.
Replace the Photometric and Temperatures Control
Board (Board #6).
Replace the Motors Board (Board #5).
Replace the Photometer Interface Board.
Chapter 6 – Troubleshooting
Page 11 of 37
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
Alarm: Rotor
Cover Motor
Error
6.1.4
The Instrument
detects a problem
during the Rotor
Cover Motor
movement.
Check for mechanical obstruction during the
movement.
Check for the plug in of the connectors P144 (for the
motor) and P143 (for DCOS).
Check for the functionality of the Motor and of the
DCOS as described in the sub-section 7.6.2; pay
attention to tension of the Cover movement’ Belt.
Replace the Photometric and Temperatures Control
Board (Board #6).
Replace the Motors Board (Board #5).
Replace the Photometer Interface Board.
R.E.M. (Rotor Exchange Module) Errors
ERROR
MESSAGES
MEANING AND POSSIBLE CAUSES, PARTS TO BE
EFFECTS
CHECKED OR REPLACED
Warning:
Rotor Arm
Horizontal
Motor Error
The Instrument
detects a problem
during the Rotor
Arm Horizontal
Motor movement.
Warning:
Rotor Arm
Vertical Motor
Error
The Instrument
detects a problem
during the Rotor
Arm Vertical
Motor movement.
Warning:
Rotor
Transport
Motor Error
The Instrument
detects a problem
during the Rotor
Transport Motor
movement.
Warning:
Rotor Arm
Electromagnet
Error
The Instrument
detects a problem
in the ElectroMagnet located on
the Rotor Arm.
Page 12 of 37
Check for mechanical obstruction during the
movement.
Check Motor Phase setting.
Check for the plug in of the connectors P104 (for the
motor) and P107 (for DCOS).
Check for the functionality of the Motor and of the
DCOS as described in the sub-section 7.6.8.
Replace the R.E.M. Board (Board #4).
Replace the R.E.M. Lower Interconnection Board.
Check for mechanical obstruction during the
movement.
Check for the plug in of the connectors P105 (for the
motor) and P108 (for DCOS).
Check for the functionality of the Motor and of the
DCOS as described in the sub-section 7.6.9.
Replace the R.E.M. Board (Board #4).
Replace the R.E.M. Lower Interconnection Board.
Check for mechanical obstruction during the
movement.
Check for the plug in of the connectors P103 (for the
motor) and P106 (for DCOS).
Check for the functionality of the Motor and of the
DCOS as described in the sub-section 7.6.7.
Replace the R.E.M. Board (Board #4).
Replace the R.E.M. Lower Interconnection Board.
Check the Electro-Magnet on the Rotor Arm.
Replace the R.E.M. Board (Board #4).
Replace the R.E.M. Upper Interconnection Board.
Chapter 6 – Troubleshooting
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
Warning:
Rotor Arm
Electromagnet
Circuit Error
Warning:
Rotor Stack
Upper
Electromagnet
Error
Warning:
Rotor Stack
Upper
Electromagnet
Circuit Error
Warning:
Rotor Stack
Lower
Electromagnet
Error
Warning:
Rotor Stack
Lower
Electromagnet
Circuit Error
Warning:
REM CPU
Error
Warning:
REM
communication
Error
The Instrument
detects a problem
in the driver circuit
for the ElectroMagnet located on
the Rotor Arm.
The Instrument
detects a problem
in the Upper
Electro-Magnet of
the Rotor Stack.
The Instrument
detects a problem
in the driver circuit
for the Upper
Electro-Magnet of
the Rotor Stack.
The Instrument
detects a problem
in the Lower
Electro-Magnet of
the Rotor Stack.
The Instrument
detects a problem
in the driver circuit
for the Lower
Electro-Magnet of
the Rotor Stack.
The Instrument
detects a problem
in the CPU on the
R.E.M. Board.
The Instrument
detects a problem
during the
communications
from the CPU on
the R.E.M. Board
to the CPU on the
Slave Board.
Replace the R.E.M. Board (Board #4).
Replace the R.E.M. Upper Interconnection Board.
Check the Electro-Magnet on the Rotor Arm.
Check the Upper Electro-Magnet of the Rotor Stack.
Replace the R.E.M. Board (Board #4).
Replace the R.E.M. Upper Interconnection Board.
Replace the R.E.M. Board (Board #4).
Replace the R.E.M. Upper Interconnection Board.
Check the Upper Electro-Magnet of the Rotor Stack.
Check the Lower Electro-Magnet of the Rotor Stack.
Replace the R.E.M. Board (Board #4).
Replace the R.E.M. Upper Interconnection Board.
Replace the R.E.M. Board (Board #4).
Replace the R.E.M. Upper Interconnection Board.
Check the Lower Electro-Magnet of the Rotor Stack.
Following the procedure in the sub-section 7.16.2,
make the Upload and then the Upgrade of the REM
Software.
Replace the R.E.M. Board (Board #4).
Replace the Slave Board (Board #2).
Following the procedure in the sub-section 7.16.2,
make the Upload and then the Upgrade of the REM
Software.
Replace the R.E.M. Board (Board #4).
Replace the Slave Board (Board #2).
Chapter 6 – Troubleshooting
Page 13 of 37
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
Warning:
REM
execution
Error
The Instrument
detects a generic
problem during the
movements of the
REM’s assembles
and/or ElectroMagnet.
Alarm: REM
electric Error
The REM’s CPU
detects a Short
Circuit on one, or
more then one,
driver circuit on
Board.
So, for protection
purposes, the
REM’s CPU Turns
Off the +12VPW,
which power the
Board.
The REM’s CPU
detects a problem
on the +24VPW
generated on the
REM Board.
Alarm: REM
voltage out of
range
Page 14 of 37
It’s a generic message, typically it’s associated to
another error (see the Warning List and the File Error
History); after the resolution of other problems if this
error message doesn’t disappear then Log-Out, Turn
Off and On the Instrument.
Following the procedure in the sub-section 7.16.2,
make the Upload and then the Upgrade of the REM
Software.
Replace the R.E.M. Board (Board #4).
Replace the Slave Board (Board #2).
Replace the R.E.M. Upper or Lower Interconnection
Board.
Following the procedure in the sub-section 7.16.2,
make the Upload and then the Upgrade of the REM
Software.
Replace the R.E.M. Board (Board #4).
Check in the File Error History for the presence of
other alarm message associated.
Replace the R.E.M. Upper or Lower Interconnection
Board.
Check the presence of the +12VPWR on the TP2 of
the Switching Power Supply Board.
Replace the R.E.M. Board (Board #4).
Chapter 6 – Troubleshooting
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
6.1.5
Optic Errors
ERROR
MESSAGES
MEANING AND POSSIBLE CAUSES, PARTS TO BE
EFFECTS
CHECKED OR REPLACED
Warning:
Halogen Lamp
Error
Analysis aborted
for an unexpected
Halogen Lamp
Turn Off or a
lowering of the
+6VLAMP voltage
on the Switching
Power Supply.
The Instrument
detects a problem
on the Optical
Reference or the
Optical Channels
during the
Analysis.
Following are the
checks performed:
Warning: No
Wash-R
Emulsion /
Optical
Channel Error
1) During the rotor
verification:
- OFFSET
Coagulimetric Ch
<70mV. (without
rotor)
- OFFSET
Chromogenic Ch
<70 mV. (without
rotor)
2) During the
Acquisition:
- Coagulimetric
Channel’s values,
read on the Wash-R
Emulsion, within
range 1.5 – 4.0 V.
- Chromogenic
Channel’s values,
read on the distilled
water, within range
5.0 - 9.5 V.
- Chromogenic
Channel’s values,
read on the Wash-R
Emulsion <3.5V.
Check the Halogen Lamp.
Assess Service Program and check the +6VLAMP
voltage on the TP6 of the SPS; if required adjust this
voltage through RV2.
Replace the Acquisition & Sensors Board (Board #3).
Check the presence of Wash-R Emulsion or Distilled
Water in the Rotor’s cuvettes.
Cleans the Rotor Holder holes and all the optic parts
in the analysis compartment (for both Optic
Channels), using cotton tips with Distilled Water.
Check Out and Adjust the Optic Channels value:
Coagulimetric Channel
OFFSET: 0 – 15 mV.
GAIN: with Wash-R Emulsion in cuv. #20
2.6 V.
Chromogenic Channel
OFFSET: 0 – 15 mV.
GAIN: with no cuvette in rotor holder 8.7 V.
Check also that the Chromogenic Channel value
reading with the Wash-R Emulsion in the cuv. #6 is
<3.5 V. If failed, replace the Optical Filter at 405 nm,
located over the Chromogenic Sensor inside the
Rotor Cover.
Check the light sources efficiency.
Chapter 6 – Troubleshooting
Page 15 of 37
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
6.1.6
Acquisition Errors
ERROR
MESSAGES
MEANING AND POSSIBLE CAUSES, PARTS TO BE
EFFECTS
CHECKED OR REPLACED
Warning:
Rotor Holder
Motor blocked
during
acquisition
Analysis aborted
for an unexpected
failure of the Rotor
Holder Motor
during the
acquisition.
Warning:
Home Position
not found
during
acquisition
Analysis aborted
for an unexpected
failure during the
acquisition, of the
DCOS associated
to the Rotor
Holder.
Warning:
Unexpected
cuvette
interruption
Analysis aborted
for an unexpected
failure during the
acquisition, of the
DCOS associated
to the Rotor
Holder.
Warning:
Unexpected
ADC interrupt
Analysis aborted
for an unexpected
A/D Converter
Interrupt, during
the acquisition.
Acquisition signal
goes to zero during
analysis cycle
Warning: Null
optical
reference ADC
error in
acquisition
Warning: Data
transmission
error during
acquisition
Page 16 of 37
Analysis aborted
for an unexpected
error of the data
transmission,
during the
acquisition.
Check for the plug in of the connectors P147 (for the
motor) and P142 (for DCOS).
Check for the functionality of the Motor and of the
DCOS as described in the sub-section 7.6.1.
Replace the Photometric and Temperatures Control
Board (Board #6).
Replace the Motors Board (Board #5).
Replace the Photometer Interface Board.
Check for the plug in of the connectors P147 (for the
motor) and P142 (for DCOS).
Check Motor Phase setting.
Check for the functionality of the Motor and of the
DCOS as described in the sub-section 7.6.1.
Replace the Motors Board (Board #5).
Replace the Photometric and Temperatures Control
Board (Board #6).
Replace the Photometer Interface Board.
Replace the Slave Board (Board #2).
Replace the Acquisition & Sensors Board (Board #3).
Check for the plug in of the connectors P147 (for the
motor) and P142 (for DCOS).
Check for the functionality of the Motor and of the
DCOS as described in the sub-section 7.6.1.
Replace the Motors Board (Board #5).
Replace the Photometric and Temperatures Control
Board (Board #6).
Replace the Photometer Interface Board.
Replace the Slave Board (Board #2).
Replace the Acquisition & Sensors Board (Board #3).
Check Coag and Chrom Acquisition Voltage.
Replace the Acquisition & Sensors Board (Board #3).
Replace the Slave Board (Board #2).
Check Coag and Chrom Acquisition Voltage and
“Offset” Voltage.
Check “Curve Adjustment” setting.
Check LED, optical fibre, coaxial cable connection.
Replace Acquisition & Sensors Board (Board #3)
Replace the Acquisition & Sensors Board (Board #3).
Replace the Slave Board (Board #2).
Chapter 6 – Troubleshooting
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
Warning:
Rotor Holder
Motor error
during
acquisition
Warning:
Acquisition
stopped
Warning:
Rotor Cover
opened during
acquisition
6.1.7
Analysis aborted
for an unexpected
failure of the Rotor
Holder Motor
during the
acquisition.
Check Motor Phase setting.
Check for the plug in of the connectors P147 (for the
motor) and P142 (for DCOS).
Check for the functionality of the Motor and of the
DCOS as described in the sub-section 7.6.1.
Replace the Photometric and Temperatures Control
Board (Board #6).
Replace the Motors Board (Board #5).
Replace the Photometer Interface Board.
Analysis aborted
for an unexpected
opening of the
Rotor Cover during
the acquisition.
Check for the functionality of the Rotor Cover
Sensor as described in the sub-section 7.9.1; pay
attention to the correct positioning of the sensor.
Replace the Rotor Cover Sensor.
Replace the Acquisition & Sensors Board (Board #3).
Replace the Photometric Interface Board.
Liquid Sensors Error
ERROR
MESSAGES
MEANING AND POSSIBLE CAUSES, PARTS TO BE
EFFECTS
CHECKED OR REPLACED
Warning:
Sample Low
Level in
Position xxx
The Instrument
detects, during the
loading, a Low
Level on the
Sample located in
the position xxx.
Warning:
Liquid “Id”
Low Level in
Position xxx
for test yyy
The Instrument
detects, during the
loading, a Low
Level on the Liquid
“Id” located in the
position xxx and
used for the test
yyy.
Check the presence and the level of the Liquid in the
Position xxx.
Perform any Priming cycles and then check for air
bubbles along the fluidic path.
Following the procedure in the sub-section 7.4.2,
checks for the functionality of the Needles Sensor;
pay attention to the correct positioning of the Needles
Block.
Replace the Needles Block.
Replace the LLD Board.
Replace the LLD Cable.
Check the presence and the level of the Liquid “Id”
in the Position xxx.
Perform any Priming cycles and then check for air
bubbles along the fluidic path.
Following the procedure in the sub-section 7.4.2,
checks for the functionality of the Needles Sensor;
pays attention to the correct positioning of the
Needles Block.
Replace the Needles Block.
Replace the LLD Board.
Replace the LLD Cable.
Chapter 6 – Troubleshooting
Page 17 of 37
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
Warning:
Mandatory
Liquid “Id”
Low Level in
Position xxx
for test yyy
Warning:
Wash-R
Emulsion Low
Level
Warning:
Wash-R
Emulsion
absent
Warning:
Sample sensor
Error
Warning:
Reagent sensor
Error
Page 18 of 37
The Instrument
detects, during the
loading, a Low
Level on the
Mandatory Liquid
“Id” located in the
position xxx and
used for the test
yyy.
Check the presence and the level of the Mandatory
Liquid “Id” in the Position xxx.
Perform any Priming cycles and then check for air
bubbles along the fluidic path.
Following the procedure in the sub-section 7.4,
checks for the functionality of the Needles Sensor;
pays attention to the correct positioning of the
Needles Block.
Replace the Needles Block.
Replace the LLD Board.
Replace the LLD Cable.
The Instrument
Check the presence and the level of the Wash-R
detects a Low
Emulsion (at least over 100 mL).
Level on the Wash- Check also the horizontally of the Wash-R
Emulsion’s bottle and for the correct insertion of the
R Emulsion.
cap sensor.
Following the procedure in the sub-section 7.4.1,
checks for the functionality of the Wash-R Emulsion
Sensor.
The Instrument
Check the presence and the level of the Wash-R
detects, during a
Emulsion (at least over 100 mL).
not analytical cycle, Following the procedure in the sub-section 7.4.1,
checks for the functionality of the Wash-R Emulsion
that the Wash-R
Emulsion is absent. Sensor.
Replace the Reference Emulsion Sensor.
Replace the Needles & Wash-R Sensor
Interconnection Board.
Replace the Acquisition & Sensors Board (board #3).
Replace the Mother Board
The Instrument
Following the procedure in the sub-section 7.4.2,
detects a problem
checks for the functionality of the Needles Sensor.
Replace the Needles Block.
on the Sample
Replace the LLD Board.
line’s Liquid
Replace the LLD Cable.
Sensor.
Replace the Needles & Wash-R Sensor
Interconnection Board.
Replace the Acquisition & Sensors Board (board #3).
Replace the Mother Board
The Instrument
Following the procedure in the sub-section 7.4.2,
detects a problem
checks for the functionality of the Needles Sensor.
Replace the Needles Block.
on the Reagent
Replace the LLD Board.
line’s Liquid
Replace the LLD Cable.
Sensor.
Replace the Needles & Wash-R Sensor
Interconnection Board.
Replace the Acquisition & Sensors Board (board #3).
Replace the Mother Board
Chapter 6 – Troubleshooting
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
Warning:
Wash-R sensor
Off
Warning:
Sample sensor
Off
Warning:
Reagent sensor
Off
Alarm: WashR Emulsion
absent
6.1.8
The Wash-R
Emulsion Sensor is
disabled in the
System
Configuration
menu’.
The Sample line’s
Sensor is disabled
in the System
Configuration
menu’.
The Reagent line’s
Sensor is disabled
in the System
Configuration
menu’.
The Instrument
detects, during an
analysis, that the
Wash-R Emulsion
is absent.
The analysis aborts.
Solves the problem associated to the Wash-R Sensor,
then enable the sensor in the System Configuration
menu to restore the normal condition.
Solves the problem associated to the Sample Sensor,
then enable the sensor in the System Configuration
menu to restore the normal condition.
Solves the problem associated to the Reagent Sensor,
then enable the sensor in the System Configuration
menu to restore the normal condition.
Check the presence and the level of the Wash-R
Emulsion (at least over 100 mL).
Following the procedure in the sub-section 7.4.1,
checks for the functionality of the Wash-R Emulsion
Sensor.
Replace the Reference Emulsion Sensor.
Replace the Needles & Wash-R Sensor
Interconnection Board.
Replace the Acquisition & Sensors Board (board #3).
Replace the Mother Board
Operative Errors
ERROR
MESSAGES
MEANING AND POSSIBLE CAUSES, PARTS TO BE
EFFECTS
CHECKED OR REPLACED
Warning:
Rotor Waste
Door open
and/or Rotor
Waste
Container
absent
Warning:
Rotor Waste
Full
The Instrument
detects, before the
Rotor unloading,
that the Rotor
Waste door is open
and/or the Rotor
Waste is missing.
The Instrument
detects, before the
Rotor unloading,
that the Rotor
Waste is full.
Check in the Optic Sensor test the functionality and
the mechanical assemble of the Rotor Waste Presence
Switch.
Replace the REM Lower Interconnection.
Replace the REM Board (Board #4).
Following the procedure in the sub-section 7.5.2,
checks for the functionality of the Waste Full Sensor.
Replace the REM Lower Interconnection.
Replace the REM Board (Board #4).
Chapter 6 – Troubleshooting
Page 19 of 37
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
Warning:
Printer failure
The Instrument
detects, before the
document printing,
that the External
Printer fails or is
not ready to print.
Warning:
Cleaning not
performed
The Instrument
detects, during the
cleaning cycle, that
the cleaning’s
liquid is missing in
the positions R6
and/or R7.
Warning:
Forced open
Rotor Cover
The Instrument
detects, during
loading or
incubation, that the
Rotor Cover is
open.
The Instrument
detects that the
Rotor Stack Cover
is open.
Warning:
Rotor Stack
Cover open
Warning:
Floppy Not
Present
The Instrument
detects that the
Floppy Disk is
missing.
Warning:
Floppy disk
write protected
The Instrument
detects, during a
writing operation,
that the Floppy
Disk is write
protected.
The Instrument
detects, during a
writing operation,
that the Floppy
Disk is full.
Warning:
Floppy disk
full
Page 20 of 37
Check that the External Printer is connected and OnLine.
Check in the Interface Setup that the transmission
protocol selected is consistent (ex. ESC/P2).
Following the procedure in the section 7.13.5, checks
for the functionality of the External Printer.
Replace the Interface Board.
Replace the CPU Master Board.
Check for the presence of the liquids required in the
positions R6 and R7.
Following the procedure in the sub-section
7.4,checks for the functionality of the Needles
Sensor.
Replace the Needles Block.
Replace the LLD Board.
Replace the LLD Cable.
Replace the Needles & Wash-R Sensor
Interconnection Board.
Replace the Acquisition & Sensors Board (board #3).
Replace the Mother Board.
Check for the functionality of the Rotor Cover
Sensor as described in the sub-section 7.9.1; pay
attention to the correct positioning of the sensor.
Replace the Rotor Cover Sensor.
Replace the Acquisition & Sensors Board (Board #3).
Replace the Photometric Interface Board.
Check for the functionality of the Rotor Stack Cover
Sensor in the Optic Sensor test.
Check for the presence of the Magnet.
Replace the Rotor Stack Cover Sensor.
Replace the REM Upper Interface Board.
Replace the REM Board (Board #4).
Check for the presence of the Floppy Disk in the
Floppy Disk Drive.
Replace the Floppy Disk Drive.
Replace the Cable of the Floppy Disk Drive.
Replace the CPU Master Board.
Check that the Floppy Disk in the Floppy Disk Drive
is not write protect.
Replace the Floppy Disk.
Replace the Floppy Disk Drive.
Replace the Cable of the Floppy Disk Drive.
Replace the CPU Master Board.
Check that the Floppy Disk in the Floppy Disk Drive
is not full.
Replace the Floppy Disk.
Replace the Floppy Disk Drive.
Replace the Cable of the Floppy Disk Drive.
Replace the CPU Master Board.
Chapter 6 – Troubleshooting
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
Warning:
Timeout
expired during
loading
6.1.9
During the loading
of the analytical
cycle the timeout is
expired.
Following the procedure in the sub-section 7.16.2,
make the Upload and then the Upgrade of the Master
and of the Slave Software.
Replace the Slave Board (Board #2).
Database Errors
ERROR
MESSAGES
MEANING AND POSSIBLE CAUSES, PARTS TO BE
EFFECTS
CHECKED OR REPLACED
Warning:
Database full
The Instrument
detects that the
Database is full.
Restore normal conditions performing a Backup
(Recommended) and a Delete of the Patient data.
Warning:
Error restoring
Database
Warning:
Error backing
up Database
Alarm: Error
opening
Database
Alarm:
Check
Database error
Alarm:
Database Error
6.1.10 Samples Identification Errors
ERROR
MESSAGES
Warning: No
Test to Perform
MEANING AND POSSIBLE CAUSES, PARTS TO BE
EFFECTS
CHECKED OR REPLACED
Warning:
Error in
Samples
Identification
There is not
consistency between
Samples ID and
programmed
Loadlists.
The Barcode Reader
can’t recognize one
or more Sample ID
Labels.
Warning:
Internal Bar
Code Reader
Error
The Instrument
detects the Internal
Bar Code Reader
fail.
Check for the consistency between Samples ID on the
Sample Tray and the programmed Loadlists.
Check for the presence of a good label on the Samples
and the correct position.
Check that the Labels are as specification required (see
Appendix B).
Check for the correct assemble and alignment of the
Internal Barcode Reader.
Check for the cleaning and the transparency of the
plastic slide in front to the BCR.
Replace the Internal Barcode Reader.
Replace the Slave Board (Board #2).
Replace the Module Interconnection Board.
Chapter 6 – Troubleshooting
Page 21 of 37
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
6.1.11 DMS Errors
ERROR
MESSAGES
MEANING AND POSSIBLE CAUSES, PARTS TO BE
EFFECTS
CHECKED OR REPLACED
Warning: Host
Com.: ASTM
Error
Informative
Message.
Warning: Host
Com.: Bad
Test Code
Informative
Message.
Warning: Host
Com.: Too
Many Test
Informative
Message.
Warning: Host
Com.:
Unknown Test
Code
Warning: Host
Com.: Host
Not
Responding
Warning: Host
Com.: Host
Required Stop
Informative
Message.
Warning: Host
Com.: Format
Error
Informative
Message.
Warning: Host
Com.: Test
Order without
Sample ID
Warning: Host
Com.: Sample
ID without
Test Order
Warning: Host
Com.: Invalid
Sample ID
Informative
Message.
Warning: Host
Com.: Used
Sample ID
Informative
Message.
Page 22 of 37
Informative
Message.
Informative
Message.
Informative
Message.
Informative
Message.
Verify the functionality of the Host communication
serial line as described in the section 7.13. If the HW
passes the test then consult the Appendix A “Host
Communication Protocol”.
Verify the functionality of the Host communication
serial line as described in the section 7.13. If the HW
passes the test then consult the Appendix A “Host
Communication Protocol”.
Verify the functionality of the Host communication
serial line as described in the section 7.13. If the HW
passes the test then consult the Appendix A “Host
Communication Protocol”.
Verify the functionality of the Host communication
serial line as described in the section 7.13. If the HW
passes the test then consult the Appendix A “Host
Communication Protocol”.
Verify the functionality of the Host communication
serial line as described in the section 7.13. If the HW
passes the test then consult the Appendix A “Host
Communication Protocol”.
Verify the functionality of the Host communication
serial line as described in the section 7.13. If the HW
passes the test then consult the Appendix A “Host
Communication Protocol”.
Verify the functionality of the Host communication
serial line as described in the section 7.13. If the HW
passes the test then consult the Appendix A “Host
Communication Protocol”.
Verify the functionality of the Host communication
serial line as described in the section 7.13. If the HW
passes the test then consult the Appendix A “Host
Communication Protocol”.
Verify the functionality of the Host communication
serial line as described in the section 7.13. If the HW
passes the test then consult the Appendix A “Host
Communication Protocol”.
Verify the functionality of the Host communication
serial line as described in the section 7.13. If the HW
passes the test then consult the Appendix A “Host
Communication Protocol”.
Verify the functionality of the Host communication
serial line as described in the section 7.13. If the HW
passes the test then consult the Appendix A “Host
Communication Protocol”.
Chapter 6 – Troubleshooting
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
Warning: Host
Com.:
Database Full
Informative
Message.
Warning: Host
Com.: Sent
Different
Sample ID
Warning: Host
Com.: Invalid
Instrument ID
Informative
Message.
Informative
Message.
Verify the functionality of the Host communication
serial line as described in the section 7.13. If the HW
passes the test then consult the Appendix A “Host
Communication Protocol”.
Verify the functionality of the Host communication
serial line as described in the section 7.13. If the HW
passes the test then consult the Appendix A “Host
Communication Protocol”.
Verify the functionality of the Host communication
serial line as described in the section 7.13. If the HW
passes the test then consult the Appendix A “Host
Communication Protocol”.
6.1.12 Analytical Errors
ERROR
MESSAGES
MEANING AND POSSIBLE CAUSES, PARTS TO BE
EFFECTS
CHECKED OR REPLACED
This sub-section is not available in this Service Manual release 2. For reference on the
analytical errors consult the proper section of the Operator’s Manual.
Chapter 6 – Troubleshooting
Page 23 of 37
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
6.2 Service Tools
In this section are described the Service Tools that have been designed to aid in servicing
of the ACL Elite/ElitePro.
All tools listed below are applicable to the ACL 8/9/10K and Elite/ElitePro. A kit
containing most of the service tools is available under P/N 190653-00, and except for the
Coagulimetric Optic Test kit p/n 00097580-50 and the Chromogenic Optic Test kit p/n
00097579-50. Tools not included in the kit must be ordered separately.
Following is the table with the main information about the Service Tools.
Name
Temperature Probe
Coagulimetric Optic
Test Kit
Chromogenic Optic Test
Kit
Graduated Capillary
Kit
RS 232 C Interface
Check Connector
RS 232 C Interface
Check Connector
Adapter
Needles Position Tool
Sample Arm Centering
Tool
Rotor Arm Centering
Tool
Needles Waste
Centering Tool
Peltier Centering Tool
Touch Screen
Calibration Tool
Rotor Cover Motor
Centering Tool
Rotor Cover Encoder
Centering Tool
Rotor Stack Centering
Tool
Rotor Snap Alignment
tool
Rotor Temperature
Simulation tool
Part
Number
70954-00
97580-50
Used for
Rotor Holder temperature test
Coagulimetric Channel
performance checks
Chromogenic Channel
performance checks
Sample / Reagent Dilutor line
dispensation test
Serial lines test (Require the
Adapter below to work)
Serial lines test
YES
YES
YES
NO
190503-00
Needles Position test
Sample Arm Movement Assy
positioning
Rotor Arm positioning
190515-00
Sample Arm positioning
NO
190507-00
190574-00
Peltier positioning
Touch Screen Calibration test
NO
NO
190510-00
Rotor Cover Movement Assy
positioning
Rotor Cover Movement Assy
Encoder positioning
Rotor Stack positioning
NO
97579-50
82589-00
99211-01
71467-70
181039-41
190513-00
190575-00
190833-38
190800-00
190675-48
Alignment of rotor snap
mounting pins
Simulates resistance value of
rotor holder thermistor
Following is a detailed description of each Service Tool above listed.
Page 24 of 37
Already used in
ACL family
Chapter 6 – Troubleshooting
YES
YES
YES
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
•
Temperature Probe (P/N 70954-00)
Purpose:
This Tool allows the checking of the actual temperature within the rotor analysis area.
Description:
It consists of a precise thermistor fit into a cuvette of an analysis rotor.
The leads of the thermistor are brought to the upper tool surface in order to allow the
measuring of the thermistor resistance (with a DVM) through the two dispensing holes
on the Rotor Cover. The read resistance value allows through a mathematical calculation
written on the label stuck on the tool upper surface, to know the temperature in °C
present inside the analysis rotor. The value must be between 36 –38 °C.
The procedure to use this tool is very easy but it’s important to pay attention to follow all
°C=
Xxxx - Read value
Xxx
Rv 37 °C=xxxxx
the steps.
1
2
3
4
TEMPERATURE PROBE
P/N 70954-00
Turn On the Instrument and wait at least 20 minutes.
Check in the Temperature Control menu that the Rotor Holder Temperature is
within range 38 – 39 °C.
Place the Temperature Probe on the Rotor Holder as a normal analysis rotor.
Wait at least 15 minutes then using your DVM read the resistance of the
thermistor on the upper surface of the tool and calculate the corresponding
temperature.
Chapter 6 – Troubleshooting
Page 25 of 37
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
Coagulimetric Optic Test Kit (P/N 97580-50)
Purpose:
This kit allows the checking of the performance of the Coagulimetric Channel (see subsection 7.2.2).
Description:
The kit contains four different concentration levels of Wash-Reference Emulsion for a
total of 50 ampoules distributed as follows:
13
19
12
6
•
ampoules of
ampoules of
ampoules of
ampoules of
2
1
0.5
0.25
Chromogenic Optic Test Kit (P/N 97579-50)
Purpose:
This kit allows the checking of the performance of the Chromogenic Channel (see subsection 7.3.2).
Description:
The kit contains four different concentration levels of a yellow solution
(ParaNitroAniline, PNA) for a total of 50 ampoules distributed as follows:
13
19
12
6
•
ampoules of
ampoules of
ampoules of
ampoules of
160
80
40
20
Graduated Capillary Kit (P/N 82589-00)
Purpose:
This tool allows the checking of the Sample and Reagent Dilutor lines aspiration and
dispensing (see sub-section 7.8.2).
Description:
The kit contains 3 capillaries.
Page 26 of 37
Chapter 6 – Troubleshooting
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
Upper Reference lines
Lower Reference lines
GRADUATED CAPILLARY
•
RS 232 C Interface Check Connector (P/N 99211-01) and
RS 232 C Interface Check Connector (P/N 199992-01)
Purpose:
These tools can be plugged together on serial line ports (Modem, Mouse and Host
communication ports) present on the rear Instrument Interface Board to allow ports to be
tested through the relevant Service program (see section 7.13).
Description:
Following is the RS 232 C Interface Check Connector drawing in order to make it if it’s
not available.
Chapter 6 – Troubleshooting
Page 27 of 37
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
13 12 11
10
9
8
7
5
6
4
3
2
25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15
1
14
RS 232 C INTERFACE CHECK CONNECTOR
P/N 99211-01
The RS 232 C Interface Check Connector Adapter is a standard PC adapter 25/9 Pin
Female/Female.
Following is the drawing of a serial customized 9 Pin Check Connector Male (for the Bar
Code Port) or Female (for Host, Mouse and Modem Port) in order to make it if the RS
232 C Interface Check Connector and its Adapter are not available.
RX
TX
5
9
4
3
8
2
7
DTR
1
6
D SR
C T S RT S
Page 28 of 37
Chapter 6 – Troubleshooting
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
•
Needles Position Tool (P/N 181039-41)
Purpose:
This tool has to be used to carry out the alignment of the Needles Block in respect to the
analysis rotor position (see sub-section 7.7.4).
Description:
The tool is a plastic block that has to be properly snapped on the Rotor Holder with the
“A” face up. The side “A” of the tool has two Reference Points in order to allow the
proper alignment of the Needles Block tips.
Reference Dots
A
4.3 mm
NEEDLES POSITION TOOL
P/N 181039-41
Chapter 6 – Troubleshooting
Page 29 of 37
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
•
Sample Arm Centering Tool (P/N 190513-00)
Purpose:
This tool has to be used to center the Sample Arm Movement Assy in respect to the
Fluidic Plate (see sub-section 7.7.1).
Description:
The tool has a simple cylindrical shape that fits between the Sample Arm Movement
Assy shaft and its Fluidic Plate hole.
13,6 mm
19,6 mm
66 mm
SAMPLE ARM CENTRING TOOL
P/N 190513-00
Page 30 of 37
Chapter 6 – Troubleshooting
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
•
Rotor Arm Centring Tool (P/N 190503-00)
Purpose:
This tool has to be used to center the Rotor Arm in respect to the Rotor Transport (see
sub-section 7.7.6).
Description:
The tool has a simple cylindrical shape that fits between the Rotor Arm central finger and
the Rotor Transport central hole.
9 mm
12 mm
ROTOR ARM CENTRING TOOL
P/N 190503-00
Chapter 6 – Troubleshooting
Page 31 of 37
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
•
Needles Waste Centering Tool (P/N 190515-00)
Purpose:
This tool has to be used to center the Needles Block (and the Sample Arm) in respect to
the Needles Waste/Rinse position on the Fluidic Plate (see sub-section 7.7.1).
Description:
The tool has a shape very similar at the normal Waste Adapter with the addition of 2
tubes that fits in the 2 holes for the Needles.
9 mm
12 mm
NEEDLES WASTE CENTRING TOOL
P/N 190515-00
•
Peltier Centering Tool (P/N 190507-00)
Purpose:
This tool has to be used to center the Peltier Assy in respect to its holes in the Fluidic
Plate (see sub-section 4.1.2).
Description:
The tools have a simple cylindrical shape that fits into the reagents adaptor holes of the
Peltier.
Page 32 of 37
Chapter 6 – Troubleshooting
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
28,3 mm
29,8 mm
32 mm
PELTIER CENTRING TOOL
P/N 190507-00
•
Touch Screen Calibration Tool (P/N 190574-00)
Purpose:
This tool has to be used during the Touch Screen Calibration test (see section 7.12).
Description:
The tools have a simple pencil shape with a rounded tip.
TOUCH SCREEN CALIBRATION TOOL
P/N 190574-00
Chapter 6 – Troubleshooting
Page 33 of 37
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
•
Rotor Cover Motor Centering Tool (P/N 190510-00)
Purpose:
This tool has to be used when is needed to put in tension the Belt of the Rotor Cover
Movement Assy before the final fixing with the 3 screws (see sub-section 7.6.2).
Description:
The tool has a simple flat shape that fits into the niche between the Rotor Cover
Movement Assy and the support. This tool assures the horizontal alignment of the Rotor
Cover Movement Assy.
ROTOR COVER MOTOR CENTRING TOOL
P/N 190510-00
•
Rotor Cover Encoder Centering Tool (P/N 190575-00)
Purpose:
This tool has to be used to center the Encoder Disk position when the Rotor Cover
Movement Assy is replaced (see sub-section 7.6.2).
Description:
The tool has a simple pencil shape with a thread (M3) at the tip that fits into the setscrew
hole.
Page 34 of 37
Chapter 6 – Troubleshooting
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
M3
ROTOR COVER ENCODER CENTRING TOOL
P/N 190575-00
•
Rotor Stack Centering Tool (190833-38 or 190501-00)
Purpose:
Rotor Stack Centering Tool is used to align the Rotor Silo to the Transport Plate (Slider).
Description:
Tool has a handle to allow user to place tool into rotor stack. Tool also has notches to
allow tool to pass by calliper arms in rotor stack. The tool has access holes to access
screws on transport (slider) plate.
Rotor Stack Centering Tool P/N 190833-38
•
Sample Tray Alignment Tools (P/N 190520-00)
Purpose:
Tools are placed into sample and reagent positions on the tray and tray alignment to the
sample arm is verified.
Description:
Tools are sized to fit into sample or reagent positions on the tray. Each tool has an
alignment hole to check position with needle block in arm.
Chapter 6 – Troubleshooting
Page 35 of 37
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
Sample Tray Alignment Tools P/N 190520-00
•
Rotor Snap Alignment Tool (P/N 190800-00)
Purpose:
After rotor snap is removed from the rotor holder the Rotor Snap Alignment Tool is used
to insure the 2 pins on the rotor holder are straight vertically. Tool is placed over the pins
on the rotor holder to straighten the pins.
Description:
Rotor Snap Alignment Tool is cylinder shaped with two (2) small holes in the bottom of
the lower end. Align small holes with pins on rotor holder where snap mounts and gently
press down on tool to straighten pins.
•
Rotor Holder Temperature Simulation Tool (p/n190675-48)
Purpose:
Simulates rotor holder thermistor resistance if at approximately 37.5C . A defective
heater coil will cause power supply to shut down due to no load or overcurrent condition.
Using this tool the ACL unit can be powered on to allow further troubleshooting.
Description:
If power supply is in shutdown condition, unplug the rotor holder heater cable and install
the rotor holder temperature simulator tool by plugging it into the heater cable connector.
This will simulate a rotor temperature of approximately 37.5 C possibly allowing the
power supply to power up normally and allow the service personel to further troubleshoot
the unit.
Page 36 of 37
Chapter 6 – Troubleshooting
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
6.3 Standard Tools
This section provides suggestions about the standard tools equipment of the Service
Engineer required to perform a replacement or an adjustment on the ACL Elite/ElitePro.
Following is the list of the standard tools.
•
Set of metric hexagonal Allen Screw Driver
In particular:
1.5
mm
2
mm
2.5
mm *
3
mm *
5
mm
•
Set of metric Socket Wrench Driver
In particular:
5
mm
5.5
mm
6
mm
7
mm
Flat Srew Driver
Phillips Screw Driver
•
•
*
Note: A special flexible version of these two screwdrivers are both available in
the kit “2.5/3 mm Flex Allen Screw Driver” P/N 99208-10
Chapter 6 – Troubleshooting
Page 37 of 37
Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
Chapter 7
Checkout & Adjustment
This chapter is designed to allow the Service Engineer to perform a thorough check
out of the whole Instrument.
The Service software incorporates proper utilities for the entire checkout and
adjustment needed.
Following are the specific sections with the check out procedures.
Warning: Do not access sample or reagent area while probe arm is operating.
Note: For Software version 3.0 to access the Service Menu log on with Username:
Service and Password: System Fix
User names and passwords are case sensitive.
7.1
7.2
7.3
7.4
7.5
7.6
7.7
7.8
7.9
7.10
7.11
7.12
7.13
7.14
7.15
7.16
Quick Reference Guide to Electronic Adjustment
Coagulimetric Channel
Chromogenic Channel
Liquid Sensor
Optic Sensor
Motors Adjust
Modules Positioning
Dilutors Module
Magnetic Sensor
Rotor Waste Presence Switch
Switching Power Supply check out & Adjustment
Touch Screen Calibration
Interface Test
Temperature Control
Floppy Disk Drive Test
Software checking & loading
Chapter 7 – Checkout & Adjustment
Page 1 of 98
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
7.1 Quick Reference Guide for Electronic Adjustment
This section is designed to help the service engineer to remember the set value and the
conditions to perform the main electronic adjustment.
•
Acquisition & Sensor Board (Board #3)
Coag. Ch.
Chrom. Ch.
Trimmer Function
RV1
Off-Set Coag. Ch.
RV2
Gain Coag: Ch.
RV3
RV4
RV5
RV6
RV7
Gain Chrom. Ch.
Off-Set Chrom. Ch.
Rotor Cover Sensor
Autosamp. Middle Ring
Optic Sensor
Autosamp. Inner Ring
Optic Sensor
RV9
Wash-R Level Sens.
RV10
Autosamp. Outer Ring
Optic Sensor
Reagent Level Sens.
Sample Level Sens.
RV11
RV12
Page 2 of 98
Condition
Reading Point
LCD
LCD
Set Value (V)
0-15 mv
2.6 +/- 0.300V
LCD
LCD
LCD
LCD
8.7 +/- 0.050V
0-15 mv
>2.7 V
>2.8 V
4ml Bottle
without label,
filled w/ water
Flush volume
500ml
2ml Cup
LCD
>3.2 V
LCD
Flush volume 500ml
LCD
>3.5 V
1500ul ref sol.
150ul ref sol.
LCD
LCD
>4.0 V
>3.9 V
Light blocked
200ul ref sol
position 20
No Rotor
Light blocked
Cover closed
2ml Cup
Chapter 7 – Checkout & Adjustment
Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
•
Rotor Exchange Module Board (Board #4)
Trimmer
PT1
PT2
PT3
Function
Rotor Stack Optic
Sensor
Rotor Transport Optic
Sensor
Rotor Waste Optic
Sensor
Condition
Reading Point
TP 0 & TP 1
Set Value (V)
>8.0 V
Rotor in
position
TP 0 & TP 2
>8.0 V
Ten rotors in
waste bin
TP 0 & TP 3
4.00 V
Rotor in
position
7.2 Coagulimetric channel
Several tests are available to troubleshoot or verify the Coagulimetric Channel.
These tests allow verification of electronic circuits (PCB) and optical components
(light source and optic fiber). The tests used to verify the Coagulimetric Optical
Channel are:
Test Name
Coagulimetric Channel
check out and adjustment
Performance check out
Light source (LED)
verification
Optic fiber check out and
adjustment procedure
7.2.1
Purpose
Sets the reading value and the peak of
the bell shaped signal of data
acquisition.
Verifies that precision and linearity are
within specs.
Performs match of electronic signals to
actual performance of the light source.
Optimizes optic performance.
See section
7.2.1
7.2.2
7.2.3
7.2.4
Coagulimetric Channel check out and adjustment
Materials / tools necessary for the test:
- Brand new rotors.
- Wash-Reference Emulsion.
- 200µl micropipette.
Chapter 7 – Checkout & Adjustment
Page 3 of 98
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
Precaution
Make sure that the instrument has been switched ON for at least 20 minutes (warm-up
of light source and thermoregulation) prior to performing the following procedure.
1
2
3
Enter the service program menu.
Thoroughly clean the twenty optical path (holes) of the Rotor Holder with
distilled water and a cotton swab. Clean also the optical sensor window and the
optic fiber of the Coagulimetric Channel. Do not use metal forceps with gauze as
this may scratch the rotor holder generating possible stray light affecting the
proper system performance.
On the windows like menu enter Service then A/D Converter Test. The instrument
displays the screen below.
4
Using the Icon on the screen turn off the LED. Lower the analysis compartment
cover then locate the trimmer RV1 (on Board # 3) see figure below.
5
Adjust RV1 to read between 0 and 15 mV on screen. Then touch “√” to exit.
Note: Turn RV1 CCW to increase offset mV or CW to decrease offset mV.
Page 4 of 98
Chapter 7 – Checkout & Adjustment
Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
On the windows like menu enter Service then Optical Module Test and Curve
Adjustment. The instrument shows the screen below:
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Load 200µl of Wash-Reference Emulsion in cuvette number 20 of a new rotor.
Place the prepared rotor on the Rotor Holder.
Select Coagulimetric Channel, set rotational speed to 1200 rpm and touch Start.
The instrument performs an acquisition cycle. Upon completion of the acquisition
cycle, scroll the table of values and delays until you find the delay corresponding
to the value of 1000.
Update, if necessary the current delay, keying in the new value on the window
“Select Delay”.
Change the rotational speed from 1200 to 600 rpm, and touch Start. The
instrument performs an acquisition cycle. Upon completion of the acquisition
cycle scroll the table of values and delays until you find the delay corresponding
to the value of 1000.
Update the delay by keying it on the window “Select Delay” only if necessary.
Touch “√” to exit, so the new settings will be saved.
On the windows like menu enter Service then Optical Module and Acquisition
Adjustment.
Leave the rotor previously loaded in place and touch Start (if the rotor loaded was
in place for more than 3 minutes load a new one).
Adjust RV2 (on board # 3, see figure on previous page) to read 2.6 Vdc on the
Coagulimetric Channel line (accept any value from 2.3 to 2.9Vdc). Once adjusted
touch Stop, then “√” to exit.
On the windows like menu enter Service then Optical Module and Fiber
Adjustment. Wait for the motor initialization, then remove the rotor from the
analysis compartment. Touch Start and verify that (without a rotor in place) no
“cuvette” reads higher than 70 mV. Should this test fail, perform the fiber
adjustment as described in sub-section 7.2.4. If the test passes then touch Stop and
insert a new rotor into the analysis compartment. Touch Start and verify that
cuvette readings are above 130 mV and do not exceed 1500 mV. Touch “Set to
Envelope Mode” and verify that all the min/max values are < 50mV. Touch Stop
and then “X” to exit.
Chapter 7 – Checkout & Adjustment
Page 5 of 98
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
7.2.2
Performance checkout
These two tests are designed to verify the overall performance of the Coagulimetric
Channel:
•
•
Coagulimetric Precision Test
Coagulimetric Linearity Test
The Coagulimetric Optic Test Kit (P/N 97580-50) is necessary to perform both tests.
The kit consists of 50 vials (2 mL each):
13 vials
19 vials
12 vials
6 vials
2
1
0.5
0.25
Warning: If one of the tests fail then it is necessary to perform all the other check out
tests of this section 7.2.
•
Coagulimetric Precision Test
Materials / tools necessary for the test:
- Brand new rotors.
- Coagulimetric Optic Test Kit
- P/N 97580-50
- Clean, empty 4 mL reagent vial or
other
suitable container
1
2
On the windows like menu enter Service then Optical Module Test and Channel
Optic Test.
The instrument shows the screen below. Select in sequence Channel type:
Coagulimetric; Test Type: Precision Loading Type: Reagent.
Page 6 of 98
Chapter 7 – Checkout & Adjustment
Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
3
Put the content of two vials (4ml) labelled 1 (taken from the kit P/N 97580-50)
into a clean, empty 4 mL reagent vial with a Green adapter.
Note: For this test it is possible to use the Wash-Reference Emulsion in substitution of
the Silicon Emulsion labelled 1.
4
5
6
7
Position the 4 mL reagent vial with the adapter onto the reagent position R1.
Load 200µl of Wash-Reference Emulsion in cuvette number 20 of a new rotor
before placing the rotor onto the Rotor Holder in the analysis compartment.
Touch “Start in Manual Rotor Loading”. The instrument will load the rotor
cuvettes picking the Silicon Emulsion from the reagent vial using the reagent
probe.
Wait for the acquisition cycle then verify the following parameters :
CV% (cuvette # 1 to # 18)
CV% (Reference)
Mean Reference
:<=5
:<=3
: 2.2 V to 3.0 V
Note: Acquisition cycle only can be repeated selecting Skip Loading from the
“Loading Type” window.
8
Touch “√” twice to exit.
•
Coagulimetric Linearity Test
Materials / tools necessary for the test:
- Brand new rotors.
- Coagulimetric Optic Test Kit
P/N 97580-50.
- Clean, empty reagent vial or other
suitable container.
1
On the windows like menu enter Service then Optical Module Test and Channel
Optic Test.
2
The instrument shows the screen below. Select in sequence Channel type:
Coagulimetric; Test Type: Linearity Loading Type: Reagent.
Chapter 7 – Checkout & Adjustment
Page 7 of 98
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
3
4
Put the content of two vials (4ml), of each level (1, 0.5 and 0.25 from the kit P/N
97580-50) into three clean, empty 4 mL reagent vials with their Green adapters.
Position the 4 mL reagent vials with the adapters on the reagent tray as follows:
Rgt position
R1
R2
R3
5
6
7
Level
1
0.5
0.25
Volume
4 ml
4 ml
4 ml
Load 200µl of Wash-Reference Emulsion in cuvette number 20 of a new rotor
before placing the rotor onto the Rotor Holder in the analysis compartment.
Touch “Start in Manual Rotor Loading”. The instrument will load the rotor
cuvettes aspirating silicon emulsions from the reagent vials using the reagent
probe.
Wait for the acquisition cycle then verify the following parameters:
CV% (cuvette # 1 to # 6)
CV% (cuvette # 7 to # 12)
CV% (cuvette # 13 to # 18)
CV% (Reference)
Mean Reference
R2
:<=4
:<=5
:<=5
: < = 2.5
: 2.0 V to 3.0 V
: >= 0.997
Note: Acquisition cycle only can be repeated selecting “Skip Loading” from the
“Loading Type” window.
8
Touch “√” twice to exit.
7.2.3
Light source (LED) verification
These two tests are designed to verify the overall performance of the Coagulimetric
Channel LED with fiber:
Page 8 of 98
Chapter 7 – Checkout & Adjustment
Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
•
•
Coagulimetric Channel LED efficiency Test
Coagulimetric Channel LED with Fiber replacement
•
Coagulimetric Channel LED efficiency Test
Materials / tools necessary for the test:
- Brand new rotors
- Wash-Reference Emulsion
- 200 µl micropipette
1
On the windows like menu enter Service then Optical Module and Acquisition
Adjustment. The instrument shows the screen below.
2
3
4
Load 200µl of Wash-Reference Emulsion in cuvette number 20 of a new rotor.
Place the loaded rotor onto the Rotor Holder in the analysis compartment.
Locate the trimmer RV2 (on Board # 3) see figure below.
5
Touch Start and then turn RV2 fully clockwise until to read as low as possible on
the Coagulimetric Channel line.
Check that in the above conditions the value displayed on the screen is higher than
250 mV. If test fails replace the “Coagulimetric Channel LED with fiber” assy
6
Chapter 7 – Checkout & Adjustment
Page 9 of 98
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
7
(see next sub-section). If test passes then adjust RV2 to read 2.6 V ± 0.3V on the
screen.
Touch Stop and “√” to exit.
•
Coagulimetric Channel LED with Fibre replacement
Materials / tools necessary for the test:
- Brand new rotors
- Wash-Reference Emulsion
- 200 µl micropipette
If the LED is replaced follow the procedure here below to adjust the amplifier circuit
and the optic fibre.
1
On the windows like menu enter Service then Optical Module and Acquisition
Adjustment. The instrument shows the screen below.
2
Load 200 µl of Wash-Reference Emulsion inside cuvette number 20 of a new
rotor.
Place the loaded rotor onto the Rotor Holder in the analysis compartment, and
then touch Start.
3
Page 10 of 98
Chapter 7 – Checkout & Adjustment
Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
4
Locate the trimmer RV2 (on Board # 3) see figure below.
5
6
Adjust RV2 to read 2.600 ± 0.3 V on the screen.
Loosen the setscrew, which locks the sleeve with the optic fibre into the socket.
Loose this
set screw
Optic fibre
Sleeve
7
8
9
Move the optic fibre upward to obtain the maximum voltage reading on the
Coagulimetric Channel line. After reaching maximum value, move fibre in
opposite direction until the value decreases by 100mV, then tighten the setscrew.
Adjust by means of RV2 the reading to 2.600 ± 0.3 V.
Touch Stop then “√” to exit.
7.2.4
1
2
Optic fibre check out and adjustment procedure
On the windows like menu enter Service then Optical Module and Fibre
Adjustment.
Wait for the initialization of the motors then empty the analysis compartment from
any rotor.
Chapter 7 – Checkout & Adjustment
Page 11 of 98
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
3
Touch Start and verify that (without any rotor in place) no “cuvette” reads a value
higher than 70 mV. See screen below:
Warning: If this test fails then follow these few points:
•
•
•
4
5
6
7
8
Loose the setscrew that holds the Optic Fibre in place on the Rotor Holder side.
Rotate the Optic Fibre CW or CCW (max. 90°) until a reading lower than 70 mV
is obtained.
Tighten the setscrew to lock the Optic Fibre back in place (the Optic Fibre must
be placed in the bottom).
Touch “Set envelope mode”.
Wait for about 30 seconds and verify that for no cuvette the MIN-MAX reading
value is higher than 50 mV. If not then perform the test in the sub-section 7.2.3
paying attention to the reading oscillations on Coagulimetric Channel (higher then
50 mV). Then perform the procedure in the sub-section 7.2.1.
If OK touch “Stop”. Raise the Rotor Holder Cover and load a new rotor on the
Rotor Holder.
Touch Start and check that all cuvettes values read higher than 130 mV and don’t
exceed 1500 mV. If exceed 1500 mV then check for rotor integrity. Touch “Set
envelope mode” and verify that the MIN-MAX for each cuvette is 50mV or less.
Touch Stop and then “X” to exit.
Page 12 of 98
Chapter 7 – Checkout & Adjustment
Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
7.3 Chromogenic channel
Several tests are available either to troubleshoot or verify the Chromogenic Channel.
These tests allow verification of electronic circuits (PCB) as well as optical
components (light source and optic fiber).
The tests that achieve verification of the Chromogenic Optical Channel are:
Test Name
Chromogenic Channel
check out and adjustment
Channel performance
check out
Light Source (Halogen
Lamp) verification
7.3.1
Purpose
Sets the read value and the peak of the
bell shaped signal of data acquisition.
Verifies that precision and linearity are
within specs
Performs match of electronic signals to
actual performance of light source
See section
7.3.1
7.3.2
7.3.3
Chromogenic Channel check out and adjustment
Materials / tools necessary for the test:
- Brand new rotors
- Wash-Reference Emulsion
- 200 µl micropipette
Precaution
Make sure that the instrument has been switched on for at least 20 minutes (warm-up
of light source and thermoregulation) prior to going through the following procedure:
1
2
Enter to the service program menu.
Thoroughly clean the twenty optical path (holes) of the Rotor Holder with
distilled water and a cotton swab. Clean also the optical sensor and the Optic Fiber
windows of the Chromogenic Channel. Do not use metal forceps with gauze as
this may scratch the rotor holder generating possible stray light affecting the
proper system performance.
Chapter 7 – Checkout & Adjustment
Page 13 of 98
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
3
On the windows like menu enter Service then A/D Converter Test. The instrument
displays the screen below.
4
Using the Icon turn off the Halogen Lamp. Lower the analysis compartment
cover, then locate the trimmer RV4 (on Board # 3), see figure below:
5
Adjust RV4 to read between 0 and 15 mV on screen. Then touch “√” to exit.
Note: Turn RV4 CCW to decrease offset mV and CW to increase offset mV.
6 On the windows like menu enter Service then Optical Module Test and Curve
Adjustment.
7 Load 200 µl of Wash-Reference Emulsion inside cuvette number 20 of a new
rotor. Place rotor onto rotor holder.
8 Select Chromogenic Channels, set rotational speed at 1200 rpm and touch “Start”.
The instrument performs an acquisition cycle. Upon completion of the acquisition
cycle scroll the table of values and delays until you find the delay corresponding
to the value of 1000.
Page 14 of 98
Chapter 7 – Checkout & Adjustment
Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Check that the delay is within 60 µsec. from the “current” delay displayed on the
window “Select Delay”. The Chromogenic channel delay cannot be updated, only
viewed and compared to the current Coagulametric channel delay.
Change the rotational speed from 1200 to 600 rpm and touch “Start”. The
instrument performs an acquisition cycle. Upon completion of the acquisition
cycle scroll the table of values and delays until you find the delay corresponding
to the value of 1000.
Check that the delay is within 120 µsec. from the “current” delay displayed on the
window “Select Delay”.
Remove the rotor. On the windows like menu enter Service then Optical Module
Test and Acquisition Adjustment. Touch Start, then adjust RV3 (on board # 3, see
figure on previous page) to read 8.7 ± 0.05 Vdc on the Chromogenic Channel line
(accept any value from 8.65 to 8.75 Vdc). Once adjusted touch “Stop”.
Load a new rotor with 200 µl of Wash-Reference Emulsion on cuvette # 6. Place
the loaded rotor in the analysis compartment.
Touch “Start” and verify that the reading on Chromogenic Channel line does not
exceed 3.5 Vdc. Otherwise replace the 405 nm Optical Filter and repeat the test.
Touch “√” to exit
Chapter 7 – Checkout & Adjustment
Page 15 of 98
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
7.3.2
Performance checkout
These three tests allow you to verify the overall performance of the Chromogenic
Channel:
•
•
•
Chromogenic Precision test
Chromogenic Linearity Test level 80
Chromogenic Linearity Test level 160
The Chromogenic Optic Test Kit (P/N 97579-50) is necessary to perform both tests.
The kit incorporates 50 vials (2 mL each), having the following concentration of PNA
(ParaNitroAnyline):
13 vials
19 vials
12 vials
6 vials
•
160 µmol/L
80 µmol/L
40 µmol/L
20 µmol/L
Chromogenic Precision Test
Materials / tools necessary for the test:
1
2
- Brand new rotors
- Chromogenic Optic Test Kit
P/N 97579-50
- Clean, empty reagent vial, or other
suitable container.
On the windows like menu enter Service then Optical Module Test and Channel
Optic Test.
Select in sequence Channel type: Chromogenic; Test Type: Precision Loading
Type: Reagent. The instrument shows the screen below:
Page 16 of 98
Chapter 7 – Checkout & Adjustment
Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Put the content of two vials (4ml) of PNA (ParaNitroAnyline) concentration 80
µmol/L (taken from the kit P/N 97579-50) into a clean, empty 4 mL reagent vial
with its Green adapter or other suitable container.
Position the 4 mL reagent vial with the adapter onto the reagent position R1.
Pour at least 4 mL of distilled water onto a clean, empty reagent vial or other
suitable container.
Position the reagent vial with the distilled water onto reagent position R4.
Take a new rotor and place it in the analysis compartment.
Touch “Start in Manual Rotor Loading”. The instrument will load the rotor
cuvettes aspirating the PNA from the reagent vials using the reagent probe.
Wait for the acquisition cycle, then verify the following parameters:
CV% (cuvette # 1 to # 18)
CV% (Reference)
Mean Reference
:<=2
: < = 0.5
: 7.7 V to 8.3 V
Note: Acquisition cycle only can be repeated selecting Skip Loading from the
“Loading Type” window.
10. Touch “√” twice to exit.
•
Chromogenic Linearity Test level 80
Materials / tools necessary for the test:
1
- Brand new rotors
- Chromogenic Optic Test Kit
P/N 97579-50
- Clean, empty reagent vial, or other
suitable container.
On the windows like menu enter Service then Optical Module Test and Channel
Optic Test.
Chapter 7 – Checkout & Adjustment
Page 17 of 98
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
2
The instrument shows the screen below. Select in sequence Channel type:
Chromogenic, Test Type: Linearity and Loading Type: Reagent.
3
Put the content of two PNA vials (4mL), of each level (80, 40 and 20 from the kit
P/N 97579-50) into a clean, empty 4 mL reagent vial with their Green adapters, or
other suitable container.
Position the reagent vials on the reagent tray as follows:
4
Rgt position
R1
R2
R3
5
6
7
Material
80 µmol/L
40 µmol/L
20 µmol/L
Volume
4 ml
4 ml
4 ml
Place a new rotor in the analysis compartment.
Touch “Start in Manual Rotor Loading”. The instrument will load the rotor
cuvettes aspirating the PNA from the reagent vials using the reagent probe.
Wait for the acquisition cycle then verify that the following results are obtained:
CV% (cuvette # 1 to # 6)
CV% (cuvette # 7 to # 12)
CV% (cuvette # 13 to # 18)
CV% (Reference)
Mean Reference
R2
: < = 1.5
:<=3
:<=5
: < = 0.4
: 7.2 V to 8.8 V
: >= 0.997
Note: Acquisition cycle only can be repeated selecting Skip Loading from the
“Loading Type” window.
8
Touch “√” twice to exit.
•
Chromogenic Linearity Test level 160
Materials / tools necessary for the test:
Page 18 of 98
- Brand new rotors
Chapter 7 – Checkout & Adjustment
Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
- Chromogenic Optic Test Kit
P/N 97579-50
- Clean, empty reagent vial, or other
suitable container.
1
2
3
4
On the windows like menu enter Service then Optical Module Test and Channel
Optic Test.
The instrument shows the screen below. Select in sequence Channel type:
Chromogenic, Test Type: Linearity and Loading Type: Reagent.
Put the content of two PNA vials (4 mL), of each level (160, 80 and 40 from the
kit P/N 97580-50) into a clean, empty 4 mL reagent vial with theirs adapters or
other suitable container.
Position the reagent vials onto reagent tray according to the following scheme:
Rgt position
R1
R2
R3
R4
Material
160 µmol/L
80 µmol/L
40 µmol/L
Distilled Water
Volume
4 ml
4 ml
4 ml
4 ml
5
6
Place a brand new rotor into the analysis compartment.
Touch “Start in Manual Rotor Loading”. The instrument will load the rotor
cuvettes aspirating the PNA from the reagent vial using the reagent probe.
7
Wait for the acquisition cycle, then verify that the following results are obtained:
CV% (cuvette # 1 to # 6)
CV% (cuvette # 7 to # 12)
CV% (cuvette # 13 to # 18)
CV% (Reference)
Mean Reference
R2
: < = 1.5
:<=3
:<=5
: < = 0.4
: 7.2 V to 8.8 V
: >= 0.997
Chapter 7 – Checkout & Adjustment
Page 19 of 98
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
Note: Acquisition cycle only can be repeated selecting Skip Loading from the
“Loading Type” window.
8
Touch “√” twice to exit.
7.3.3
Light source (Halogen Lamp) verification
Materials / tools necessary for the test:
- Distilled Water
- Brand new rotors
1
On the windows like menu enter Service then Optical Module and Acquisition
Adjustment. Wait for motors initialization then the instrument shows the screen
below.
2
3
4
Load 200 µl of distilled water inside cuvette number 6 of a new rotor.
Place the loaded rotor onto the Rotor Holder in the analysis compartment.
Touch Start then locate RV3 on the Acquisition board (board # 3), see figure
below.
5
Turn RV3 fully clockwise to read as low as possible.
Page 20 of 98
Chapter 7 – Checkout & Adjustment
Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
6
7
Check that in the above condition the value displayed on the screen is in the range
890 to 4150 mV. If test fails replace the Halogen Lamp Socket Assy and perform
the Chromogenic Channel check out & adjustment as described in the sub-section
7.3.1. If test passes, remove the rotor and then repeat the Acquisition test and readjust RV3 to read 8.7 +/- 0.050 V on the Chromogenic Channel line.
Touch Stop and “√” to exit.
7.4 Liquid sensors
These two tests are designed to troubleshoot and verify the liquid sensors. They are
available via Service then Sensors Test.
7.4.1
7.4.2
Wash-Reference Emulsion Volume Test
Needle sensor Test
7.4.1
Wash-Reference Emulsion Volume test
This procedure allows the adjustment of the reference solution sensor circuit that shall
determine the volume of the solution left in the bottle.
1
2
3
4
Prepare a Wash-R Solution bottle with 500 ml of fluid. If a graduated container is
not available then use the marks on the side of the bottle paying attention to the
horizontal position of the bottle.
Install the bottle on board and cork it completely with the Reference Emulsion
Sensor.
On the windows like menu enter Service then Sensors Test and Flush Volume test.
The system displays the screen below:
Verify that Flush Volume displayed is 500 mL.
Chapter 7 – Checkout & Adjustment
Page 21 of 98
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
5
Adjust if necessary RV9 located on the Acquisition & Sensor Board (Board # 3),
see figure below, to obtain a Flush Volume of 500ml displayed.
6
Fill the Wash-R bottle with 1000ml of solution. Install the bottle on board and
cork it completely with the Reference Emulsion Sensor. On the windows like
menu enter Service then Sensors Test and Flush Volume test. The Flush Volume
displayed should be 1000 ± 20% (800 – 1200 ml).
7
Fill the Wash-R bottle with 100ml of solution. Install the bottle on board and cork
it completely with the Reference Emulsion Sensor. On the windows like menu
enter Service then Sensors Test and Flush Volume test. The Flush Volume
displayed should be 100 ± 30% (70 – 130 ml).
8
Press “√” to exit.
7.4.2
Needles sensor test
This test allows functional verification of the circuitry that fulfils the task of liquid
detection through both the sample and reagent probes.
Materials / tools necessary for the test:
- Distilled water
- Micropipette 100 – 1000 μl
- Clean, empty 4 ml reagent vial.
Warning:
Prior starting procedures execute one or more priming cycles following the route
Diagnostic then Priming. Perform these operations until confident that the fluidic path
is completely filled and without air bubbles.
Verify also that the fluidic lines are smooth and without crimps, etc.
1
2
On the windows like menu enter Service then Sensors Test and Needle Sensor
Test.
Press Start. The Sample Arm moves across the default test positions (1, 2 and A1
on the Sample Tray positions then R1, R5 and R7 on the Reagent Tray) and stops
on the waste position. The system displays the following screen:
Page 22 of 98
Chapter 7 – Checkout & Adjustment
Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
3
Verify on the current screen that the value presented on the window “Reference
value” is in the range 4.000 - 6.000 V.
Note: If it’s out of range then perform the procedure “Wash-Reference Emulsion
Volume Test” to adjust the Flush Volume value at 500 mL. If the problem persists
then replace the Acquisition & Sensors Board (Board #3).
4
Prepare and position the suitable containers with distilled water or Wash-R
Solution as for the table below then press Start. The Sample Arm will scan the
positions and system will refresh screen with updated values.
5
Verify that the windows “SENSOR RESULT” display LIQUID. In addition check
that the windows “LIQUID” displays values according to table below. Adjust RV
11 and RV 12 if necessary and repeat the test as many times as needed.
Position
Container
Volume
Probe
LSLIQ
Sample tray
#1
500 μL
Disposable
cup
4 mL
Reagent vial
+ Adapter
150 μL
SPL
4.1 V
(± 200 mV)
1.5 mL
RGT
4.2 V
(± 200 mV)
Reagent tray
R1
6
Sensor Trimmer
Result to Adjust
Liquid
RV 12
Liquid
RV 11
Locate trimmer position on Acquisition & Sensors Board (Board # 3) as per figure
below.
Chapter 7 – Checkout & Adjustment
Page 23 of 98
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
7
Repeat the test with the containers positioned and filled as indicated in the table
below then check the results.
Position
Container
Volume
Probe
LSLIQ
Sample tray #1
Sample tray # 2
Sample tray A1
500 μL Disposable cup
500 μL Disposable cup
500 μL Disposable cup
+ Adapter
4 mL
Reagent vial + Adapter
4 mL
Reagent vial + Adapter
4 mL
Reagent vial + Adapter
150 μL
150 μL
150 μL
SPL
SPL
SPL
3.9 – 4.3 V
2.8 – 3.8 V
3.4 – 4.4 V
Sensor
Result
Liquid
Liquid
Liquid
1.5 mL
RGT
> 3.5 V
Liquid
1.5 mL
RGT
> 3.0 V
Liquid
1.5 mL
SPL
> 3.0 V
Liquid
Reagent tray R1
Reagent tray R5
Reagent tray R7
Note: If the “LIQUID” value is correct but the “Sensor Result” is “Air” the meaning
is that the liquid level in this position is low. This may indicate a problem with the
Sample Arm and/or the Needles Block.
This happens when the Needles have touched the liquid (LIQUID value in range) but
the mechanical stop has blocked the Sample Arm before the Needles enter 2mm into
the liquid for confidence (Sensor Result “Air”).
To solve the problem correct the Sample Arm assembly then repeat this procedure.
This condition of liquid low level may be present also during the analysis. In this case
perform this test (using the specific test quantity of liquid) to clarify if the liquid is
really insufficient and if the sensor is working properly.
Repeat the test with the containers empty and positioned as indicated in the table
below then press “Start” and check the results.
Position
Container
500 μL disposable
cup
Sample tray # 2 500 μL disposable
cup
Sample tray A1 500 μL disposable
cup + Adapter
Reagent tray R1 4 mL Reagent vial +
Adapter
Reagent tray R5 4 mL Reagent vial +
Adapter
Reagent tray R7 4 mL Reagent vial +
Adapter
Sample tray # 1
8
Volume
LSLIQ
< 2.4V
Sensor
Result
Air
None
< 300 mV
None
< 2.4 V
Air
< 300 mV
None
< 2.4 V
Air
< 300 mV
None
< 0.8 V
Air
< 300 mV
None
< 1.5 V
Air
< 300 mV
None
< 1.5 V
Air
< 300 mV
Verify that all windows “SENSOR RESULT” now display AIR.
Page 24 of 98
Chapter 7 – Checkout & Adjustment
Offset
Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
9
Check also that on each of the six small windows the value for offset is below
300mV. The offset is a reading taken on the sensor once the Sample Arm reaches
each given position prior to lowering into the liquid (circuit autozero).
Note: If the Offset is too high (over 700 mV) we have Sensor Fail. To solve Offset
problem it’s advisable to check for liquid on the Needles, dirt and/or insulating lost in
the Needles Block.
10 Press “X” to exit.
7.5 Optic sensor test
Specific optical sensors are located in the Autosampler with the purpose to detect the
presence of cups, primary tubes and auxiliary materials on the Sample Tray.
Other optical sensors are located in the R.E.M. (Rotor Exchange Module) with the
purpose to detect for rotor presence. The sensors check for rotors present at different
locations along the route followed by the rotors during normal operations.
Following are the specific sub-sections for optical sensors location.
7.5.1
7.5.2
7.5.3
Rotor Stack.
Rotor Waste container.
Autosampler housing.
7.5.1
Rotor Stack
The Rotor Stack is actually equipped with two optical sensors that have the purpose
of detecting the presence of:
-
Lowest rotor in the Rotor Stack.
Rotor on the Rotor Transport ready to be displaced on the Rotor Holder.
The two sensors are identified in the system as follows.
•
•
Rotor Stack (Storage)
Rotor Transport (Slider)
•
Rotor Stack (Storage)
1
2
Empty the rotor feed stack from any rotor.
Locate inside the Rotor Stack the window of the “Optical Sensor Rotor Stack
Upper”. The sensor is located just above the mechanism that holds the stack of
rotors when loaded.
Check that the sensor is properly faced to its slot. This is to prevent mechanical
jam (if too close) or detection problem (if too far).
3
Chapter 7 – Checkout & Adjustment
Page 25 of 98
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
4
Access the Service menu then follow the route: Service, Sensor Test and Optic
Sensor Test. The instrument will initialize motors then the screen below is
presented.
5
Manually load one new rotor and leave it seated at the lower position of the Rotor
Stack lined up to the Optical Sensor Rotor Stack Upper.
6
Check that the voltage being displayed with the rotor in place is 5.00 V (higher
than 5 Vdc on the DVM). Last check that the flag on the screen shall indicate the
presence of the rotor. Should above reading be less than 5.00 V adjust, proceeding
as follows.
Locate in the system Card Housing the R.E.M. Board (Board #4).
Connect a DVM between TP0 (GND) and TP1 (signal) as shown in the figure
below.
7
8
9 Adjust PT1 until the DVM reads 8.000 Vdc.
10 Manually remove the rotor and observe voltage value reported on the screen to
drop to less than 1V. The flag that indicates the presence of the rotor shall also
disappear. In case the value read is higher than 1.00 V check for sensor position
and cleanness.
Page 26 of 98
Chapter 7 – Checkout & Adjustment
Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
11 Manually move the rotor in and out a few times and assess for proper rotor
detection. Check also that the flag toggles on the screen as rotor is being moved in
and out.
•
Rotor Transport (Slider)
1
2
Empty the Rotor Stack.
Locate the “Optical Sensor Rotor Stack Lower” at the bottom of the Rotor Stack
lined up with the Rotor Transport.
Check that the sensor is properly faced to its slot. This is to prevent mechanical
jam (if too close) or detection problem (if too far).
Manually load a new rotor on the Rotor Transport.
Access the Service software then follow the route: Service, Sensor Test and Optic
Sensor Test. The screen shown below is presented.
3
4
5
6
7
8
Check that the voltage being displayed, with the rotor in place is 5.00 V (higher
than 5 Vdc on the DVM). In the meanwhile a flag on the screen shall indicate the
presence of the rotor. Should above reading be less than 5.00 V adjust, proceeding
as follows.
Locate in the system Card Housing the R.E.M. Board (Board #4).
Connect a DVM between TP0 (GND) and TP2 (signal) as shown in figure below.
9
Adjust PT2 until the DVM reads 8.000 Vdc.
Chapter 7 – Checkout & Adjustment
Page 27 of 98
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
10 Manually remove the rotor and observe the voltage value reported on the screen to
drop to less than 1V. The flag that indicates the presence of the rotor shall also
disappear. In case the reading remains above 1.00 V then check for sensor
position and cleanliness.
11 Manually move the rotor in and out a few times and assess for proper rotor
detection. Check also that the flag toggles on the screen as rotor is being moved in
and out.
7.5.2
Rotor Waste container
The Rotor Waste container can accommodate up to eleven used rotors (240 tests).
Following are the two conditions detected by the “Optical Sensor Rotor Waste Full”:
-
Rotor Waste container available (until ten rotors pile-up in the Rotor Waste
container).
Rotor Waste container full (when eleven rotors pile-up in the Rotor Waste
container).
The system provides appropriate warning messages to the User any time that the full
condition is met.
1
Access the Service environment, then follow the route: Service, Sensor Test and
Optic Sensor Test. The instrument will initialize the motors then the screen shown
below is presented.
2
Gain access to the Rotor Waste compartment by lowering the door in bottom front
of the instrument (this test needs to be performed with the Front Cover and the
Lower Support Plate assembled).
Remove the Rotor Waste Container from its housing.
Fill the waste rotor bag with ten rotors.
Place the Rotor Waste Container back into its compartment.
3
4
5
Page 28 of 98
Chapter 7 – Checkout & Adjustment
Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
6
7
Check that, in this condition, the voltage being displayed is 4.25V (accept any
value in the range 3.50 to 5.00). Should above reading be out of the specified
range then adjust, proceeding as follows.
Locate in the system Card Housing the R.E.M. Board (Board #4).
8
Connect a DVM between TP0 (GND) and TP3 (signal), as shown in figure below.
9 Turn PT3 until the DVM reads 4.25 Vdc with ten rotors in the waste container.
10 Manually insert another rotor in the pile. Now 11 rotors are the waste container.
11 The System shall detect the “Rotor Waste full” condition and flag it on the screen
as appropriate.
12 Check that the voltage being displayed, with the 11 rotors in place is 5.00 V on
the screen (higher than 8.00Vdc on the DVM).
13 Manually remove two rotors from the pile and leave 9 rotors in the waste
container.
14 Check that, in this condition, the voltage being displayed drops to less than 1.00V.
Accept any value below 1.00 V, the flag that indicates the presence of the rotor
shall also disappear. In case reading remains above 1.000 V check for sensor
position and cleanness.
15 Manually move the rotors in and out a few times and assess for proper rotor
detection. Check also that the flag toggles on the screen as the rotors are being
moved in and out.
16 If any of the above voltages cannot be obtained adjust the position of the optical
sensors and repeat the procedure.
7.5.3
Autosampler Housing
The Autosampler Housing is equipped with two optical sensors used to detect the
presence on the Sample Tray of primary tubes, cups, reagents or calibrator vials. It’s
also equipped with the internal Barcode Assy, used to read the “Patient ID” labels
present on the primary tubes. The two following procedures are required to
completely Check out & Adjust the Autosampler Housing sensors.
•
•
Autosampler Sensors Check out & Adjustment.
Autosampler / BCR Test.
Chapter 7 – Checkout & Adjustment
Page 29 of 98
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
•
Autosampler Sensors Check out & Adjustment
This procedure is designed to verify and adjust the sensitivity of the optical sensors
located on the Sample Tray compartment, which detect the presence of cups / primary
tubes or other containers.
The positions on the Sample Tray covered by each sensor are as follows.
Position
Name on LCD screen
Located on the external
Cups (1st and 2nd ring)
wall of the sample tray
housing
Located below the
Cups (3rd ring)
Sample Tray grey Flange
Adjustable.
Function
Checks for presence on the outer
(1st) and mid (2nd) rings for cups
or tubes on the Sample Tray.
Checks for presence of any
container on the innermost (3rd)
ring on the Sample Tray.
Note: Prior to performing this procedure verify that the Autosampler Movement Assy
with its grey Flange Adjustable is properly aligned (see sub-section 7.6.5 and 7.7.1).
1
-
Take a Sample Tray with all the positions free and place:
In position 33 (1st , outer ring) a new 2 mL cup
In position 34 (2nd , middle ring) a new 2 mL cup
In aux. ring position A9 (3rd, innermost ring) a 4ml bottle and adaptor
Note: Make sure that the cups are new and free from any scratches.
2
Access the Service environment, place the prepared Sample Tray in its
compartment then enter Service, Sensor Test and Optical Sensor test. The system
displays the screen below:
3
On the window “SELECT RING TO TEST” set the appropriate ring.
Page 30 of 98
Chapter 7 – Checkout & Adjustment
Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
Note: Adjust the 2nd ring first because the adjustment made on the trimmer RV6 will
affect the voltage reading on the 1st ring. The Acquisition & Sensors Board, through
RV6 sets the maximum current in the Outer Sensor, which is used for both the rings,
and RV10 sets the gain of the reading circuit for the 1st ring.
4
Select 2nd ring. Manually rotate the Sample Tray positioning the cup in position
34 in front of the optical sensor. Rotate the Sample Tray, to obtain the maximum
voltage reading on the screen for the 2nd ring. The voltage for the 2nd ring should
read between 2.8 to 4.0V.
5
If not adjust trimmer RV6 located on the Acquisition & Sensors Board (see figure
below), to obtain the specified value. Make sure that the Sample Tray does not
lose its position (at maximum reading) while adjusting.
6
Remove the cup and check that the voltage indicated on the LCD is <1.00V.
7
Select 1st ring. Manually rotate the Sample Tray positioning the cup in position
33 in front of the optical sensor. Rotate the Sample Tray, to obtain the maximum
voltage reading on the screen for the 1st ring. The voltage for the 1st ring should
read >3.5V.
8
If not adjust trimmer RV10 located on the Acquisition & Sensors Board (see
figure below), to obtain the specified value. Make sure that the Sample Tray does
not lose its position (at maximum reading) while adjusting. Note: If the voltage is
too high, such as 10.0V trim it down with RV10.
9
Remove the cup and check that the voltage indicated on the LCD is <1.00V.
Sample tray ring
2nd – middle ring
1st – outer ring
Sample tray ring
2nd – middle ring
1st – outer ring
Sample tray pos.
Position 34
Position 33
Sample tray pos.
Position 34
Position 33
Container
Cup 2 mL
no-scratches
Cup 2 mL
no-scratches
Value
2.80 to 4.00V
Adjust
RV 6
> 3.50 V
RV 10
Container
No container
No container
Value
< 1.00 V
< 1.00 V
Chapter 7 – Checkout & Adjustment
Page 31 of 98
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
10 Insert a 4mL bottle adaptor (p/n 190763-00) into AUX position A9. Place a 4ml
bottle into the adaptor making sure that the glass is facing the adaptor handle and
the label is facing away from the handle.
11 Observe the status line for the Inner Ring. Turn RV7 on the Acquisition &
Sensors Bd, (bd #3) to the maximum value. Manually rotate the autosampler
around the internal ring sensor position and look for the maximum obtainable
value. This has to be ≥ 6V.
Note: If obtaining ≥ 6V is not possible, remove the autosampler tray and
flange. Use sensor alignment tool p/n 190782-03 to check the position
of the internal ring sensor. Place the alignment tool over the
Autosampler hub and sensor. The front of the sensor should be
against the tool. If not, loosen the sensor and adjust the sensor so it is
touching the tool. Install the Adaptor Plate (p/n 190782-01) on top of the
sensor). Tighten the sensor. Repeat steps 10 and 11.
Note: If sensor alignment tool p/n 190782-03 is not available loosen the
sensor and adjust the sensor out toward the front of the unit. Adjust
sensor so the tip of the sensor is flush with the white sample area inner
wall. The tip of the sensor should not protrude out from the hole
beyond the white wall.
If the positioning of the internal ring sensor (sensor touching the tool),
seems to be fine, install a spacer, p/n 190782-02 underneath the sensor.
Install the Adaptor Plate (p/n 190781-02) on top of the sensor (see
diagram). Recheck sensor alignment. Repeat steps 10 and 11.
12 Insert a 4ml bottle without a label filled with DI water into the adaptor in position
A9. Manually move the sample tray around the sensor to get the maximum
voltage displayed on the 3rd ring status line.
13 Adjust RV7 on the Acquisition & Sensor Bd, (bd #3), for an output value on the
LCD between 3.2 to 3.5V.
14 Remove the bottle and verify that the output value is < 2.2V. (See note below).
15 Remove the empty 2mL adaptor (p/n 190764-00) and observe that the output
value is < 2.2V. (See note below).
Note: If obtaining < 2.2V is not possible, remove the autosampler and
flange. Use sensor alignment tool p/n 190782-03 to check the position
of the internal sensor. The front of the sensor should be against the
tool. If the positioning seems to be fine, install spacer p/n 190782-02
underneath the sensor and repeat steps 10 - 15.
*** A maximum of two spacers (p/n 190782-02) are allowed underneath
the sensor. If there are still problems, ***
replace the sensor
16 Place an empty 2mL cup into the adaptor and observe that the output value is ≥
3.6V.
17 Remove the adaptor and cup. Insert an 8mL bottle filled with water in AUX
position 9 and observe that the output value is ≥ 3.6V.
Page 32 of 98
Chapter 7 – Checkout & Adjustment
Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
Sample tray ring
3rd – inner ring
Sample tray ring
3rd – inner ring
3rd – inner ring
Sample tray pos.
Position A9
Sample tray pos.
Position A9
Position A9
Container
New 4ml Bottle
Without label filled
with DI water
Value
> 3.2 to 3.5 V
Container
4ml adaptor with
no bottle
No adaptor, no
bottle
Value
< 2.2 V
Adjust
RV 7
< 2.2 V
To thoroughly assess the proper functioning of sensors through all available positions
of the Sample Tray, it is advisable to perform the “Autosampler / BCR test”. This is
the next test described in this sub-section.
•
Autosampler / BCR test
The Autosampler / BCR (Bar Code Reader) test is designed to verify the proper
reading of Autosampler Optical Sensors and BCR under dynamic conditions.
These conditions replicate the real use during the analysis cycles. Specific Offset can
be entered to trigger an early/late reading on the optical sensors. This will compensate
for some mechanical play that may produce a small shift of the Sample Tray during
rotation.
1
On the windows like menu enter Service then Autosampler / BCR test. The
system shows the screen below and positions at home the Sample Tray.
Chapter 7 – Checkout & Adjustment
Page 33 of 98
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
2
3
Prepare a Sample Tray with all the even positions (2nd, middle ring) loaded with
new empty 2 mL cups. Make sure that the cups are new, free from any scratches.
Place the prepared Sample Tray onboard.
Touch key “START WITHOUT BCR”. The system will perform a complete turn
of the Autosampler reporting on the screen cups presence (1 present; 0 not
present) and position.
Note: There are 3 other columns in the result area of the screen.
The first is the “Offset” column.
The second is the “ADC Value” column, read on each position during the test. The
last is the “Bar Code Values” column where is reported the value read by the BCR on
the Patient ID Barcode Label. This column is compiled only when the test starting by
touching the button “START WITH BCR”.
4
5
6
Assess that all the even positions on the screen report “1” for presence.
If any positions fail then check that the relevant cup is in good condition, replace
the cup and repeat test. Checks also in the “ADC Value” column that the highest
value read for this position is close to the set point of the sensor (see the test
“Autosampler Sensors Check out & Adjustment” described above in this subsection).
If the problem persist then enter on the window “CENTRAL RING OFFSET” a
new value close to zero (the value suggested are –5 to +5) and repeat the test a
few times until confident that the proper value is found.
Once achieved, unload cups from mid ring, place them on outer ring and perform this
test for the outer ring. Set “OUTER RING OFFSET” if necessary and enter an offset
value close to zero (the value suggested are –5 to +5) and repeat the test a few times
until confident that the proper offset value is found. Also, install bottles without labels
on the Auxiliary Ring (inner ring) and perform the test again. Set “INNER RING
OFFSET” if necessary and enter an offset value close to zero (the value suggested are
–5 to +5) and repeat the test a few times until confident that the proper offset value is
found.
Page 34 of 98
Chapter 7 – Checkout & Adjustment
Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
Test functionality of the internal Bar Code Reader performing the following
procedure. Make sure internal BCR is enabled and appropriate symbologies selected.
1
On the windows like menu enter Service then Autosampler / BCR test. The
system shows the screen below and positions at home the Sample Tray.
2
Prepare a Sample Tray with primary tubes equipped with Bar Code Labels. Place
tubes in both the middle and outer rings. (It is not necessary to place tubes in
every position, but make sure tubes are in both the middle and outer ring). Make
sure that the labels are valid, in good condition (see also Appendix B Bar Code
Label specification) and positioned toward the Bar Code Reader.
Place the prepared Sample Tray onboard.
Touch key “START WITH BCR”. The system will perform a complete turn of the
Autosampler reporting on the “Bar Code Values” column the value read by the
BCR on the Patient ID Barcode Label.
Confirm that all positions containing tubes indicate a “1” for presence.
If any position fails check that the relevant primary tube label is in good
condition, replace the primary tube and repeat the test. If any position continues
to fail repeat the Autosampler Sensor Adjustment procedure and cup Offset
Procedure.
Confirm that the barcode value read matches the barcode label and that the bar
code value is displayed in the correct tray position.
If the barcode values are not in the correct tray positions, then enter on the
window “BCR OFFSET” a new value and repeat the test (move the Offset value +
or – 1 at any repetition). Repeat several times until confident that the BCR reads
correctly all primary tube labels.
3
4
5
6
7
8
Note: The value reported in the “Offset” column is approximately the cup presence
Optic Sensors output.
Chapter 7 – Checkout & Adjustment
Page 35 of 98
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
7.6 Motor adjust
This service program sub-menu includes the utilities designed to allow stepping
motors phase adjustments and/or check out of the Optical Sensors (Dual/Single
Channel Optical Switch) functionality.
Following are the stepper motors check out procedures:
7.6.1
7.6.2
7.6.3
7.6.4
7.6.5
7.6.6
7.6.7
7.6.8
7.6.9
Rotor Motor
Rotor Holder Cover Motor
Sample Arm Horizontal Motor
Sample Arm Vertical Motor
Autosampler Motor
Sample / Reagent Dilutor Motors
Transport (Slider) Motor
Rotor Arm Horizontal Motor
Rotor Arm Vertical Motor
Operator interface for each motor adjustment screen is very similar. Some exceptions
exist for the Rotor Holder Cover Motor. The functionality of the commands available
and the most common dynamic labels are described in the following sub- section.
Most common commands
The following section provides a description of the commands whose functionality is
replicated in each of the motor adjust screens.
Rotation C.W. Arrow/Rotation C.C.W. Arrow
Allows the clockwise/counterclockwise stepping of the motor. The number of steps
executed for each command is in accordance with the current STEP INCREMENT
value present in the windows.
Next C.W. Position / Next C.C.W. Position
Steps the motor to the next “meaningful position” in the clockwise/counterclockwise
direction that can be reached from the current motor position. At each touch the
system will update values on the following labels on the screen:
PRESENT PHASE
COVER SENSOR
HOME SENSOR
POSITION SENSOR
STEP DONE
Page 36 of 98
Chapter 7 – Checkout & Adjustment
Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
The following “meaningful positions” can be achieved:
Motor
Rotor Motor
Rotor Holder Cover
Sample Arm Motor
Horizontal
Sample Arm Motor
Vertical
Autosampler Motor
Dilutor Motors
Slider Motor
(Transport Motor)
Rotor Arm Horizontal
Rotor Arm Vertical
Meaningful position
20 Rotor cuvette positions (Home Position is with cuvette #20
in front of the Optical Fiber).
3 Positions:
• Closed.
• Intermediate. Utilized only for automatic rotor exchange.
• Opened (Home Position).
13 Positions: (17 for ACL ElitePro):
• 3 Over the Sample Tray (Elite Home Position is over A1)
• 4 Over the Peltier reagent tray. (R1-R4)
• 1 Over the waste/wash reservoir.
• 4 Over the room temperature reagent tray. (R5-R8)
• 1 Over the Rotor Holder position.
• 4 Over the 2nd Peltier reagent tray. (R9-R12) (ElitePro
only) (ElitePro Home Position is over R12)
3 Positions:
• Rotation (Home Position).
• Reagent picking / (Sample/Reagent) delivery.
• Sample picking.
20 Positions (Home Position is with A1 in the direction of the
Sample Arm. Access to 50 positions is achieved through the
outer, middle and inner ring.
2 Positions:
• Fully upward (Home Position).
• Fully downward.
2 Positions:
• Under the Rotor Stack (Home Position).
• Rotor Arm picking.
2 Positions:
• On the Rotor waste / picking (Home Position).
• On the Rotor Holder.
2 Positions:
• Up for Rotation (Home Position).
• Down for Rotor picking/delivery.
Home position
Brings the stepper motor to the Encoder Home Position.
Motor Off
De-energizes the motor. The motor status reported on the relevant window “MOTOR
STATUS” changes from “Energized” to “De-energized”.
Store phase / Store step
This command allows saving of a “new” stepper motor phase (or step) that best fits
the Optical Sensor with the “optical window” on the encoder.
Chapter 7 – Checkout & Adjustment
Page 37 of 98
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
Cautions !
Operating within the Service environment no verifications are made concerning
illegal operations (e.g. conflicts with other modules), safe movements have to be
verified prior to activating any key.
Most common dynamic labels
Listed are descriptions of the dynamic labels that are available inside each of the
Motors Adjustment screens.
Motor
Name
of the label
Present phase
0 - 15
Stored phase
0 - 15
All
Motor status
Energized / Deenergized
All
Cover sensor
On / Off
All
Home sensor
On / Off
Position sensor
On / Off
Steps Done
xxxx
All
All
Page 38 of 98
Range
Meaning
Shows the motor phase currently in
use.
Shows the motor phase stored at
Home Position.
Energized: Stepping motor windings
powered (motor tensioned).
De-energized: Stepping motor
windings not powered (motor detensioned).
Indicates status of the magnetic
sensor that detects the Rotor Cover
position.
Indicates status of the optical sensor
that detects the home position of the
current motor.
Indicates status of the optical sensor
that detects the position of the current
motor (e.g. 20 cuvettes position on
the rotor holder).
Number of steps performed when the
motor is being operated in the service
program. The steps increment (or
decrement) from the Home Position
(considered step 0)
Chapter 7 – Checkout & Adjustment
Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
7.6.1
Rotor motor
This procedure is designed to verify and adjust (if required) the central phase of the
Home Position of the motor. This is to match the motor phases with the optical sensor
reading on the encoder disk. It’s also possible to use it to verify the functionality of
the stepper motor and of the optical sensor.
1
2
Turn the Instrument On. Then access the Service program main menu.
On the windows like menu enter Service then Motor Adjust and Rotor Motor. The
system displays the screen below.
3
On the tool bar touch the small icon of the analysis compartment cover to raise the
cover (the icon acts as a toggle switch to raise/lower the Rotor Cover).
4 Home the Rotor Motor by touching the Home Position button on the screen. The
system moves to the Home Position the Rotor Motor. The Rotor Holder cuvette
#20 is in front of the Coagulimetric Channel Optic Fibre.
5 Verify that the dynamic labels “HOME SENSOR” and “POSITION SENSOR” are
both ON.
6 With the Step Increment set to 1, repeatedly press cw arrow (or ccw arrow) button
on the screen. The status bars of both the home and position sensors show the
actual condition of optical switch (+: light; -: dark).
7 Continue to press cw (or ccw) arrow until both the status changes from light to
dark then reverse motion by touching the opposite key until the status of optical
sensors becomes dark again after the light window.
8 It is now possible to determine the width of the optical window (notch on the
encoder disk).
9 Pressing on the cw (or ccw) arrow keys move to the middle of the window
(- - - - + + + + + - - - -).
10 Check that the present phase matches the stored phase on the dynamic labels. If
phases are equal then the Rotor Motor is centered on the encoder and the test is
over. Press “√” to exit.
Chapter 7 – Checkout & Adjustment
Page 39 of 98
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
11 Or, press “STORE PHASE” if active. Unavailability of the “STORE PHASE” key
indicates an illegal condition of the Rotor Motor phase exist. Touch the cw (or
ccw) arrow key to restore a legal motor phase condition.
12 Visually inspect the Rotor Holder and confirm that the middle of the cuvette
position #20 is in front of the coagulation optic fibre.
13 If yes and if the present and stored phase are still in disagreement, touch “STORE
PHASE”.
14 Press “√” to return to the Service main menu.
7.6.2
Rotor Holder Cover Motor
This procedure is designed to verify and adjust (if necessary), the alignment of the
Rotor Cover Encoder Disk and the Optical Sensor. It is also possible to use it to
verify the functionality of the stepper motor and the optical sensor. The encoder disk
identifies three rotor cover positions which are closed, intermediate and home (fully
open).
1
2
Turn the Instrument On. Then access the Service program main menu.
If the Rotor Cover Movement Assy was replaced or in any case removed and then
assembled, verify that when the Cover is closed the Encoder is in the position
indicated in the following drawing (the top edge of the encoder disk should be
approximately 1mm above the top edge of the dual channel optical sensor). If the
Encoder is not in the correct position then adjust it by loosening the two setscrews
that fix the Encoder to the motor shaft and adjust the encoder up or down as
necessary. Tighten the encoder set screws after adjustment.
Note: On a properly adjusted encoder the upper side of the encoder has to be about 1
mm above the upper side of the Dual Channel Optical Switch Sensor when the Rotor
Holder Cover is in the closed position. If available use the Rotor Cover Encoder
Centering Tool P/N 190575-00.
Encoder Disk
Top edge of encoder disk is
approximately 1mm above top
of optical sensor
Encoder Disk
Closed position
Intermediate position
Fully open position
Dual Channel
Optical Sensor
Page 40 of 98
Chapter 7 – Checkout & Adjustment
Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
3
On the windows like menu enter Service then Motor Adjust and Rotor Holder
Cover. The system displays the LCD screen below.
4
The Rotor Holder Cover sets to its intermediate position (automatic loading
position).
5 Touch the ”HOME POSITION” key, and the Cover Motor opens the cover until
the –36 Step (ACL Elite) or –51 Step (ACL ElitePro) is reached. Cover is fully
open.
6 The Home and the Position Sensors are ON.
7 Touch the ”STEP UP ARROW” key and verify that the Home and the Position
Sensors go to OFF (indicated by minus (--) signs on the relevant status bar) at
least 2 to a maximum of 5 steps before the cover hits the mechanical stop.
| = Rotor cover has reached mechanical stop
Home
|--+++++
Position | - + + + + + +
Pass
Home
| - - - - - + + + Pass
Position | - - - - + + + +
Home
| - + + + + + + Fail (encoder requires adjustment)
Position | + + + + + + +
Home
| - - - - - - - ++ Fail (encoder requires adjustment)
Position | - - - - - - + + +
Note: If there are too many minus signs (greater than 5) loosen the setscrews and
rotate the encoder downward. If there are too few minus signs (less than 2) loosen the
setscrews and rotate the encoder upward. Repeat steps 3 thru 7 above.
8
Touch the ”HOME POSITION” key and then the “NEXT CW POSITION” key.
Step count should be 0.
Chapter 7 – Checkout & Adjustment
Page 41 of 98
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
9
10
11
12
13
Press “NEXT CW POSITION” key. The cover should close to form a hermetic
seal against the fluidic plate. Touch the “STEP UP” or “STEP DOWN” key as
necessary to insure a hermetic seal of the cover and fluidic plate.
Once closed verify that the position sensor is ON (+ on the relevant status bar). It
is not necessary to set in the middle of the optical window.
Touch the “STORE STEP” key, the system will update the value.
Touch once the “NEXT CCW POSITION” to raise the cover back to the
intermediate position.
Once the intermediate position is reached verify that the dynamic label “STEP
DONE” sets to a value of 0. The dynamic labels of cover, home and position
sensor should be set as specified (see table below).
Cover
Position
Fully Open
Intermediate
Closed
Cover
Sensor
Status
OFF
OFF
ON
Home
Sensor
Status
ON
ON
OFF
Position
Sensor
Status
ON
OFF
ON
Step Done
ACL Elite
-36
0
Stored
Steps
Step Done
ACL
ElitePro
-51
0
Stored
Steps
14 Touch any time the “NEXT CCW POSITION” and the “NEXT CW POSITION”
until confidant that the adjustment is acceptable.
15 Touch “√” to return at the Service main menu screen.
7.6.3
Sample Arm horizontal motor
This procedure is designed to verify and adjust (if required) the central phase of the
Home Position of the motor. This is to match the motor phases with the optical sensor
reading on the encoder disk. It’s also possible use it to verify the functionality of the
stepper motor and of the optical sensor.
1
2
Turn the Instrument On. Then access the Service program main menu.
On the windows like menu enter Service then Motor Adjust then Sample Arm
Motors and Horiz. Sample Arm Motor. The system displays the screen below.
Page 42 of 98
Chapter 7 – Checkout & Adjustment
Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
3
4
Manually Raise the Sample Arm to the rotation height.
Touch the Home Position button on the screen. The system moves the Sample
Arm Horizontal Motor to place the Sample Arm over the Autosampler housing
(position A1 on the Sample Tray).
5 Verify that both the “HOME SENSOR” and “POSITION SENSOR” are ON.
6 With the step increment set to 1, repeatedly press cw arrow (or ccw arrow) button
on the screen. The status bars of both the home and position sensors show the
condition of optical switch (+: light; -: dark).
7 Continue to press cw (or ccw) arrow until status changes from light to dark, then
reverse motion by touching the opposite key until the status of optical sensors
becomes dark again after the light window.
8 It is now possible to determine the width of the optical window (notch on the
encoder disk).
9 Press the arrow keys cw (or ccw) to set the position in the middle of the window
(- - - - + + + + + - - - -).
10 Check that the present phase matches the stored phase on the dynamic labels. If
phases are equal then the Sample Arm Horizontal Motor is centred on the encoder
and the test is over. Press “√” to exit.
11 If not press “STORE PHASE” if active. Unavailability of the “STORE PHASE”
key indicates an illegal condition of the current motor phase exist. Touch cw (or
ccw) arrow key to restore legal motor phase condition, then touch “STORE
PHASE”.
12 Press “√” to return to the Service main menu.
7.6.4
Sample Arm vertical motor
This procedure is designed to verify and adjust (if required) the central phase of the
Home Position of the motor. This is to match the motor phases with the optical sensor
reading on the encoder disk. It’s also possible use it to verify the functionality of the
stepper motor and of the optical sensor.
1
Turn the Instrument On. Then access the Service program main menu.
Chapter 7 – Checkout & Adjustment
Page 43 of 98
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
2
On the windows like menu enter Service then Motor Adjust then Sample Arm
Motors and Vert. Sample Arm Motor. The system displays the screen below.
3
4
Manually move the Sample Arm over the waste/wash position.
Touch the Home Position button on the screen. The system moves the Sample
Arm Vertical Motor to the rotation position height.
Verify that the dynamic labels “HOME SENSOR” and “POSITION SENSOR” are
both in ON condition.
Touch the “NEXT DOWN POSITION” to lower the Sample Arm to the Reagent
picking / (Sample/Reagent) delivery position.
Verify that the dynamic labels “HOME SENSOR” and “POSITION SENSOR” are
respectively in OFF and ON conditions.
Touch once the “NEXT DOWN POSITION” to lower the Sample Arm to the
Sample picking position.
Verify that the dynamic labels “HOME SENSOR” and “POSITION SENSOR” are
respectively in ON and OFF condition.
Press “√” to return to the Service main menu.
5
6
7
8
9
10
Note: The Sample Arm Vertical Motor doesn’t require phases to be stored.
Page 44 of 98
Chapter 7 – Checkout & Adjustment
Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
7.6.4.1 Vertical Sample Arm Step Position Adjustment Procedure
Sample Tray Area
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Select Service/Motor Adjust/Sample Arm/Vert. Arm Motor.
Press “Home Position” key.
Select Service/Motor Adjust/Sample Arm/Horiz. Arm Motor.
Press “Home Position” key and then insert 4ml bottle and adapter in A1.
If the instrument is an ACL ElitePro Press “ Next CCW Position” key until
the arm is over A1. Press “√” then, NO to de-energize motor prompt, to
exit.
6. Select Service/Motor Adjust/Sample Arm/Vert. Arm Motor.
7. Select “Sample Tray” from menu under “Horizontal Arm Logical Area”
on screen.
8. Press “Home Position” key. Then press “Next Down Position” key twice.
9. Increment the sample arm downwards by pressing the “down arrow” icon
until the needle hits the bottom of the glass bottle or the “Step Done” box
displays a value not greater than 991 steps.
10. Press “up arrow” icon 5 to 7 times to raise the probe away from the glass
bottom or to obtain a “Step Done” value of 991 or less.
11. Press “Store Position” key.
Note: The maximum “Step Done” value that can be stored is 991. If a
value greater than 991 is attempted to be stored the error message
“Invalid Input” is displayed.
Press “√” then YES to exit.
Reagent Area R1-R4
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Select Service/Motor Adjust/Sample Arm/Vert. Arm Motor.
Press “Home Position” key.
Insert 4ml bottle and adapter in positions R1 and R4.
Select Service/Motor Adjust/Sample Arm/Horiz. Arm Motor.
Press “Home Position” key
Chapter 7 – Checkout & Adjustment
Page 45 of 98
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
6. Press “ Next CCW Position” key until the arm is over R1 position. Press
“√” then NO to exit.
7. Select Service/Motor Adjust/Sample Arm/Vert. Arm Motor.
8. Select “R1-R4” from the menu under “Horizontal Arm Logical Area” on
the screen.
9. Press “Home Position” key. Then “Next Down Position” key once.
10. Increment downwards by pressing the “down arrow” icon until the needle
hits the bottom of the glass bottle, or the +++ signs change to - - - signs on
the position sensor display line.
11. If the probe hits the glass bottle bottom press the “up arrow “ icon to raise
the probe 5 to 7 steps. If the +++ signs changed to - - - signs on the
position sensor display line, press the “up arrow” icon to display at least 3
+++ signs on the position sensor display line.
12. Make a note of the value displayed in the “Step Done” box.
13. Press “√” then YES to exit.
14. Select Service/Motor Adjust/Sample Arm/Vert. Arm Motor
15. Press “Home Position” key
16. Select Service/Motor Adjust/Sample Arm/Horiz. Arm Motor.
17. Press “Home Position” key
18. Press “ Next CCW Position” key until the arm is over R4 position. Press
“√” then NO to exit.
19. Select Service/Motor Adjust/Sample Arm/Vert. Arm Motor.
20. Select “R1-R4” from the menu under “Horizontal Arm Logical Area” on
the screen.
21. Press “Home Position” key. Then “Next Down Position” key once.
22. Increment downwards by pressing the “down arrow” icon until the needle
hits the bottom of the glass bottle, or the +++ signs change to - - - signs on
the position sensor display line.
23. If the probe hits the glass bottle bottom press the “up arrow “ icon to raise
the probe 5 to 7 steps. If the +++ signs changed to - - - signs on the
position sensor display line, press the “up arrow” icon to display at least 3
+++ signs on the position sensor display line.
24. Observe the value indicated in the “Step Done” box. If the value is the
same as the value noted for the R1 position press the “Store Position”
button on the screen. If the value in the “Step Done” box is larger for the
R4 position than the R1 position press the “up arrow” icon until the R4
value equals the R1 value and press the “Store Position” button on the
screen. If the value in the “Step Done” box is lower for R4 position than
the value for the R1 position press the “Store Position” button on the
screen.
Note: If plus signs are not present in the “position sensor” row when
attempting to store position, continue to press “up arrow” key until at
least 3 plus signs appear then store position.
Press “√” then YES to exit.
Page 46 of 98
Chapter 7 – Checkout & Adjustment
Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
Reagent Area R5-R8
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Select Service/Motor Adjust/Sample Arm/Vert. Arm Motor.
Press “Home Position” key.
Insert 4ml bottle and adapter in positions R5 and R8.
Select Service/Motor Adjust/Sample Arm/Horiz. Arm Motor.
Press “Home Position” key
Press “ Next CCW Position” key until the arm is over R5 position. Press
“√” then NO to exit.
7. Select Service/Motor Adjust/Sample Arm/Vert. Arm Motor.
8. Select “R5-R8” from the menu under “Horizontal Arm Logical Area” on
the screen.
9. Press “Home Position” key. Then “Next Down Position” key once.
10. Increment downwards by pressing the “down arrow” icon until the needle
hits the bottom of the glass bottle, or the +++ signs change to - - - signs on
the position sensor display line.
11. If the probe hits the glass bottle bottom press the “up arrow “ icon to raise
the probe 5 to 7 steps. If the +++ signs changed to - - - signs on the
position sensor display line, press the “up arrow” icon to display at least 3
+++ signs on the position sensor display line.
12. Make a note of the value displayed in the “Step Done” box.
13. Press “√” then YES to exit.
14. Select Service/Motor Adjust/Sample Arm/Vert. Arm Motor
15. Press “Home Position” key
16. Select Service/Motor Adjust/Sample Arm/Horiz. Arm Motor.
17. Press “Home Position” key
18. Press “ Next CCW Position” key until the arm is over R8 position. Press
“√” then NO to exit.
19. Select Service/Motor Adjust/Sample Arm/Vert. Arm Motor.
20. Select “R5-R8” from the menu under “Horizontal Arm Logical Area” on
the screen.
21. Press “Home Position” key. Then “Next Down Position” key once.
22. Increment downwards by pressing the “down arrow” icon until the needle
hits the bottom of the glass bottle, or the +++ signs change to - - - signs on
the position sensor display line.
23. If the probe hits the glass bottle bottom press the “up arrow “ icon to raise
the probe 5 to 7 steps. If the +++ signs changed to - - - signs on the
position sensor display line, press the “up arrow” icon to display at least 3
+++ signs on the position sensor display line.
24. Observe the value indicated in the “Step Done” box. If the value is the
same as the value noted for the R5 position press the “Store Position”
button on the screen. If the value in the “Step Done” box is larger for the
R8 position than the R5 position press the “up arrow” icon until the R8
value equals the R5 value and press the “Store Position” button on the
screen. If the value in the “Step Done” box is lower for R8 position than
the value for the R5 position press the “Store Position” button on the
screen.
Chapter 7 – Checkout & Adjustment
Page 47 of 98
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
Note: If plus signs are not present in the “position sensor” row when
attempting to store position, continue to press “up arrow” key until at
least 3 plus signs appear then store position.
Press “√” then YES to exit.
Reagent Area R9-R12 (ACL ElitePro only)
1.
2.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Select Service/Motor Adjust/Sample Arm/Vert. Arm Motor.
Press “Home Position” key.
Insert 4ml bottle and adapter in positions R9 and R12.
Select Service/Motor Adjust/Sample Arm/Horiz. Arm Motor.
Press “Home Position” key
Press “ Next CCW Position” key until the arm is over R9 position. Press
“√” then NO to exit.
5. Select Service/Motor Adjust/Sample Arm/Vert. Arm Motor.
6. Select “R9-R12” from the menu under “Horizontal Arm Logical Area” on
the screen.
7. Press “Home Position” key. Then “Next Down Position” key once.
8. Increment downwards by pressing the “down arrow” icon until the needle
hits the bottom of the glass bottle, or the +++ signs change to - - - signs on
the position sensor display line.
9. If the probe hits the glass bottle bottom press the “up arrow “ icon to raise
the probe 5 to 7 steps. If the +++ signs changed to - - - signs on the
position sensor display line, press the “up arrow” icon to display at least 3
+++ signs on the position sensor display line.
10. Make a note of the value displayed in the “Step Done” box.
11. Press “√” then YES to exit.
12. Select Service/Motor Adjust/Sample Arm/Vert. Arm Motor
13. Press “Home Position” key
14. Select Service/Motor Adjust/Sample Arm/Horiz. Arm Motor.
15. Press “Home Position” key
16. Press “ Next CCW Position” key until the arm is over R8 position. Press
“√” then NO to exit.
17. Select Service/Motor Adjust/Sample Arm/Vert. Arm Motor.
18. Select “R9-R12” from the menu under “Horizontal Arm Logical Area” on
the screen.
19. Press “Home Position” key. Then “Next Down Position” key once.
20. Increment downwards by pressing the “down arrow” icon until the needle
hits the bottom of the glass bottle, or the +++ signs change to - - - signs on
the position sensor display line.
21. If the probe hits the glass bottle bottom press the “up arrow “ icon to raise
the probe 5 to 7 steps. If the +++ signs changed to - - - signs on the
position sensor display line, press the “up arrow” icon to display at least 3
+++ signs on the position sensor display line.
22. Observe the value indicated in the “Step Done” box. If the value is the
same as the value noted for the R9 position press the “Store Position”
button on the screen. If the value in the “Step Done” box is larger for the
Page 48 of 98
Chapter 7 – Checkout & Adjustment
Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
R12 position than the R9 position press the “up arrow” icon until the R12
value equals the R9 value and press the “Store Position” button on the
screen. If the value in the “Step Done” box is lower for R12 position than
the value for the R9 position press the “Store Position” button on the
screen.
Note: If plus signs are not present in the “position sensor” row when
attempting to store position, continue to press “up arrow” key until at
least 3 plus signs appear then store position.
Press “√” then YES to exit.
7.6.5
Autosampler motor
This procedure is designed to verify and adjust (if required) the central phase of the
Home Position of the motor. This is to match the motor phases with the optical sensor
reading on the encoder disk. It’s also possible to use it to verify the functionality of
the stepper motor and of the optical sensor.
1
2
Turn the Instrument On. Then access the Service program main menu.
On the windows like menu enter Service then Motor Adjust then Autosampler
Motor. The system displays the screen below.
3
Touch the Home Position button on the screen. The system moves the
Autosampler motor until the Home Position is achieved.
Verify that the dynamic labels “HOME SENSOR” and “POSITION SENSOR” are
both in ON condition.
4
Chapter 7 – Checkout & Adjustment
Page 49 of 98
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
5
With the step increment set to 1, repeatedly press cw (or ccw) arrow button on the
screen. The status bars of both the home and position sensors show the actual
condition of optical switch (+: light; -: dark).
6 Continue to press cw (or ccw) until status changes from light to dark, then reverse
motion by touching the opposite key until the status of the optical sensors
becomes dark again after the light window.
7 It is now possible to determine the width of the optical window (notch on the
encoder disk).
8 Press the arrow keys cw (or ccw) to set the middle of the optical window
(- - - - + + + + + - - - -).
9 Check that the present phase matches the stored phase on the dynamic labels. If
phases are equal then the Autosampler Motor is centered on the encoder and the
test is over. Press “√” to exit.
10 If not press “STORE PHASE” if active. Unavailability of the “STORE PHASE”
key indicates an illegal condition of the current motor phase exist. Touch once cw
(or ccw) arrow key to restore legal motor phase condition and then touch “STORE
PHASE”.
11 Press “√” to return to the Service main menu.
NOTE: Check the Autosampler Movement Assembly “Backlash” (lag between the
belt, pulley and motor). Check the backlash as follows.
From the windows like menu, enter Service, then select Motors Adjust,
Autosampler. Touch the Home button on the screen to Home the
Autosampler. Press the cw or ccw arrow buttons until the “Home Position”
sensor status changes from “+” light, to “-“ dark. While observing the status
of the Home Sensor press the oppsite direction arrow and continue pressing
the arrow until the Home Sensor status changes from “-“ dark to “+” light.
There should be 5 or less minus signs “-“ prior to the status changing for the
Home Sensor. If there is greater than 5 minus signs the autosampler has
excessive play between the belt, pulley and motor and the autosampler should
be replaced.
- - - - + + + + acceptable backlash
- - - - - - + + + + Unacceptable
backlash
7.6.6
Sample / Reagent Dilutor motor
This procedure is designed to verify and adjust (if required) the central phase of the
Home Position of the motor. This is to match the motor phases with the optical sensor
reading on the encoder disk. It’s also possible use it to verify the functionality of the
stepper motor and of the optical sensor.
1
2
Turn the Instriment On. Then access the Service program main menu.
On the windows like menu enter Service then Motor Adjust then Dilutor Motors
and Sample / Reagent Dilutor Motor. The system displays the screen below.
Page 50 of 98
Chapter 7 – Checkout & Adjustment
Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
3
Touch the Home Position button on the screen. The system moves the
Sample/Reagent Dilutor Motor fully upward.
4 Verify that the dynamic labels that the “HOME SENSOR” is in ON condition.
5 Touch the “NEXT DOWN POSITION” to lower the Sample/Reagent Dilutor
Motor to the full down position.
6 Verify that the dynamic labels that the “HOME SENSOR” is in OFF condition.
7 Press “√” to return to the Service main menu.
Note: The Sample/Reagent Dilutor Motors don’t require phases to be stored.
7.6.7
Transport (Slider) motor (ACL ElitePro only)
This procedure is designed to verify and adjust (if required) the central phase of the
Home Position of the motor. This is to match the motor phases with the optical sensor
reading on the encoder disk. It’s also possible to use it to verify the functionality of
the stepper motor and of the optical sensor.
1
2
Turn the Instrument On. Then access the Service program main menu.
On the windows like menu enter Service then Motor Adjust and Slider Motor. The
system displays the screen below.
Chapter 7 – Checkout & Adjustment
Page 51 of 98
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
3
Touch the Home Position button on the screen. The system moves the Rotor
Transport (slider) under the Rotor Stack.
4 Verify that the dynamic labels “HOME SENSOR” and “POSITION SENSOR” are
both in the ON condition.
5 Touch the “NEXT CCW POSITION” to move the Rotor Transport (slider) to the
left (rotor picking position).
6 Verify that the dynamic labels “HOME SENSOR” and “POSITION SENSOR” are
respectively in OFF and ON condition.
7 Press “√” to return to the Service main menu.
Note: The Transport (Slider) Motor doesn’t require phases to be stored.
7.6.8
Rotor Arm Horizontal Motor (ACL ElitePro only)
This procedure is designed to verify and adjust (if required) the central phase of the
Home Position of the motor. This is to match the motor phases with the optical sensor
reading on the encoder disk. It’s also possible use it to verify the functionality of the
stepper motor and of the optical sensor.
1
2
Turn the Instrument On. Then access the Service program main menu.
On the windows like menu enter Service then Motor Adjust then Rotor Arm
Motors and Horiz. Rotor Arm Motor. The system displays the screen below.
Page 52 of 98
Chapter 7 – Checkout & Adjustment
Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
Manually raise the Rotor Arm to the rotation height.
Touch on the tool bar the small icon of the analysis compartment cover to raise
the cover (the icon acts as toggles switch to raise/lower the cover).
Touch the Home Position button on the screen. System moves the Rotor Arm
Horizontal Motor over the rotor picking/waste position.
Verify that the dynamic labels “HOME SENSOR” and “POSITION SENSOR” are
both in ON condition.
With the step increment set to 1, repeatedly press cw (or ccw) arrow button on the
screen. The status bars of both the home and position sensors show the actual
condition of optical switch (+: light; -: dark).
Continue to press cw (or ccw) arrow until status changes from light to dark (use
for reference only the home sensor windows), then reverse motion by touching the
opposite key until the status of the optical sensor becomes dark again after the
light window.
It is now possible to determine the width of the home sensor optical window
(notch on the encoder disk).
Press the arrow keys cw (or ccw) to set the middle of the optical window
(- - - - + + + + + - - - -).
Check that the present phase matches the stored phase on the dynamic labels. If
phases are equal then the Rotor Arm Horizontal Motor is centred on the encoder
and the test is over. Press “√” to exit.
If not press “STORE PHASE” if active. Unavailability of the “STORE PHASE”
key indicates an illegal condition of the current motor phase exist. Touch the cw
(or ccw) arrow key to restore legal motor phase condition and then touch “STORE
PHASE”.
Press “√” to return to the Service main menu.
Chapter 7 – Checkout & Adjustment
Page 53 of 98
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
7.6.9
Rotor Arm vertical motor (ACL ElitePro only)
This procedure is designed to verify and adjust (if required) the central phase of the
Home Position of the motor. This is to match the motor phases with the optical sensor
reading on the encoder disk. It’s also possible use it to verify the functionality of the
stepper motor and of the optical sensor.
1 Turn the Instument On. Then access the Service program main menu.
2 On the windows like menu enter Service then Motor Adjust then Rotor Arm
Motors and Vert. Rotor Arm Motor. The system displays the screen below.
Horizontal Arm
Logical Area
Waste Position T
Current Value
0
3
Touch the Home Position button on the screen. The system raises the Rotor Arm
to the rotation height.
4 Verify that the dynamic labels “HOME SENSOR” and “POSITION SENSOR” are
respectively in OFF and ON condition.
5 Touch the “NEXT DOWN POSITION” to lower the rotor arm to the bottom
position.
6 Verify that the dynamic labels “HOME SENSOR” and “POSITION SENSOR” are
both in ON condition.
7 Press “√” to return to the Service main menu.
Note: The Rotor Arm Vertical Motor doesn’t require phases to be stored.
7.7 Module positioning
This service program sub-menu includes the utilities designed to allow matching of
the major system modules. Following are the relevant assemblies.
•
•
•
•
•
Autosampler assy.
Sample Arm assy.
Rotor Holder assy.
Rotor Arm assy.
Rotor Transport assy.
Page 54 of 98
Chapter 7 – Checkout & Adjustment
Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
The Module Positioning Tests options are available under the service programs main
menu. On the windows like menu, the sequence Service - Module Positioning Test
gives access to the following operational tests:
•
•
•
•
ST – SA – RH Test
RA – SL Test
RA – RH Test
RA – SL – RH Test
To perform a complete alignment of all the modules in the instrument the following
sequence must be followed. Note that the Sample Arm is the “Reference Point”. The
sample arm drive assy vertical shaft must be centered in the fluidic plate opening and
the arm must be aligned to the rinse/waste reservoir prior to performing any other
alignments. All other alignments are referenced to the Sample Arm. Also, verify that
all motor phase settings are correct prior to performing module alignments. The
module alignment sequence is:
Sample Arm
Autosampler
Rotor Module
REM
NOTE: Sample Arm vertical shaft must be centered in the fluidic plate prior to
performing any further alignments. Use alignment tool to center shaft to fluidic plate.
All above modules have to properly match to each other to insure proper picking and
delivery of samples and reagents as well as rotors for the analysis. Should any module
loose its pre-set position (e.g. due to the fact it was dismantled and re-fitted for
service purposes) it must be re-adjusted. The following table provides a summary of
tests to be done based upon the module that was replaced/adjusted, to restore the
proper working conditions.
Module replaced
Sample Arm assy
Autosampler Assy
Rotor Holder assy
Needles Block
Assy
Rotor Stack Assy
Rotor Arm assy
R.E.M. (Rotor
Exchange Module)
centring
Rotor Tilt Adjust.
R.E.M. Self Test
Mechanical
reference to
point/assembly
Needles
Wash/Waste Pot
Sample Arm
Sample Arm
Rotor Holder
Adjustment / Verification
Test
Refer to
section
ST – SA – RH Test
7.7.1
ST – SA – RH Test
ST – SA – RH Test
Needles Position
7.7.2
7.7.3
7.7.4
Rotor Transport
RA – SL – RH Test
Rotor Transport
RA – SL Test
Rotor Holder Snap RA – RH Test
7.7.5
7.7.6
7.7.7
Fluidic Plate
7.7.8
7.7.9
RA – RH Test
RA – SL – RH Test
Chapter 7 – Checkout & Adjustment
Page 55 of 98
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
7.7.1
Sample Arm assy
The Sample Arm must be aligned with respect to the needles Wash/Waste Pot and
represents the mechanical reference to the other major assemblies. It is recommended
to verify the proper positioning of the Sample Arm prior to starting any position
adjustment on other modules.
In case the Sample Arm module was adjusted/replaced the following procedure needs
to be completely carried out, in other situations follow it only for verification.
Materials / tools necessary for the test:
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
- Needles Waste Centring Tool
P/N 190515-00
- Sample Arm centring tool
P/N 190513-00
- Needles Position Tool
P/N 181039-41
Position the Sample Arm module in place from the bottom of the system and
secure it by using the 3 black column screws but without tightening completely.
Re-connect cables as required.
Insert the Sample Arm Centering Tool (P/N 190513-00) on the shaft of the
Sample Arm Movement assy, between the shaft and the Fluidic Plate hole.
Tighten the 3 black column screws making sure that the Sample Arm Movement
shaft is in the middle of the Fluidic Plate hole.
Remove the Sample Arm Centering Tool (P/N 190513-00).
Carefully tilt up the Instrument by holding the keyboard drawer guides and fold
back the two stands and then lower the instrument on the bench.
Replace the needles Wash/Waste Pot adapter with the Needles Waste Centring
Tool (P/N 190515-00).
Turn On the Instrument then access at the Service program main menu.
On the windows like menu enter Service then Module Positioning test and (ST –
SA – RH Test). Upon entry the system performs motors initialization and displays
the screen below.
Page 56 of 98
Chapter 7 – Checkout & Adjustment
Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
10 Put the Sample Arm on the Sample Arm Movement shaft (at the bottom) using
caution not to lose the current shaft position.
11 Manually move the Sample Arm (with the needle block assembled) over the
needles Waste/Rinse Reservoir.
12 Lower the Sample Arm Movement shaft to allow the Needles Block to enter the
Waste Centering tool.
13 Adjust the Sample Arm (rotational and horizontal adjustment) to match the 2
needles with the 2 reference points on the Waste Centering tool.
Note: Use the 2 screws located on the top of the aluminium support to set the depth of
the Needles Block assy (if required).
14 Tighten the 3 setscrews located at 120° on the aluminium support that holds the
Sample Arm in place. Tighten the 2 allen head screws that secure the horizontal
movement of the arm.
15 Place the Needles Position Centring Tool (P/N 181039-41) on the Rotor Holder.
16 Raise the Sample Arm Movement assy. Touch the key “NEXT POSITION”, the
Sample Arm moves over the Rotor Holder and lowers to dispensing position.
17 Adjust the Needles Block height by setting the needles tip on the 2 white points of
the Needles Centring tool surface.
Note: Loosen and secure the Needles Block by using the white knob located on the
rear of the Sample Arm. If during this check out it is necessary to move the Rotor
Holder module position then perform the R.E.M. module positioning as described in
the section 7.7.7.
18 Remove the Wash Centering tool from the Wash/Waste Pot and install the
Waste/Rinse Reservoir.
19 Raise the Sample Arm Movement assy. Touch the key “NEXT POSITION”, the
Sample Arm moves over the Autosampler to position #1of the Sample Tray.
20 Remove the Needles Position Tool P/N 181039-41 from the Rotor Holder.
21 Touching the key “NEXT POSITION” the Sample Arm raises, moves over the
Rinse Waste Pot and lowers on the Rinse Waste Reservoir.
22 Visually inspect that needless are centered with respect to the Rinse Waste
Reservoir.
23 Touch the icon “STOP” and then “Ok” to return at the Service main menu.
Note: Before resume normal operation it is advisable to perform a Needle Sensor Test
as detailed in section 7.4.1.
7.7.2
Autosampler assy
The Autosampler must be aligned with respect to the Sample Arm. It is recommended
to verify the proper positioning of the Sample Arm prior to starting any position
adjustment on other modules.
If the Autosampler module was repaired/replaced the following procedure needs to be
completely carried out, in other situations follow it only for verification.
Chapter 7 – Checkout & Adjustment
Page 57 of 98
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
Materials / tools necessary for the test:
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
- 0.5 mL disposable sample cups or
primary tubes
Position the Autosampler assy in place from the bottom of the system. Secure it
by using the 4 black column screws but without tightening completely.
Re-connect cables as required.
Tighten the 4 black column screws making sure that the Autosampler shaft is in
the middle of the fluidic plate hole.
Install the inner ring optical sensor and lock it in place.
Carefully tilt up the Instrument by holding the keyboard drawer guides folding
back the two stands and then lower the instrument on the bench.
Put the grey Flange Adjustable in place on the top of the Autosampler movement.
Secure it by the 2 screws but not completely tightened (it shall still be possible to
turn it by hand).
Turn On the Instrument then access the Service program main menu.
On the windows like menu enter Service then Module positioning test and (ST –
SA – RH Test). Upon entry the system performs modules initialization and
displays the screen below.
9
Touch the key “NEXT POSITION”, the Sample Arm moves over to the Rotor
Holder and lower to dispensing position.
10 Load a Sample Tray with a 0.5 mL cup in the position #1. Put it on the Flange
Adjustable.
11 Touch the key “NEXT POSITION” again, the Sample Arm raises, moves over to
the Autosampler housing and lowers on the position #1 of the Sample Tray.
12 Visually inspect that Sample Needle is centered in the cup. If off-center gently
turn the Sample Tray to achieve best fit.
Note: May be necessary to adjust the Autosampler assy if the Sample Needle is not in
the middle of the cup. In this case, to adjust the Autosampler Movement position
loosen the 4 black column screws, move the Autosampler to achieve best fit and then
tighten the 4 black column screws again.
Visually inspect that (with the Sample Tray inside) the distance between the Sample
Tray and the external wall of the Autosampler housing circumference is at least 2mm.
Page 58 of 98
Chapter 7 – Checkout & Adjustment
Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
It’s also advisable to test the middle and inner rings positions (#2 and A1) by using
together the Motor Adjust options for the Autosampler and for the Sample Arm
Horizontal Motor. During this test on #1, #2 and A1 it is not possible to align all 3
positions perfectly, so obtain a best fit alignment.
The following positions may also be tested.
Sample tray
rotation
0° - 360° (Home)
90°
180°
270°
Outer Ring
Mid Ring
Inner Ring
1
11
21
31
2
12
22
32
A1
None
A6
None
13 Touch the toggle key “TO RAISE / LOWER ARM”, the Sample Arm moves up
and down. Repeat the operation to verify proper centering.
14 With the Sample Arm fully raised and paying attention that you are not moving
the Flange Adjustable from current position, remove the Sample Tray and tighten
the two fixing screws.
15 Refit the Sample Tray with the cup in position #1 and verify that the Sample
Needle is centered.
16 Once proper matching is achieved touch the icon “STOP” and then “OK” to
return at the Service main menu.
7.7.3
Rotor holder assy
The Rotor Holder must be aligned with respect to the Sample Arm. It is recommended
to verify the proper positioning of the Sample Arm prior starting any position
adjustment on other modules.
If the Rotor Holder module was repaired/replaced the following procedure needs to be
completely carried out, in other situations follow it only for verification.
Materials / tools necessary for the test:
1
2
3
4
5
- Needles Position Tool P/N 181039-41
- Disposable rotor
Put the Rotor Holder assy in place from the bottom of the system. Secure it by
using the 3 black column screws but without tightening completely.
Re-connect cables and optic fibres as required.
Carefully tilt up the Instrument by holding the keyboard drawer guides and
folding back the two stands then lower the instrument on the bench.
Turn On the Instrument then access at the Service program main menu.
On the windows like menu enter Service then Module Positioning test and (ST –
SA – RH Test). Upon entry the system performs the modules initialization and
displays the screen below.
Chapter 7 – Checkout & Adjustment
Page 59 of 98
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
6
7
Place the Needles Position Tool (P/N 181039-41) on the Rotor Holder.
Touch the key “NEXT POSITION”, the Sample Arm raise, moves over the Rotor
Holder and lower to dispensing position.
8 Adjust the Rotor Holder position to achieve best fit between the needles tip and
the 2 white points on the Needles Centering tool surface then tighten the 3 black
column screws.
9 Touch the toggle key “TO RAISE / LOWER ARM”, the Sample Arm will move up
and down. Repeat this operation to insure proper centering.
10 Once proper matching is achieved Touch the icon “STOP” and then “OK” to
return at the Service main menu.
Note: Once Rotor Holder has been centered with respect to the Sample Arm then
perform verification against the R.E.M. (see section 7.7.7. for the details).
Before normal operation is resumed it is advisable to perform a Needle Sensor Test as
detailed in the sub-section 7.4.1 and a Needles Position test available in the
Diagnostic menu using a plastic rotor.
7.7.4
Needles Block Assy
This test has the purpose to Adjust/Verify the Needles Block Position every time that
is needed (Replacement, Maintenance, accidental hit or for service action).
Materials / tools necessary:
- Needles Position Tool P/N 181039-41
- Brand new rotor.
WARNING !
BIOLOGICAL HAZARDS EXIST. Avoid touching, with bare hands, any parts
of the system which may have come in contact with potentially infectious fluids.
ALWAYS wear gloves when performing any type of Maintenance/Service action
on this area.
Page 60 of 98
Chapter 7 – Checkout & Adjustment
Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
1
2
3
4
Turn the Instrument On. Then access the Analytical Main Program.
On the tool bar touch the small icon of the Analysis Compartment Cover to
raise the cover (the icon acts as a toggle switch to raise/lower the Rotor
Cover).
On the windows like menu enter Diagnostic then Needles Position. The
system initializes the Sample Arm, the Rotor Holder and displays the screen
below.
Pushing the Rotor Holder Snap Button, properly insert the Needles Centering
Tool with the side “A” facing up.
Reference Dots
A
5
6
7
8
Press Raise/Lower Arm. The Sample Arm is lowered over the Rotor Holder.
Using the knob located on the rear of the Sample Arm adjust the height of the
Needles Block so that the needle tips come in contact with the upper surface
of the Needles Position Tool. During this operation pay attention to put them
in a vertical position.
Secure the Needles Block by tightening the relevant knob without losing the
current position.
Make sure that the needle tips match with the 2 reference dots of the tool. If
the needle tips don’t match then verify the Sample Arm and the Rotor Holder
positioning as described in the section 7.7.
Chapter 7 – Checkout & Adjustment
Page 61 of 98
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
9
10
11
12
13
14
Once the Needles Block adjustment with the tool is achieved, press the
Raise/Lower Arm button. The arm is raised. Remove the Needles Centering
Tool.
Pushing the Rotor Holder Snap Button, properly insert a brand new plastic
rotor.
Press Raise/Lower Arm. The Sample Arm is lowered over the plastic rotor on
the Rotor Holder.
Visually inspect for the proper position of the needles in the center of the 2
holes of the cuvette.
Press Raise/Lower Arm. The Sample Arm is raised. By touching the Rotate
button (now active) the plastic rotor on the Rotor Holder is rotated 90°.
Repeat steps 11 thru 13 to be sure that in the 4 test positions the Needles
Block adjustment is acceptable.
Note: The needles alignment may not be identical in the 4 rotor cuvettes. However
insure that the needles enter the cuvette holes without touching the edges, etc. for
each test position.
A
B
C
Sample probe centred
or biased Left
15
When the needles adjustment is acceptable press the red “Stop” icon on the
tool bar and confirm the operation with OK to end the test.
Page 62 of 98
Chapter 7 – Checkout & Adjustment
Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
7.7.5
Rotor Stack assy (ACL ElitePro only)
The Rotor Stack must be aligned with the Rotor Transport (slider). Both the Rotors
Stack and the Rotor Transport (slider) are sub-assemblies of the R.E.M. (Rotor
Exchange Module). The R.E.M. itself is aligned with the Rotor Holder assy.
This procedure is designed to center the Rotor Stack (silos) to the Rotor Transport
(slider).
Materials / tools necessary for the test:
- Disposable rotor
1. Turn On the Instrument then access the Service program main menu.
2. Fill the Rotor Stack with new rotors.
3. On the windows like menu enter Service then Module Positioning Test. Select
RA-SL-RH test.
4. During the test visually inspect for the proper feeding of rotors from the Rotor
Stack to the Rotor Transport (slider). Rotors should drop freely and align on the
slider.
5. If the Rotor Transport (slider) is not aligned then loosen the 3 locking screws that
secure the Rotor Stack (located below the R.E.M. support Plate).
6. Gently move the Rotor Stack assembly to obtain best alignment. Also, the slider
“Home” sensor and/or flag may be adjusted left or right to set the stop position of
the slider under the rotor stack.
7. Secure the Rotors Stacks in place by tightening the 3 locking screws again.
8. Verify the proper position of the Rotor Stack repeating the RA-SL-RH test until
confident that adjustment is acceptable.
Note: The Rotor Stack Cover Sensor needs to detect the presence of the magnet in the
cover to perform the test correctly (use an external magnet).
7.7.6
Rotor Arm assy (ACL ElitePro only)
The Rotor Arm assy must be aligned with respect to the Rotor Transport assy. Both
the Rotor Arm assy and the Rotor Transport are sub-assemblies of the R.E.M. (Rotor
Exchange Module). The R.E.M. must be aligned to the Rotor Holder assy.
If the Rotor Arm was repaired/replaced the following procedure needs to be
completely carried out, in other case follow it only for verification.
Materials / tools necessary for the test:
1
2
3
- Rotor Arm Centring Tool
P/N 190503-00
- Disposable rotor
Turn On the Instrument and access the Service program main menu.
On the windows like menu enter Service then Motor Adjust and Slider Motor.
Touch in sequence “Home Position” then “Next CCW Position”. Touch “√” to
return at Service main menu and touch “NO” on the dialog box “De-energize
motor?”
Put the Rotor Arm alignment bushing on Rotor Transport.
Chapter 7 – Checkout & Adjustment
Page 63 of 98
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
4
5
On the windows like menu perform the sequence Service – Motor Adjust – Rotor
Arm Motors – Rotor Arm Horiz. Motor. Touch in sequence “Home Position”,
then touch “√” to return to service main menu and “NO” on the dialog box “Deenergise motor?”
On the windows like menu enter Service then Motor Adjust then Rotor Arm
Motors and Rotor Arm Vert. Motor. The system displays the screen below.
Horizontal Arm
Logical Area
Waste Position T
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
Current Value
0
Touch the key “Home Position”. Now both the Rotor Arm and the Transport
motors are initialized.
Install now the Rotor Arm on its shaft (do not tighten the 3 setscrews). Raise the
analysis compartment cover by touching the relevant icon on the screen tool bar.
Touch on the current value of the window “Chose Step Increment”. The value
goes in reverse video.
Press “Canc/Delete” on the main keyboard to delete the value. Key in 40 as new
value.
Press the cw arrow in the left bottom side of the screen. The Rotor Arm will lower
by 40 steps.
Repeat last operation as many times as necessary to lower the Rotor Arm to the
Rotor Arm alignment bushing (in the meantime visually inspect for best fit, if
necessary manually guide the Rotor Arm paying attention to don’t move the shaft
from the previously set position).
Once the Rotor Arm is lowered and matching achieved tighten the 2 screws on the
Rotor Arm aluminium support.
Gently tighten the 3 setscrews paying attention not to move the shaft from the
previously set position.
The adjustment is now complete, press “√” to return to service main menu. Touch
“YES” on the dialog box “De-energize motor?”
Remove the alignment bushing and place a new rotor on the Rotor Transport.
On the windows like menu enter Service then Module Positioning Test and RA –
SL – RH Test.
The instrument exercises the Rotor Arm and Rotor Transport in sequence. Let the
system operate for a suitable number of cycles and verify for proper matching,
touch “Abort” once confident that adjustment is acceptable.
Page 64 of 98
Chapter 7 – Checkout & Adjustment
Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
7.7.6.1 Rotor Arm Vertical Height Adjustment (ACL ElitePro only)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
From service environment, press “cover open” icon.
Select Service/Motor Adjust/Rotor Arm Motor/Horiz. Arm Motor.
Press the “home position” key.
Push the “next CW position” key. The pliers will move on top of the rotor holder.
Remove tool p/n 190503-00 if necessary, from transport plate and place a rotor
onto the plate.
6. Push the “next CCW position” key. The pliers will move over the transport plate.
7. Press “√” then NO to exit.
8. Select Service/Motor Adjust/Rotor Arm Motor/Vert. Arm Motor.
Horizontal Arm
Logical Area
Waste Position T
Current Value
0
9. Select “Waste Position” for horizontal arm logical area.
10. Press “Home Position”.
11. Open the pliers arms manually by pressing the pin inwards.
12. While holding the pliers open, press the “Next Down” position Key.
13. Release the pin and verify that the pliers arms do not lift the rotor from the plate
(pliers are too low) or sit on the edge of the rotor (pliers are too high). Use the “up
arrow” or “down arrow” buttons to make appropriate adjustment. Note: Over the
Waste Position the arm may be adjusted +/- 27 steps.
14. Press “store position” , then YES.
15. Press “Home Position”.
16. Press “√” then NO to exit.
17. Select Service/Motor Adjust/Rotor Arm Motor/Horiz. Arm Motor.
18. Manually place rotor in the pliers arms.
19. Push the “next CCW position” key.
20. Press “√” then NO to exit.
21. Select Service/Motor Adjust/Rotor Arm Motor/Vert. Arm Motor.
22. Select “Rotor Position” for horizontal arm logical area.
23. Press “Home Position”.
24. Press “Next Down Position”. Check for alignment between the the pliers and the
rotor holder. The rotor should drop perfectly over the snap assembly and onto the
Chapter 7 – Checkout & Adjustment
Page 65 of 98
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
rotor holder. Switch between “next up position” and “next down position” buttons
as needed.
Note: To center the pliers onto the rotor, you may need to loosen the five set
screws located on top of the REM assembly and move the REM assembly left or
right, forwards or backwards to achieve perfect centering.
25. With a rotor seated on the rotor holder and the pliers in home position, open pliers
manually by pushing solenoid pin in.
26. Press “next down position”. Verify that the pliers arms do not lift the rotor from
the plate (pliers are too low) or sit on the edge of the rotor (pliers are too high).
Use the “up arrow” or “down arrow” buttons to make appropriate adjustment.
Note: Over the Rotor Position the arm may be adjusted +/- 7 steps.
27. Press “Store position” key, then YES.
28. Press “home position”.
29. Press “√” then NO to exit.
30. Select Service/Motor Adjust/Rotor Arm Motor/Horiz. Arm Motor.
31. Press “home position”. Verify that the pliers do not make contact with the fluidic
plate during movement. If contact is made, make the necessary adjustments and
verify the stored positions for the vertical motor.
Press “√” then YES to exit.
7.7.7
R.E.M. (Rotor Exchange Module) centering (ACL ElitePro only)
The Rotor Exchange Module is a major assembly that incorporates Rotor Stack, Rotor
Transport and Rotor Arm assy. The R.E.M. must be aligned with respect to the Rotor
Holder.
This procedure is designed to center the R.E.M. to the Rotor Holder.
Materials / tools necessary for the test:
- Disposable rotor
1
2
Turn On the Instrument then access the Service program main menu.
On the windows like menu enter Service then Motor Adjust then Rotor Arm
Motors and Rotor Arm Vert. Motor. Touch “Home Position”, and then touch “√”
to return to service main menu. Touch “NO” on the dialog box “De-energize
motor?”
3 Raise the Rotor Cover by touching the relevant icon on the screen tool bar.
4 On the windows like menu enter Service then Motor Adjust then Rotor Motor.
Touch “Home Position”, and then touch “√” to return to service main menu.
Touch “NO” on the dialog box “De-energize motor?”
5 On the windows like menu enter Service then Motor Adjust then Rotor Arm
Motors and Rotor Arm Horiz. Motor. Touch in sequence “Home Position”, “Next
CCW Position”. Touch “√” to return to service main menu. Touch “NO” on the
dialog box “De-energize motor?”
6 On the windows like menu enter Service then Motor Adjust then Rotor Arm
Motors and Rotor Arm Vert. Motor. The system displays the screen below.
Page 66 of 98
Chapter 7 – Checkout & Adjustment
Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
Horizontal Arm
Logical Area
Waste Position T
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Current Value
0
Touch “Home Position” and then on the current value of the window “Chose Step
Increment”. The value goes in reverse video.
Press “Canc/Delete” on the main keyboard to delete the value. Key in 40 as new
value.
Press the cw arrow in the left bottom side of the screen. The Rotor Arm will lower
by 40 steps.
Repeat last operation as many times as necessary to lower the Rotor Arm down
until it actuates the Rotor Holder Snap mechanism located in the center of the
Rotor Holder. Visually inspect for best matching. Set “Step Incerment” back to 1.
If off center loosen the 5 R.E.M. locking screws located over the Fluidic Plate,
gently move the whole R.E.M. assembly to obtain the best matching then secure
the R.E.M. in place again.
The adjustment is now complete, press “√” to return to service main menu. Touch
“YES” on the dialog box “De-energize motor?”.
Manually load a new rotor on the Rotor Holder.
On the windows like menu enter Service then Module Positioning Test and RA –
RH Test.
The instrument exercises the Rotor Arm performing repeated picking/loading of
rotor from/to the Rotor Holder. Let the system operate for a suitable number of
cycles and verify for proper operation, touch “Abort” once confident that
adjustment is acceptable.
Note: While performing RA-RH test check that rotor is carried freely to/from the
Rotor Holder. Should the rotor touch the fluidic plate during the motion then follow
the “Rotor Arm Tilt Adjustment” procedure as detailed in section 7.7.8.
7.7.8
Rotor Arm tilt adjustment (ACL ElitePro only)
If during the Rotor Arm movement the rotor carried touches the Fluidic Plate, it is
necessary to repeat the Rotor Arm Centring procedure as described in the sub-section
7.7.6 with an additional operation at point 13. Before tightening the 3 setscrews put
Chapter 7 – Checkout & Adjustment
Page 67 of 98
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
the aluminium support at the top of the shaft housing (about 2 mm over) to lift up the
Rotor Arm.
If the problem persists it can be solved also with the tilt up of the Rotor Arm through
the setscrew located below the electromagnet pin.
To tilt up the Rotor Arm proceed as follows:
1
2
Remove the Rotor Arm Electro-Magnet.
Locate the setscrew which allows tilt adjustment (see figure below).
Setscrew
located under
electromagnet shaft
3
4
5
6
7
Loosen a little the 2 cap screws that hold the Rotor Arm in place.
Turn cw the setscrew to raise the Rotor Arm and obtain best condition (inserting a
rotor in the Rotor Arm and then, with the vertical motor raised, inspecting the
distance from the bottom of the rotor and the Fluidic Plate).
Tighten the 2 cap screws that hold the Rotor Arm on the aluminium support.
Replace the Rotor Arm Electromagnet paying attention to the distance of the
magnet and the run of the pin (too close won’t open enough; too far jam and won’t
close).
Perform the R.E.M. self test as detailed in section 7.7.9. to insure proper fit.
NOTE: Also insure that the Hex Nut securing the two rotor arms is tightened
sufficiently to allow the arms to securely grasp the rotor edge in the arm slot. If the
Hex Nut is loose one arm may be lower or higher than the other and may ride above
the rotor edge preventing the rotor from being picked up.
7.7.9
R.E.M. (Rotor Exchange Module) self test (ACL ElitePro only)
The Rotor Exchange Module is a major assembly that incorporates the Rotor Stack,
Rotor Transport and Rotor Arm. The R.E.M. must be aligned to the Rotor Holder.
The procedure is detailed in section 7.7.7.
Page 68 of 98
Chapter 7 – Checkout & Adjustment
Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
This test is designed to verify the proper alignment of the major sub-assembles of the
Rotor Exchange Module and the Rotor Holder.
Materials / tools necessary for the test:
- Disposable rotors
1. Turn On the Instrument then access the Service program main menu.
2. Load a stack of 10 new rotors in the Rotor Stack. Empty the Rotor Waste
container and place it back onto its housing.
3. On the windows like menu enter Service then Module positioning test and RA
– SL – RH test.
4. The instrument initializes the motors of the R.E.M., the Rotor Holder and the
Rotor Cover.
5. Once initialization is completed the system starts loading / unloading rotors
until the stack of rotors is exhausted.
Note: If the R.E.M. cover is open or is out of place then the Rotor Stack Cover Sensor
detects this condition and the system, for safety purposes, won’t allow opening of the
Rotor Stack Upper Electro-Magnet. To override this situation and achieve a good
visual inspection without the R.E.M. Cover, put a little magnet on the magnetic sensor
(try both the 2 sides of the magnet to find the proper polarization).
Visually inspect for proper movement of rotors. If any problem is present then
perform the relevant check out and adjustment procedure.
7.8 System Dilutors Test
This service program sub-menu includes two different options, these are available via
Service then Dilutors Test:
7.8.1
7.8.2
Dilutor Test
Volume Check
7.8.1
Dilutor Test
This test is designed to verify the overall system precision. The test is automatically
performed by the instrument and performs three series of six replicates with each
solution at three different concentrations (undiluted, diluted 1/2 and diluted 1/4).
CV % are then calculated for each series, and reported on the screen. The test can be
configured for one Channel (Coagulimetric / Chromogenic) and one dilutor (sample /
reagent) at a time. Any imprecision of the system could be generated either by the
fluidics system (Fluidic parts obstruction, Electro-Valves, air bubbles and/or dilutors
compensation value) or by the optical system (light sources and/or detectors).
Chapter 7 – Checkout & Adjustment
Page 69 of 98
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
Note: Should this test fail, it would be advisable to perform the “Optical channel
check out and adjustment procedure” to verify the system optics. If the system optics
pass the tests then troubleshoot the fluidic system.
Following are described the procedures to test the Reagent Dilutor with both the
Coagulimetric and Chromogenic Channels.
•
•
Reagent Dilutor Test with Coagulimetric Channel.
Reagent Dilutor Test with Chromogenic Channel.
Note: To test the Sample Dilutor with both Channels, set the Loading Type with
“Sample Dilutor”. The only additional operation required is to temporarily exchange
(only for the duration of the test with the Sample Dilutor) the two fluidic tubes that
are connected to the Needles Block.
•
Reagent Dilutor Test with Coagulimetric Channel
Materials / tools necessary for the test:
- Brand new rotors.
- Wash-Reference Emulsion.
- Clean, empty 4 mL reagent vial
Precaution
Make sure that the instrument has been turned On for at least 20 minutes (warm-up of
light source and thermoregulation) prior going through the following procedure:
1
2
3
Gain access to the service program menu.
Thoroughly clean, using distilled water and a cotton swab, the optical path (holes)
of the Rotor Holder, as well as the optical sensor window and optic fiber of the
Coagulimetric Channel.
On the windows like menu enter Service then Dilutors Test and Dilutor Test. The
system presents the screen below.
Page 70 of 98
Chapter 7 – Checkout & Adjustment
Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
4
5
6
7
8
9
Select on the screen “Coagulimetric” on the left window and “Reagent Dilutor”
on the right window.
Load 4 ml of Wash-Reference Emulsion into a clean, empty 4 mL reagent vial and
place it with its adapter in the reagent position R1.
Load 4 ml of distilled water into a clean, empty 4 mL reagent vial and place it
with its adapter in the reagent position R4.
Place a brand new rotor into the analysis compartment.
Press “Start in Manual Rotor Loading”. The instrument will load the rotor
cuvettes picking the Wash-Reference Emulsion and the distilled water from the
reagent vials by using the reagent needle and the Reagent Dilutor.
Wait for the completion of rotor loading and acquisition cycle then verify that the
following results are obtained.
CV% (cuvette # 1 to # 6)
CV% (cuvette # 7 to # 12)
CV% (cuvette # 13 to # 18)
CV% (Reference)
Mean Reference
R2
:<=4
: < = 4.5
:<=5
:<=3
: 2.2 V to 3.0 V
: >= 0.996
10 Press “√” twice to exit.
•
Reagent Dilutor Test with Chromogenic Channel
Materials / tools necessary for the test:
- Brand new rotors
- Chromogenic Optic Test Kit
P/N 97579-50
- Clean, empty 4 mL reagent vial
Precaution
Make sure that the instrument has been turned On for at least 20 minutes (warm-up of
light source and thermoregulation) prior going through the following procedure:
1
2
3
Gain access to the service program menu.
Thoroughly clean, use distilled water and a cotton swab, the optical path (holes) of
the Rotor Holder, as well as the optical sensor window and optic fiber of the
Chromogenic Channel.
On the windows like menu enter Service then Dilutors Test and Dilutor Test. The
system presents the screen below.
Chapter 7 – Checkout & Adjustment
Page 71 of 98
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
4
5
6
7
8
9
Select on the screen “Chromogenic” on the left window and “Reagent Dilutor” on
the right window.
Take the content of two vials (4 mL) with PNA concentration 160 µmol/L (taken
from the kit P/N 97579-50) into a clean, empty 4 mL reagent vial with their Green
adapters and place it in reagent position R1.
Load 4 ml of distilled water into a clean, empty 4 mL reagent vial and place it
with its adapter in reagent position R4.
Place a new rotor into the analysis compartment.
Press “Start in Auto Rotor Loading. The instrument will load the rotor cuvettes
picking the PNA and the distilled water from the reagent vials, by using the
reagent needle and Reagent Dilutor.
Wait for the completion of rotor loading and acquisition cycle, then verify that the
following results are obtained:
CV% (cuvette # 1 to # 6)
CV% (cuvette # 7 to # 12)
CV% (cuvette # 13 to # 18)
CV% (Reference)
Mean Reference
R2
: < = 1.5
:<=3
:<=5
: < = 0.5
: 7.2 V to 8.8 V
: >= 0.996
10. Press “√” twice to exit.
7.8.2
Volume Check
This test is designed to verify and/or adjust the overall accuracy of the dispensation of
the dilution system. The accuracy of the dispensation is verified by means of a special
tool called “Graduated Capillary”. It allows a visual verification of the volumes being
delivered.
The test can be performed using distilled water, however as the results are based on
visual inspection of liquid being actually drawn into the capillary, a dye based
Page 72 of 98
Chapter 7 – Checkout & Adjustment
Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
aqueous material works better. If an inaccuracy is found a correction can be made
through the system software introducing either a positive or a negative offset.
Materials / tools necessary for the test:
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
- Graduated Capillary Kit P/N 8258900
- Small beaker (10 ml) or other suitable
container.
- Distilled water (or dye based aqueous
solution).
Prepare a small beaker with a few ml of either distilled water or a dye based
aqueous solution (if available).
Gain access to the service program menu.
On the windows like menu enter Diagnostic then Priming. The system performs a
fluidic priming cycle.
Once the priming is over go through the sequence Service then Dilutors Test then
Volume Check and Sample Dilutor/Reagent Dilutor. The system presents the
screen below.
Disconnect the Sample/Reagent needle tubing (the tubes on the Needles Block)
and connect it to a Graduated Capillary (connect the capillary to the upper tubing
to test the Sample Dilutor line or to the lower tubing to test the Reagent Dilutor
line).
While holding the capillary above a small beaker out of the liquid press “Start”.
The system will perform a short prime cycle (to fill the capillary) followed by a
re-aspiration. At this time an air bubble is withdrawn in the Graduated Capillary
and a dialogue box is presented on the screen
Immerse the Graduated Capillary into the distilled water, or a dye based aqueous
solution then press “OK“.
The system aspirates about 10 μL of water or a dye based aqueous solution (if
available) into the capillary. Verify that the head of the liquid sets between the
two upper marks of the Graduated Capillary.
Chapter 7 – Checkout & Adjustment
Page 73 of 98
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
9
10
11
12
13
14
After 10 seconds the instrument will automatically deliver most of the content out
of the Graduated Capillary.
Check that the liquid that remains sets between the two lower marks of the
Graduated Capillary (more close to the middle as possible). In this condition
(dispensed volume within range) no adjustments are needed, but if the liquid sets
above or below the two lines then a correction is required. The correction can be
entered in the window “Select Correction Value”.
Increase value if too much water stays in the Graduated Capillary at the end of
step 9 (dispensed volume insufficient), while decrease value if the water is too
close or below the lowest mark on the Graduated Capillary (dispensed volume too
high).
Repeat test to assure that entered value achieves proper volume dispensing.
If value has changed with respect to the original setting, record the new value on
the paper label located on the right side of the instrument.
Press “√” to exit, remove the Graduated Capillary and refit tubing to the
Sample/Reagent needle.
Following are the Graduated Capillary conditions during the test:
Page 74 of 98
Chapter 7 – Checkout & Adjustment
Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
U p p e r R e fe re n c e lin e s
Lo w e r R e fe re n c e lin e s
A s p ira tio n Le v e l
D is p e n s e d
V o lu m e
IN S U F F IC IE N T
D is p e n s e d
V o lu m e
W IT H IN R A N G E
Chapter 7 – Checkout & Adjustment
D is p e n s e d
V o lu m e
TO O H IG H
.
Page 75 of 98
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
7.9 Magnetic Sensors
Specific Magnetic sensors are located under the Fluidic Plate and on the Rotor Stack
with the purpose to detect for Rotor Holder and Rotor Stack Covers positions.
Following are the two sensors check procedures.
7.9.1
7.9.2
Rotor Holder Cover Sensor
Rotor Stack Cover Sensor
7.9.1
Rotor Holder Cover Sensor
This procedure is designed to verify the functionality of the Rotor Holder Cover
Sensor.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Remove the side and rear covers to gain access to the cardcage.
Connect a DVM between TP21 on the Acquisition & Sensors board (bd#3), and
ANA GND, TP0 on board #4.
From the Service menu select Optical Module Test, Acquisition Adjustment.
Push “Start”. The rotor cover will close. While the rotor module is rotating adjust
VR5 on the Acquisition & Sensors Board (Bd #3) to read 2700mv +/- 10mv on
the DVM. Also check that LED DL3 is “ON”.
Push the “Stop” key to end the acquisition cycle. When the rotor cover opens,
check that the voltage indicated on the DVM is between 1400mv to 1900mv.
Also, check that LED DL3 is “OFF”.
If the values are not met check the position of the Hall Sensor (located
underneath the rotor module), with respect to the magnet (located in the rotor
cover). If necessary loosen and move the Hall Sensor and repeat procedure.
Press “√” to exit.
Note: To work properly, this sensor needs correct assembly and the presence of its
permanent magnet. This is placed inside the Rotor Cover Assembly and must be
correctly polarized.
7.9.2
Rotor Stack Cover Sensor
This procedure is designed to verify the functionality of the Rotor Stack Cover
Sensor.
1
2
Gain access to the Service program menu.
On the windows like menu enter Service then Sensor Tests and Optic Sensor Test.
The system presents the screen below:
Page 76 of 98
Chapter 7 – Checkout & Adjustment
Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
3 Open the Rotor Stack Cover.
4 Check that on the “Rotor Storage Sensor Open” line there is displayed a “√”.
5 Close the Rotor Stack Cover.
6 Check that on the “Rotor Storage Sensor Open” line the “√” disappears.
7 Press “√” to exit.
Note: To work properly, this sensor needs the presence of a permanent magnet. It’s
placed inside the Rotor Stack Cover and must be correctly polarized.
This sensor doesn’t need adjustment because it works with a digital output signal (On
or Off).
Chapter 7 – Checkout & Adjustment
Page 77 of 98
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
7.10 Rotor Waste Presence Switch
This procedure is designed to verify the functionality of the Rotor Waste Presence
Switch.
1
2
Gain access to the Service program menu.
On the windows like menu enter Service then Sensor Tests and Optic Sensor Test.
The system presents the screen below.
3
Open the Rotor Waste compartment door and verify the presence of the Rotor
Waste Container (if absent put it in place) then close the door.
4 Check that on the “Rotor Waste Presence Switch” line there is displayed a “√”.
5 Open the Rotor Waste compartment door and remove the Rotor Waste Container
then close the door.
6 Check that on the “Rotor Waste Presence Switch” line the “√” disappears.
7 Press “√” to exit.
Note: This sensor doesn’t need electronic adjustments because it works with a digital
output signal (On or Off).
Page 78 of 98
Chapter 7 – Checkout & Adjustment
Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
7.11 Switching Power Supply Check Out and Adjustment
This procedure is designed to verify the functionality of the Switching Power Supply
Board.
Materials / tools necessary for the test:
- DVM
Note: Prior to starting this procedure it’s advisable to remove the Metallic Drip Tray
located between the Dilutors Module and the Switching Power Supply.
1
2
3
4
5
Turn On the Instrument.
Gain access to the service program menu. This turn “On” the Halogen Lamp.
Set the DVM to read dc voltages.
Connect the ground cable of the DVM to the Test Point TP9 on the Switching
Power Supply.
Check that on the other Test Points the values read are in accordance with the
table below.
Test Point Names
TP1
TP2
TP3
TP4
TP5
TP6
TP7
TP8
+70VPW
+12VPW
+9VPW
–15VANA
+15VANA
+6VLAMP
+5VDGT
+12VDGT
Voltages Output
Set Values (V)
68.5
12
9
-15
+15
6
5.1
12
Acceptable
Ranges (V)
64 to 73
10.8 to 14.5
8.5 to 9.5
-14.25 to -15.75
14.25 to 15.75
5.94 to 6.06
4.85 to 5.25
11.4 to 12.6
Trimmers for
Adjustments
RV5
RV4
RV2
RV3
RV6
Note: The trimmers are located on the Switching Power Supply in the zone under the
CPU Master Board. To gain access to them it is required that the Instrument is Turned
Off and is necessary to remove the entire CPU Master package (CPU Master, PC104
and HDD).
6
If there are voltages Out of Range, try to check the S.P.S. Board without loads. If
without loads the problem persists then replace the S.P.S. Board.
Note: The S.P.S. Board has many protection circuits on board (see sub-section
3.3.10). When one of them is activated the S.P.S. enters into “Protection Mode” (Turn
Off all the voltages and put the LED DL1 On).
Chapter 7 – Checkout & Adjustment
Page 79 of 98
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
7.12 Touch Screen Calibration
This procedure is designed to calibrate the parameters in the Touch Screen Control
Board in respect to the physical dimension of the Touch Screen surface.
Materials / tools necessary for the test:
- Touch Screen Calibration Tool
P/N190574-00
Note: If the Touch Screen Calibration Tool is not available then it’s advisable use an
object with the tip rounded. Don’t use any object that can damage the Touch Screen
surface.
1. The serial Connection COM1 must be disconnected from the PC104 Board
(connector CN-6) and reconnected to the CPU Mother Board connector CN25. To gain access to CN-25 on the Main CPU board it is also necessary to
disconnect COM2 (CN-7), COM3 (CN-8) and COM4 (CN-9) from the PC104
Board. Leave COM 2, COM 3 and COM4 connectors disconnected for this
procedure.
2. Insert the DOS 6.2 Boot Diskette into the floppy drive and power the
instrument ON.
3. At the C:\ prompt type cd touch (and press ENTER) to get to the Touch
directory. From the Touch directory type Smartset (and press ENTER) to
open the Series Setup Utility.
4. Check the following and change if necessary:
• Interface type: Serial (default) and press ENTER.
• Communications Port: COM1 (default) and press ENTER. Ignore error
messages displayed on the screen and press ENTER to continue.
5. The Touch Screen has to be configured as follows, (use the arrow keys to
move to items and ENTER to change options).
• Communication:
o Hardware Handshaking: select Disabled
•
•
•
•
Touch Mode:
o Stream Touches:
o Calibration:
o Scaling:
select
select
select
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
Touch Reporting:
o Report Delay (x 10ms):
select
15
Scaling:
o X high:
o Y high:
select
select
800
600
ASCII Setup:
Page 80 of 98
press
ENTER
Chapter 7 – Checkout & Adjustment
Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
o Type C2 (C must be upper case) and press ENTER
6. With the proper pointed tool (IL part number 190574-00), touch the following
corners of the display screen.
Upper Left Corner
Lower Right Corner
Several lines of touch screen communication data should be displayed
after each successful touch.
7. Save the calibration by typing: N$01$07 and press ENTER then press
ESCAPE (Esc) to save the calibration and exit.
8. To check the calibration select Touch Testing and press ENTER. The
following Touch Testing screen will appear.
Press ESCAPE to get back to main Menu.
Touch packet format: Smartset Binary
X
Y
Z
Status:
Touch Flag:
9. Touch the top left and then the bottom right corners of the display screen with
the pointed tool (IL part number 190574-00) and confirm that the displayed
coordinates for X and Y are approximate to the theoretical values 0 to 800 for
X, and 0 to 600 for Y. The maximum acceptable tolerance for these readings
is +/-2.
For example:
X
0
0
800
800
Y
0
0
600
600
Z
255
255
255
255
Status:
1
4
1
4
Touch Flag:
Initial
Un Touch
Initial
Un Touch
Note: If the touch screen cannot be set within the specified tolerance, return to
the Main Menu and repeat steps 5. thru 8.
10. Upon successful completion press ESCAPE to return to the Main Menu.
11. Check and if necessary select the following settings.
Touch Mode:
Stream Touches
Enabled
Load/Save Setup: Data Source Destination
To NVRAM
Load/Save Setup: Setup
Press ENTER (to save
modifications)
12. After the configuration has been saved, select EXIT to exit the Smartset
program. Remove the boot disk and power off the ACL.
13. The serial Connection COM1 must be reconnected to the PC104 Board.
Disconnect the COM1 cable from the CPU Mother Board connector CN-25
Chapter 7 – Checkout & Adjustment
Page 81 of 98
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
and connect it to the PC104 Board connector CN-6. Reconnect COM2 (CN7), COM3 (CN-8) and COM4 (CN-9) to the PC104 Board.
14. Reboot the ACL. Confirm touch screen operation using the ACL system
software by pressing the selection buttons and pull down menus on the screen.
Using your finger, confirm that pressing the center of the icon, button or pull
down menu tab, the function is activated.
An alternative method to check/calibrate the touch screen is as follows. This method
is not as accurate as the method described above.
1
2
3
Gain access to the Service program menu.
On the windows like menu enter Service then Touch Calibration.
A window appears with inside the information that “The current Touch Screen
calibration will be lost. The operation cannot be reverted. It’s OK to proceed?”
4 Press “OK”.
5 A window appears with inside the instruction “Please touch into red rectangle 1”.
6 In the upper left corner of the screen a red rectangle has appeared. Touch it with
care using the Touch Screen Calibration Tool.
7 Repeat the same operation with the red rectangle 2 located on the lower right of
the screen.
8 In order to verify the calibration repeat the operation also the check red rectangle
3.
9 A window appears with inside the information that “Touch Screen successfully
calibrated. Save the calibration?”
10 Press “OK” to save the calibration and exit.
Note: During the calibration procedure any error may occur or the time out to touch
the proper red rectangle on the screen has expired (15 seconds). In this case a
windows appears with inside the information that the touch screen calibration is
aborted. In this condition the Touch Screen is “out of order” and is needed to use the
TAB key (or the mouse if available) to select the Retry button and then press the
Enter key. Repeat the entire procedure until the Touch Screen is successfully
calibrated.
Page 82 of 98
Chapter 7 – Checkout & Adjustment
Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
7.13 Interfaces Test
This section provides information in order to verify through the Interfaces Test the
proper functionality of the interfaces relevant circuitry.
Following are the specific procedures to test the proper functionality of each circuit.
7.13.1
7.13.2
7.13.3
7.13.4
RS 232 Serial Mouse HW loop
RS 232 Host HW loop
USB Ports
Parallel Printer
7.13.1 RS 232 Serial Mouse HW loop
This test is designed to verify the functionality of the Mouse interface serial port.
Materials / tools necessary for the test:
- RS 232 C Interface Check Connector
P/N 99211-01
- RS 232 C Interface Check Connector
Adapter P/N 71467-70
Note: If the RS 232 C Interface Check Connector and its Adapter are not available
then it’s advisable use the customised 9 Pin Check Connector (Female) as reported in
the section 6.2 “Service Tools”.
1
2
Gain access to the Service program menu.
On the windows like menu enter Service then Interfaces Test. The instrument
shows the screen below.
3
Touch the little arrow on the side of test name then select the “RS 232 Mouse HW
loop” option.
Press “Continue”.
4
Chapter 7 – Checkout & Adjustment
Page 83 of 98
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
5
6
7
8
9
A window appears with inside the instruction “Please install RS 232 Check
Connector on Mouse serial port”.
Properly install the RS 232 C Check Connector with the RS 232 C Check
Connector Adapter on the Mouse serial port.
Press “Start”.
The next window with the results may be “Test Passed” or “Test Failed”. If the
test failed then it is necessary to troubleshoot the Mouse serial line.
Press “OK” to exit.
Note: In case of the result “Test Failed” then investigate the Interface Board, the Flat
Cable, and the CPU Master & PC104 Boards.
7.13.2 RS 232 Host HW loop
This test is designed to verify the functionality of the Host interface serial port.
Materials / tools necessary for the test:
- RS 232 C Interface Check Connector
P/N 99211-01
- RS 232 C Interface Check Connector
Adapter P/N 71467-70
Note: If the RS 232 C Interface Check Connector and its Adapter are not available
then it’s advisable use the customised 9 Pin Check Connector (Female) as reported in
the section 6.2 “Service Tools”.
1
2
Gain access to the Service program menu.
On the windows like menu enter Service then Interfaces Test. The instrument
shows the screen below.
3
Touch the little arrow on the side of test name then select the “RS 232 Host HW
loop” option.
Press “Continue”.
4
Page 84 of 98
Chapter 7 – Checkout & Adjustment
Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
5
6
7
8
9
A window appears with inside the instruction “Please install RS 232 Check
Connector on Host serial port”.
Properly install the RS 232 C Check Connector with the RS 232 C Check
Connector Adapter on the Host serial port.
Press “Start”.
The next window with the results may be “Test Passed” or “Test Failed”. If the
test failed then it is necessary to troubleshoot the Host serial line.
Press “OK” to exit.
Note: In case of the result “Test Failed” then investigate the Interface Board, the Flat
Cable, and the CPU Master & PC104 Boards.
7.13.3 USB
There is no Diagnostic test available for the USB ports. To test a USB port connect a
USB device such as a USB mouse and verify system operation.
7.13.4 Parallel Printer
This test is designed to verify the functionality of the Parallel Printer interface parallel
port.
Materials / tools necessary for the test:
- External Printer Cable P/N
84864-50
- PC Standard Parallel Printer
(ESCP2 / PCL5 Protocols compatible)
Before turn on the Instrument connect through the External Printer Cable the PC
Standard Parallel Printer.
1
2
Turn on the Instrument then gain access to the Service program menu.
On the windows like menu enter Service then Interfaces Test. The instrument
shows the screen below.
Chapter 7 – Checkout & Adjustment
Page 85 of 98
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
3
Touch the little arrow on the side of test name then select the “Parallel Printer”
option.
4 Press “Continue”.
5 A window appears with inside the instruction “Please connect an external printer
on the parallel printer port”.
6 Turn on the printer and verify the presence of the paper inside then put the printer
“On Line”.
7 Press “Continue”.
8 The next window with the results may be “Printer Test Passed” or “Printer Test
Failed”. If the test failed then it is necessary to troubleshoot the Parallel Printer
line.
9 Visually inspect the print out of the External Printer in order to detect data
transmission problem.
10 Press “OK” to exit.
Note: In case of the result “Test Failed” or “Wrong” print out then investigate the
Interface Board, the Flat Cable and the CPU Master & PC104 Boards.
7.14 Temperature Control
This section provides information in order to verify all the temperatures of the devices
onboard the Instrument as well as all the other temperature over heating protection
checks. More information on the instrument assemblies temperatures and the internal
cooling system are also provided in the drawing “Operating Temperature and Internal
Ventilation” reported in the figure 7.14 Drawing 1 of the chapter 10 “Drawings”.
Materials / tools necessary for the test:
- Temperature Probe P/N 70954-00
Note: Before performing this check procedure make sure that the Instrument is turn
on at least for 30 minutes.
Page 86 of 98
Chapter 7 – Checkout & Adjustment
Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
1
2
Gain access to the Service program menu.
On the windows like menu enter Diagnostic then Temperature Control. The
instrument shows the screen below.
3
Verify that all the devices are in the proper range of Temperature.
Note: If the System detects a temperature out of range, after few seconds a warning is
displayed and the temperature is displayed in red color. If the instrument has been
turned on for only a few minutes or there is a problem on a specific device then the
temperature may be out of its range. In this case the temperature is displayed with “–
– –“ when the temperature is too low or with “* * *” when the temperature is too high
in respect to its working range.
4
In order to troubleshoot the device with a temperature problem, verify the
reading of the temperature sensor (thermistor) by touching with the hand the
device (Ex: Rotor Holder at room temperature and “ * * * ” on the display).
Important: For Rotor Holder temperature verification use the Temperature Probe P/N
70954-00 to measure temperature inside the analysis plastic rotor. The relevant test is
described with the tool in the section 6.2 “Service Tools”.
The Instrument is provided with an internal cooling system. This is composed of the
Instrument Fan Assy, located on the rear-right side of the instrument, that forces
airflow inside the instrument and cleans it from dust through the Air Filter.
A Secondary Fans system, located on the left side of the instrument, forces the heated
air outside.
A specific Fan Control Board with onboard a temperature detector is also present.
This board provides power to the Peltier Fan that is always working and turns on the
Auxiliary Fan when the temperature of the air around the board exceeds 36 °C (over
36 °C turn on the Auxiliary Fan, under the 34 °C turn off the Auxiliary Fan).
The functionality of this board may be tested using a hair-drier.
Chapter 7 – Checkout & Adjustment
Page 87 of 98
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
The maintenance of the Air Filter is very important for the maximum efficiency of the
internal air cooling system.
Note: The inefficiency of the internal air cooling system may be critical for the
Switching Power Supply Board. The SPS is provided with a temperature control
circuit which displays a temperature warning (over 60 °C) and then shuts down the
instrument if the temperature exceeds 75 °C.
7.15 Floppy Disk Drive Test
This section provides information in order to verify through the Floppy Disk Drive
Test the proper functionality of the Floppy Disk Drive and its relevant circuitry.
Materials / tools necessary for the test:
- 1,44 MB Floppy Disk formatted
Note: If a 1,44 MB Floppy Disk formatted is not available it’s possible to format a
new one with a Personal Computer with standard operative system (DOS / Windows).
1
2
Gain access to the Service program menu.
On the windows like menu enter Service then Floppy Disk Drive Test. The
instrument shows the screen below.
3
At the beginning of the floppy presence test verify that there is no floppy disk
in the Floppy Disk Drive.
Press “Continue”.
A window appears with inside the message “Operation in progress. Please
wait”.
In case of test failure, a window appears with inside the message “Disk
present in drive. Extract floppy before proceeding”.
4
5
6
Page 88 of 98
Chapter 7 – Checkout & Adjustment
Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
7
At the beginning of the floppy write protected test insert a write protected
floppy disk in the Floppy Disk Drive.
Press “Continue”.
A window appears with inside the message “Operation in progress. Please
wait”.
In case of test failure, a window appears with inside the message “The inserted
Floppy disk is not write protected”.
At the beginning of the floppy usability test insert a formatted blank floppy
disk in the Floppy Disk Drive.
Press “Continue”.
A window appears with inside the message “Operation in progress. Please
wait” then another window with the test progress bar is displayed. At the end
another window appears with inside the message “Floppy disk drive test
successfully completed”.
In case of test failure, a window appears with inside the message “Usability
floppy disk test failed (on creating file)!”.
Press “OK” and then “Cancel” to exit.
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Note: In any of the tests fail then investigate the Floppy Disk Drive, the Flat Cable
and the CPU Master Board.
7.16 Software checking & loading
This section provides information in order to completely explain the upgrade
procedure of the software in the system. The software is stored on the Hard Disk
Drive and in the Flash Memory Chips on the boards.
Following are the specific procedures.
7.16.1
7.16.2
7.16.3
7.16.4
7.16.5
7.16.6
7.16.7
7.16.8
Software Identification
Databases Check
Backup / Restore of the system configuration
Upgrade IL Library
Complete Software Re-install
Hard Disk Drive Formatting
Main CPU Board BIOS Setup
PC104 Board Expanaion Module Settings
7.16.1 Software Identification
1
2
Gain access to the Service program menu.
On the windows like menu enter Utility then Software and Software
Identification. The instrument shows the screen below.
Chapter 7 – Checkout & Adjustment
Page 89 of 98
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
3
4
Verify that all the Software releases are in the latest versions available.
Press “√” to exit.
Note: The Master and the IL Library software version displayed are the software
version stored on the HDD, while the Slave and the REM software version displayed
are the software version stored in the boards Flash EPROMS memories (Boards #2
and #4).
If for troubleshooting purposes the current Slave Board #2 or REM Board #4 are
replaced it’s required to perform the Upgrade procedure. This will program the new
board memories with the last software revision that is Uploaded (stored) on the Hard
Disk Drive. Only after the Upgrade procedure will the last software revision be
written to the boards Flash EPROM memory.
The “Upgrade” program allows the software to be loaded from the Hard Disk Drive to
the specific board memory.
7.16.2 DataBases Check
This sub-section is designed to clarify the actions that are possible when a Database
Error is encountered.
If the Checking Database during the Init System phase (at Turn On) detects a problem
then the system shows the following menu.
Database check reported some errors. Please select one of these options.
1 – Restore last saved Database (on “Date” and “time”)
Page 90 of 98
Chapter 7 – Checkout & Adjustment
Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
If this option is selected then the system proceeds with the restore of the last valid
database saved.
Caution! That means that all the data and modifications stored from the last selfbackup (on “date” and “time”) to now will be lost!
2 – Power off and call service
If this option is selected then the system proceeds showing the message “System
halted. You can safely turn off ACL.”
NOTE: It is recommended to select option 1 Restore Last Saved Database if a
database error is encountered and this message is displayed. By selecting option 1
the chance of saving a possibly corrupted database is minimized.
Caution! It is possible that after the Init System the instrument is halted with a
database failure message. This may result in the instrument database being corrupted
and the access to the Operator Main Program is denied. In this case the only option is
to turn off and then on again the instrument, and choose 1 (Restore last saved
database) in the menu.
Caution! If, after the Init System, is possible gain access to the Service Program then
it’s advisable try to perform an “Archive” of all the data not saved yet (QC, AR,
Calibrations and Patient data) and also a Backup of the system configuration (if an
other one is not available) as described in the sub-section 7.16.3.
After this, on the windows like menu enter Service then DataBases Check.
The system shows a window where it is possible to select one of the four following
options.
-
Restore whole Database
Restore Setup and Calibration Database deleting other data
Restore Setup Database deleting other data
Ignore error
If also through this menu it’s impossible to recover Data and/or Setup configuration
then Log-Out, switch off and then On the Instrument and in the menu select the option
“1 – Restore last saved Database”.
7.16.3 Backup / Restore of the system configuration
This sub-section is designed to provide information about the Backup / Restore of the
system configuration.
The following procedure allows the service engineer to save on a floppy disk the
current configuration of the instrument with the purpose to create a backup copy that
may be restored in the future on the same but also on other instruments.
The databases that will be saved contain information about the setup of:
Chapter 7 – Checkout & Adjustment
Page 91 of 98
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Liquids
Tests
Profile
QC
AR
Interface configuration
System configuration
Materials / tools necessary for the test:
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
- Available Floppy Disk
1,44 MB formatted.
Gain access to the Analysis / Service program menu.
On the windows like menu enter Utility then Backup / Restore.
The instrument shows a window with inside 3 choice buttons.
Touch “Backup”. The system takes a few minutes to prepare the data for the
backup displaying the message “Backup of database in progress, please wait”.
When required insert the floppy disk in the Floppy Drive and press “OK”.
The system writes the data on the disk displaying a progress bar.
When finished extract the floppy disk and put an identification label on it.
Following is the procedure is to restore the backup data file on the instrument.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Gain access to the Analysis / Service program menu.
On the windows like menu enter Utility then Backup / Restore.
The instrument shows a window with inside 3 choice buttons.
Touch “Restore”. The system displays a choice box with the message “Restoring
the saved instrument configuration some results in the databases could be erased”
then press “Yes”.
When required insert the proper floppy disk in the Floppy Drive and press “OK”.
The system reads the data on the disk displaying a progress bar and then takes few
minutes to restore the data.
When finished extract the floppy disk.
Touching the button “View Backup Date” it is also possible to check the date of the
Backup file on the floppy disk without proceeding with the Restore.
7.16.4 Upgrade IL Library
This sub-section is designed to provide information about the Upgrade of the IL
Library.
The following procedure allows the service engineer to perform the IL Library
Upgrade.
The databases that will be updated contain information about:
• New Liquids
• New Profiles
• New Interference Table
• New Tests
Page 92 of 98
Chapter 7 – Checkout & Adjustment
Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
For all the tests updated in the databases with a new revision the calibration, AR, QC
and patients data will be lost. In the end of the operation the system provides to the
service engineer / customer the list of all the data erased.
Materials / tools necessary for the test:
1
2
3
4
5
6
- IL Library Upgrade Disk
Gain access to the Analysis / Service program menu.
On the windows like menu enter Utility then Upgrade IL Library.
The instrument shows a window with the message “Load DB file from floppy
disk” then touch “continue”.
Insert the first disk as required and touch “OK”.
The system takes a few minutes to read the data and Upgrade the libraries.
When finished extract the floppy disk from the Floppy Drive and press “OK”.
7.16.5 Complete Software Install
Software Re-install
This installation procedure is suggested for the following circumstances:
• To re-install software on an instrument that is unable to successfully
complete start-up sequence.
7.16.5.1 Slave Code Upgrade and Software Installation
The Slave software upgrade must be selected before the application software
is installed. To select Slave Upgrade and install software perform the
following steps:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
From ACL Main Menu, select the “UTILITY” menu
Select the “SOFTWARE” option
Select the “SOFTWARE UPGRADE” option
Select the “SW SLAVE” option
Select the “UPGRADE” option. The “Upgrade Slave Code” window
appears with the following text: “Upgrade Code Selected. Do you
confirm?”
Select the “Yes” button, the text will change briefly to state: “Upgrade
in progress. . .”
The text will automatically change to state: “The Device is ready to
receive the code, please Logout, Switch the system off, wait a few
seconds and switch it back On, to continue the Upgrade”. Select the
“OK” button.
Select the “Log Out” button from the toolbar (key on the far right).
When the “Logout” message appears that states: “Do you really want
to shutdown ACL?” appears select “Yes”.
Wait for the “Login” window and power down the ACL.
Chapter 7 – Checkout & Adjustment
Page 93 of 98
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
10. Insert the floppy disk labeled “ACL Elite/ElitePro SW DISK 1” into
the floppy drive and power on the ACL.
11. The “Scandisk” program will start automatically. When completed it
will be followed by the “Defrag” program.
12. Wait until “Defrag” is completed.
13. You will be prompted to insert the last disk of the set, insert the disk
titled “ACL Elite/ElitePro SW DISK 4”, then the disks “ACL
Elite/ElitePro SW DISK 1”, “ACL Elite/ElitePro SW DISK 2”,
“ACL Elite/ElitePro SW DISK 3” and “ACL Elite/ElitePro SW
DISK 4” when prompted..
14. When the following prompt appears:
“Do you want to install a new database?” with the following options:
“Press “Y” if you want to install a new Data Base”
“Press “N” if you want to maintain the actual Database”
Press “N” to keep the database. (If upgrading existing software or
reloading software onto an existing Hard Drive).
Press “Y” if loading software onto a New or Re-Formatted Hard
Drive or if the Database is suspect of corruption).
Automatically the “Scandisk” program will start, when completed it
will be followed by the “Defrag” program.
15. Wait for the instrument to finish with the disks as indicated by the
C:\TEMP> prompt and remove “ACL Elite/ElitePro SW DISK 4”
from the floppy drive.
16. Power Off and then Power On the ACL to start the SLAVE
UPGRADE procedure.
17. Several screens appear before the ACL initialization. During the
machine initialization, the message “Erase Flash Memory in progress. .
.Please wait!” is displayed, followed by “Slave Code Upgrade in
progress. . .Please wait!”
18. At the end of the SLAVE UPGRADE procedure the ACL is upgraded
at new release of software for the Slave and the Master boards.
19. At the end of the start-up the “ACL Login” window should be
displayed. Log into the machine using the user “Service” and
password “System Fix”.
7.16.5.2 REM Code Upgrade
After installation of the application software it may be necessary to perform
the REM Upgrade. To upgrade the REM software use the following steps:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
From ACL Main Menu, select the “UTILITY” menu
Select the “SOFTWARE” option
Select the “SOFTWARE UPGRADE” option
Select the “SW REM” option
Select the “UPGRADE” option. The “Upgrade REM Code” window
is displayed with “Upgrade code selected. Do you confirm?” as text.
6. Select the “Yes” button, the text will change briefly to state: “Upgrade
in progress. . .”
Page 94 of 98
Chapter 7 – Checkout & Adjustment
Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
7. The text will automatically change to state: “The Device is ready to
receive the code, please Logout, Switch the system of, wait few
seconds and switch it back On, to continue the Upgrade”. Select the
“OK” button.
8. Select the “Log Out” button from the toolbar (key on the far right).
When the “Logout” message appears that states: “Do you really want
to shutdown ACL?” appears select “Yes”.
9. Wait for the “Login” window and power down the ACL.
10. Wait for a few seconds and turn the ACL on.
11. Several screens appear before the ACL initialization. During the
machine initialization, the message “REM Code Upgrade in progress. .
.Please wait!”
12. At the end of the UPGRADE procedure the ACL is upgraded at the
new release software for the REM board.
7.16.5.3 Upgrade IL Library
The IL Library upgrade procedure must be used for re-installing the IL
Library.
The IL Library upgrade is divided into the following steps:
1. From ACL Main Menu, select the UTILITY menu
2. Select the UPGRADE IL LIBRARY option
3. A message box pops up that reads “LOAD DATABASE FILE FROM
FLOPPY DISK” Select “Continue”
4. Insert into the floppy drive the floppy disk labeled “ACL Elite/ElitePro
IL LIBRARY UPGRADE DISK”, click ”OK” and then follow the
instructions that prompt the operator to UPGRADE the IL Library. (At
this time, the above steps for upgrading the library are executed) A
“Upgrade completed, please wait” message is displayed.
The IL Library upgrade is divided into the following steps:
Step
Time
IL Liquids Upgrade
3 minutes
IL Tests Upgrade
10 minutes
IL Profile Upgrade (no IL Profile at
1 second
this moment)
IL Test Groups Upgrade
30 seconds
IL Interference Table upgrade
1 minute 30 seconds
5. At the end of this procedure the ACL is upgraded to the new IL
LIBRARY and displays the “Upgrade IL Library” window; select the
“Confirm” button to close the window.
6. Select Setup->Tests->Default Tests from the main menu. If a series of
beeps occurs when entering this window, record the tests present in the
list to the right of the window, and select Setup->Tests->View/Define
Chapter 7 – Checkout & Adjustment
Page 95 of 98
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
from the main menu. Verify that all tests recorded are enabled, and if
they are not, enable them.
7.16.5.4 Configuring Instrument for Elite or ElitePro
Once logged onto the ACL, you must make sure that the machine knows if
it is an Elite or ElitePro. To do this, use the following steps:
• Select the “Utility” menu option and click “Software”, then
“Software Identification”
• Verify that the correct versions of software for the Master, Slave,
REM and IL Test Library are displayed: Select the confirm button
to exit the window.
• Select the “Diagnostic” menu option and click on the “Service”
option.
• If you did not log onto the machine as user name “Service” you
will be asked to now, the password is “System Fix” and is case
sensitive.
• Once you are logged in as “Service”, select “Service” menu option
and click on the “Hardware Configuration” option.
• If the instrument is an ACL Elite, the box labeled “Additional
Reagents” should be de-selected, and the box labeled “REM
Installed” should be de-selected.
• If the instrument is an ACL ElitePro, the box labeled “Additional
Reagents” should be selected, and the box labeled “REM
Installed” should be selected.
• The “Instrumentation Model” text box will display the type of
instrument that has been selected.
• Press the “Confirm” button to save this setting.
7.16.6 Hard Disk Drive Formatting
Note: Replacement Hard Disk Drives will not have the ACL Application
Software installed. Replacement Hard Disk Drives must be prepared to accept
the ACL Application Software. Preparation of the hard disk drive includes
partitioning and formatting the drive.
1
Insert the floppy disk labelled “Boot Disk & DOS 6.2 SW” into the floppy drive
and turn the instrument on to boot up in the DOS environment.
2 To partition the hard disk drive, at the A:\ prompt type the “fdisk” command and
press the Enter key.
3 A Menu is displayed indicating 4 options. Select option 1 “Create DOS Partition
or Logical DOS Drive”, and press “Enter”.
4 A new Menu is displayed with 3 options. Select option 1 “Create Primary DOS
Partition” and press “Enter”.
5 The system will display “Do you want to use the maximum available size for a
Primary DOS Partition and make the Partition active?” Select “Y” and press
“Enter”.
Page 96 of 98
Chapter 7 – Checkout & Adjustment
Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
6
The Partition routine will start. When finished the partition status will be
displayed as follows:
Partition
C: 1
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
Status
A
Type
Pri DOS
Vol Label
Mbytes
2047
System
FAT16
Usage
26%
When the partition has been created press ESC to exit from the “fdisk” command.
With the Boot Disk & DOS 6.2 SW disk in the floppy drive power the instrument
off and on again to reboot.
At the A:\ prompt type “format c:” and press the Enter key. Confirm the
message “Warning: All data will be lost. Non-Removable Disk Drive C will be
lost” by pressing “Y” and press the Enter key. This will start the formatting
routine.
After format completion the display will indicate “Volume Label (11 characters,
Enter for none)”. Press “Enter” for no volume label.
When the formatting is complete press the Enter or ESC key to finish.
Remove the Boot Disk & DOS 6.2 SW disk from the floppy drive and power the
instrument off.
To install the application software follow the procedure outlined in section 7.16.5.
After formatting harddrive and loading software the motor phases, instrument
configuration, (ie Interfaces, Barcodes, etc.) must be performed.
7.16.7 Main CPU BIOS Check
If the Main CPU board is replaced the System BIOS Setup should be checked.
To check System BIOS Setup perform the following.
1
2
To enter the BIOS Setup environment turn the instrument power on and hold
down the [Del] or [Canc] key.
When you are in the BIOS Setup environment the following options will be
displayed:
SYSTEM BIOS SETUP -- UTILITY VERSION 2.05
Basic CMOS Configuration
Advanced CMOS Configuration
Chipset Configuration
Reset CMOS to Last Known Values
Reset CMOS to Factory Defaults
Write to CMOS and Exit
Exit Without Changing CMOS
To select an option, use “↑” or “↓” key followed by Enter key.
3 Confirm BIOS is configured as indicated below, and modify if necessary.
4 BASIC CMOS CONFIGURATION
Date:
Insert date and correct hour
Floppy Drive A:
not installed
Floppy Drive B:
1.44MB, 3.5
5 ADVANCED CMOS CONFIGURATION
Chapter 7 – Checkout & Adjustment
Page 97 of 98
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
Swapping of A: and B:
Seek Hard Drive at Boot:
Seek Floppy at Boot:
Boot Sequence:
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
A: → C:
6 CHIPSET CONFIGURATION
Internal VGA Boot On: CRT + FP
Internal COM 1:
Enabled
Internal COM 2:
Enabled
Internal COM 3:
Disabled
Internal COM 4:
Disabled
Internal COM 5:
Disabled
Internal Audio:
Disabled
7 After confirming or modifying BIOS Setup, select “Write to CMOS and Exit”
and press the Enter key.
7.16.8 PC104 Board Expansion Module Setting
If the PC 104 Board is replaced the Module Settings should be checked. To
check settings perform the following.
1. Disconnect cables CN7, CN8 and CN9 form the PC 104 Board. Leave these
cables disconnected.
2. Disconnect the video cable, CN6 from the PC 104 Board and connect it to
CN25 on the Main CPU Board.
3. Insert the Boot Disk & DOS 6.2 SW disk into the floppy drive and boot the
instrument.
4. From the C:\ prompt type “new_set4” command and press the Enter key.
Instructions to configure the system with the following options will be shown:
Check that the system is configured as indicated below.
Type = PRIMARY
Net Node = 2
COM 1 = Enable
COM 2 = Enable
COM 3 = Enable
COM 4 = Enable
Com BaseAdd = 380H
Net Base Add = 240H
Base Add = 380H*
Base Add = 388H*
Base Add = 390H*
Base Add = 398H*
Alternative IRQ = 2
Net IRQ = 2
IRQ Line = 10
IRQ Line = NONE
IRQ Line = 11
IRQ Line = 5
* Note: The values identified with an (*) may not be changeable. Continue with the
configuration.
5. To exit from the “new_set4” environment saving the configuration, press the
“End” or “Fine” key.
6. Remove the disk from the floppy drive and power off the instrument. Connect
all cables (CN6, CN7, CN8 and CN9) to their original positions.
7. Power on the instrument and confirm system boots. (Note: If the touch screen
is inoperative it may be necessary to perform the touch screen calibration
described in section 7.12).
Page 98 of 98
Chapter 7 – Checkout & Adjustment
ACL Elite/EliteProService Manual
Chapter 8
System Interfacing
This chapter provides the main information related to the configuration of the instrument
interface for the communication with external devices.
The devices that are possible connecting to the instrument are following.
8.1
8.2
8.3
8.4
8.5
8.6
8.7
8.8
Keyboard
External Parallel Printer
Network
Modem
Mouse
Host Computer
Internal Bar Code Reader
External Bar Code Reader
Chapter 8 – System Interfacing
Page 1 of 7
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
8.1 Keyboard
On the windows like menu select “Setup” then “Interfaces” and “Keyboard”. The system
displays the screen below.
The window in this screen allows configuring the ACL Elite/ElitePro PC standard
keyboard for the language and layout used. Also the enabling of the on-screen keypad is
configurable by selecting:
KEYBOARD TYPE:
English (United Kingdom)
French
German
Spanish
Italian
USA
NUMERICAL KEYPAD:
Disabled
All numerical fields
All numerical fields and Sample ID
Page 2 of 7
Chapter 8 – System Interfacing
ACL Elite/EliteProService Manual
8.2 External Parallel Printer
On the windows like menu select “Setup” then “Interfaces” and “Printer”. The system
displays the screen below.
The window in this screen allows configuring of an external printer selecting:
PRINTER PROTOCOL:
ESC/P2 (for Epson-like printers)
HP-PCL (for HP-like printers)
PAPER DIMENSION:
A4 (210 x 297 mm.)
Letter (8½ x 11 inch)
PAPER FORMAT:
Single sheet
Continuous sheet
REPORT TYPE:
Cumulative
Sample Report
PRINTED SAMPLES:
Any (analyzed)
Completed
AUTOMATIC PRINT OUT: Checked (Enable)
Empty (Disable)
SAMPLE REPORT DATA: Instrument Name (Checked Enable)
Normal Ranges (Checked Enable)
Date/Time (Checked Enable)
Chapter 8 – System Interfacing
Page 3 of 7
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
CUSTOMIZE HEADER:
Enter in the “Custom Header” screen.
8.3 Network
Not supported in this Software Revision.
8.4 Modem
Not supported in this Software Revision.
8.5 Mouse
The mouse may be used as a selecting device in place of touching the screen.
At instrument turn on, during the “Init. System” phases, the instrument checks the proper
serial port or USB port for the presence of a mouse.
If the mouse is detected then the cursor arrow appears on the display.
If the mouse is connected after the “Init. System” phases then the instrument will not
detect it until the next time the instrument is powered off and on.
8.6 Host Computer
On the windows like menu select “Setup” then “Interfaces” and “Host”. The system
displays the screen below.
Page 4 of 7
Chapter 8 – System Interfacing
ACL Elite/EliteProService Manual
The window in this screen allows configuring of Host Computer interface selecting:
BAUD RATE:
2400
4800
9600
19200
38400
AUTOMATIC DATA TX (TRANSMISSION):
Not Required
Patient Samples Only
QC, AR and Patient Samples
HOST QUERY:
Checked (Enable)
Empty (Disable)
DELETE AUTOMATICALLY AFTER TX
(TRANSMISSION):
Checked (Enable)
Empty (Disable)
UNIQUE INSTRUMENT ID:
Checked (Enable, from 1 to 9)
Empty (Disable)
Information about the “Host Communication Protocol” is detailed in chapter 12
Appendix A of this manual.
The ACL to Host Computer Interconnect Cable is P/N 184202-38.
The following table provides information regarding the wiring of the interconnection
cable between the ACL and Host Computer.
ACL Side
Host Computer Side
Interface Type: DTE
9 Pin Female Delta Connector
PIN
DESCRIPTION
1
N.C.
2
TXD
3
RXD
4
DTR
5
Signal GND
6
DSR
7
RTS
8
CTS
9
N.C.
Shield to connector shell
Interface Type: DTE
9 Pin Female Delta Connector
PIN
DESCRIPTION
1
N.C.
2
RXD
3
TXD
6
DSR
5
Signal GND
4
DTR
8
CTS
7
RTS
9
N.C.
Shield to connector shell
Chapter 8 – System Interfacing
Page 5 of 7
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
8.7 Internal Bar Code Reader
On the windows like menu select “Setup” then “Interfaces” and “Internal Barcode”. The
system displays the screen below.
The first step is enable (Checked) the Internal Barcode Reader.
The four fields visible on the screen correspond to the four families of barcodes that may
be activated on the ACL, along with their corresponding subtypes of barcodes. Choose
for each field one of the options below according to the laboratory’s needs.
CODABAR:
Disabled
No Checksum
AIM Mod 16
NW7 Mod 11
NW7 Mod 16
CODE 39:
Disabled
No Checksum
Mod 43
INTERLEAVED 2 OF 5:
Disabled
No Checksum
USS Mod 10
OPCC Mod 10
CODE 128:
Disabled
No Checksum
Page 6 of 7
Chapter 8 – System Interfacing
ACL Elite/EliteProService Manual
8.8 External Bar Code Reader
On the windows like menu select “Setup” then “Interfaces” and “External Barcode”. The
system displays the screen below.
The External Bar Code Reader is used to Identify IL Reagent Bar Code labels. Enable
the external barcode reader by selecting the box labelled External BCR Enabled. Select
additional fields as appropriate.
Chapter 8 – System Interfacing
Page 7 of 7
Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
Chapter 9
Part List
This chapter contains information about the service parts as well as the expendable
materials that are available for use with the ACL Elite/ElitePro System. A large number
of the expendable materials are shipped in the “Startup Kit” included with the ACL
Elite/ElitePro system. These items may be ordered using their Part Numbers as shown in
the tables.
Following are the specific sections.
9.1
9.2
9.3
Startup Kit
Expendable Materials
Service Parts List (Includes ACL 8-9-10000 unique service parts)
Chapter 9 – Part List
Page 1 of 9
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
9.1 Startup Kit
The following expendable materials are contained in the Startup Kit that is shipped with
the ACL Elite/ElitePro System.
•
Sample Trays
Three types of sample trays are available as shown below. The startup kit includes two of
them, chosen by the user according to the desired system configuration.
Tray type
3 mL
5 mL
S 11.5
Used for
Primary tube, 3 or 3.5 mL total volume (13x75 mm)
Primary tube, 5 mL total volume (13x75 or 13x100 mm)
Sarstedt type tube, 3 mL (11.5x66 mm) or 5 mL (11.5x92 mm)
•
Sample Tray Adapters
for plastic cups - 4 pieces
for 4 mL glass vials - 6 pieces
•
Reagent Vial Adapters
for 10 mL vials, reagents requiring magnetic
stirring (grey) - 4 pieces
for 10 mL vials, reagents not requiring magnetic
stirring (purple) - 6 pieces
for 4 mL vials, reagents not requiring magnetic
stirring (green) - 4 pieces
•
Magnetic Stirrers
for reagent stirring - one package containing 6
pieces
•
Small Sample Cups
0.5 mL sample cups - one package containing
1000 pieces
•
Large Sample Cups
2.0 mL sample cups - one package containing
1000 pieces
•
Diluent/Buffer/Reagent Cups
4.0 mL cups, with labels - one package
containing 100 pieces
•
Diluent/Buffer/Reagent Glass
Vials
10 mL glass vials - one package
containing 10 pieces
•
Block and Probes Assembly
an assembly consisting of an acrylic block with
the sample and reagent needles and their
associated liquid sensors
Page 2 of 9
Chapter 9 – Part List
Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
•
Sample and Reagent Tubing
1.5 meter piece of tubing to be cut and used as
needed
•
Insertion Tool for Tubing
a tool to be used when replacing sample and
reagent tubing
•
Wash/Reference Emulsion
a 1-liter bottle of Emulsion
•
Waste/Rinse Reservoir
a reservoir for needle wash and rinse
•
Waste Bottle
a 5-liter bottle to collect ACL waste
•
Waste Tubing
a 1.5 meter piece of tubing to be used for
collection of liquid waste
•
Adjustment Tool for Needles
a tool to be used for adjusting the position of the
needles in the arm
•
Rotors
20-Cuvette Rotors - package containing 100
pieces
•
Rotor Insertion Tool
a tool used for inserting rotors into the system
•
Rotor Waste Container
a removable container used inside the system to
hold the used rotors
•
Moulded Air Filter
One air filter for the analyzer body
•
Fuses 6.3 AT
2 fuses for the system
•
Power Cord
a power cord for the system: the cord included is
consistent with the voltage with which the
system will be used
•
Host Computer Cable
a cable to connect the optional host computer
•
Software System Disk Kit
kit containing the main system software
•
Test Library Disk Kit
kit containing the test library software
•
Operator’s Manual
the Operator’s Manual for use of the ACL system
•
Mouse
USB Optical mouse
Chapter 9 – Part List
Page 3 of 9
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
•
Hand Held Barcode Scanner
USB Hand held barcode scanner with mounting
hardware (ElitePro only)
•
Compliance Certificate
a specific system compliance certificate
Page 4 of 9
Chapter 9 – Part List
Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
9.2 Expendables Materials
Following are the expendable materials available for the ACL Elite/ElitePro System.
Part
Number
181108-99
181108-98
181812-85
190764-00
190763-00
181812-65
190762-00
190761-00
097466-06
189241-00
067992-00
055751-00
067994-00
068000-00
181812-77
181108-97
181108-43
181039-41
073289-01
181080-65
181812-72
181057-69
099095-03
181812-71
068931-02
197255-00
148821-00
189462-00
184202-38
200024-00
190870-00
Item Description
Sample Tray for 13x75 mm, (3-3.5 mL) tubes
Sample Tray for 13x75 & 13x100 mm, (5 mL)
tubes
Sample Tray for Sarstedt 11.5x66 mm (3 mL)
& 11.5x92 mm (5 mL) tubes
Sample Tray adapter for plastic cup
Sample Tray adapter for 4 mL vials
Adapter for 10 mL reagent vials with magnetic
stirring (grey)
Adapter for 10 mL reagent vials without magnetic
stirring (purple)
Adapter for 4 mL reagent vials without magnetic
stirring (green)
Magnetic Stirrer
Glass Vials, 10 mL
Sample Cups, 0.5 mL
Sample Cups, 2 mL
Cups, 4 mL, plus Labels
Rotors- 20 cuvettes
Rotor Insertion Tool
Rotor Waste Container
Block Probe Assembly
Needles Adjustment Tool
Sample and Reagent Tubing, 1.5 m
Sample and Reagent Tubing Extractor Tool
Waste Reservoir, for needles wash
Assy, Tank for Waste
Waste Tube, 1.5 m
Air Filter, molded
Fuses 6.3 AT
VDE Approved Power Cord 220V
Cord Power, Shielded 110V
External Printer Cable
Host Computer Cable (9 pin – 9 pin)
Wash/Reference Emulsion, 1 litre
Software System Disk Kit
Chapter 9 – Part List
# Pieces in
Package Unit
1
1
1
4
4
4
6
4
6
10
1000
1000
100
100
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
Page 5 of 9
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
074068-00
189241-04
190595-00
181121-11
181121-12
Page 6 of 9
Connector, Tubing 3 Way “T”
Bottle kit, 10 x 4 ml
Compliance Certificate
Operator’s Manual, ACL Elite
Operator’s Manual, CD ACL Elite
Chapter 9 – Part List
1
1
1
1
1
Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
9.3 Service Parts List
The following Service Parts are available for the ACL Elite / ElitePro System.
Part Number Item Description
181120-23
182355-30
182355-40
182356-00
182355-50
182355-61
182355-20
182356-60
182355-70
181120-70
182355-80
182356-30
182356-10
182356-20
070908-00
182356-80
182356-90
065011-10
065033-01
082627-00
089721-00
084869-44
084869-46
181108-26
181108-27
181108-28
181108-29
181108-30
084869-38
084869-39
181108-33
190798-00
181106-34
181108-34
181021-28
Pentium 266MHz CPU Master Board #1
CPU Slave Board #2
Acquisition & Sensors Board #3
Rotor Exchange Module Board #4
Motors Board #5
Photometric & Temp. Control Board #6
PC104 Board
Switching Power Supply Bd.
Mother Board
Interface Board, USB
Loading Area Interconnection Bd.
Photometer Interface Bd.
REM Upper Interconnection Bd.
REM Lower Interconnection Bd.
Dual Channel Optical Switch
Dual Channel Optical Switch (flat)
Fan control Bd.
Floppy Disk Drive
Hard Disk Drive Kit (see note below)
Chrom Sensor Bd.
Filter Optical 405 nm
Chrom Coaxial cable
Coag. Sensor w/cable
Instrument Fan Assy
Secondary Fan Assy
Peltier Fan Assy
Auxiliary Fan Assy
Autosampler Movement Assy
Autosampler Internal ring sensor
Autosampler External rings sensor
Barcode Assy (for sample tray area)
Belt Timing Autosampler rotation
Peltier 2 Assy (ACL ElitePro only)
Peltier 1 Assy
Peltier Temperature Sensor
Chapter 9 – Part List
Area
PCB
PCB
PCB
PCB
PCB
PCB
PCB
PCB
PCB
PCB
PCB
PCB
PCB
PCB
PCB
PCB
PCB
Miscellaneous
Miscellaneous
Optics Assy
Optics Assy
Optics Assy
Optics Assy
Miscellaneous
Miscellaneous
Miscellaneous
Miscellaneous
Mech. Assy.
Optics Assy
Optics Assy
Optics Assy
Mech. Assy.
Mech. Assy.
Mech. Assy.
Miscellaneous
Page 7 of 9
ACL Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
Part Number
181108-35
181108-58
190856-47
181108-38
070907-00
074068-00
073289-01
181108-40
190856-06
181108-95
181108-43
190804-55
190804-56
182356-40
190675-75
181108-46
181108-47
181106-48
066675-60
181108-02
181108-50
181024-43
181108-51
181025-15
067218-05
181021-95
181021-81
181108-53
181108-54
190804-57
190804-58
181108-96
181103-06
181108-57
082433-00
181108-94
181108-60
181103-22
182356-70
084869-36
181104-55
084869-37
Page 8 of 9
Item Description
Stirrer motor
Dilutor Drive Assy
Dilutor Chamber with Electrovalves
Dilutor Electro-Valve 3 Way
Single Channel Optical Switch
Connector, Tubing 3 Way “T”
Tubing URH .040ID x .100 OD Clear (mtr)
Reference Emulsion Sensor
Tip Movement Assembly Universal
Tip Assy (sample arm)
Needles Block
Belt Timing Tip Movement vertical
Belt Timing Tip Movement rotation
Liquid Level Detection Board
Liquid Level Detection Cable
Rotor Cover Assy
Rotor Cover Movement Assy Elite
Rotor Cover Movement Assy ElitePro
Rotor Cover Belt
Rotor Cover Sensor
Rotor Holder Movement Assy
Brushes Assy
Rotor Holder Snap
(Coagulimetric Channel) LED Socket Assy
Fiber Optic for LED
Optical Collimator Assy
Halogen Lamp
Rotor Exchange Module Assy (Basic)
Pliers Movement Assy
Belt Timing Rotor Caliper Arm rotation
Belt Timing Rotor Caliper Arm vertical
Rotor Arm
Spring for Rotor Arm
Rotor Transport
Rotor Transport motor
Rotor Stack Assy
Electro-Magnet
Spring for Rotor Stack
Silos Hall Sensor Bd
Optical Sensor Silos Upper
REM and Silos Cover Assembly
Optical Sensor Silos Lower
Chapter 9 – Part List
Area
Mech. Assy.
Mech. Assy.
Miscellaneous
Miscellaneous
PCB
Fluidic Assy
Fluidic Assy
Miscellaneous
Mech. Assy.
Mech. Assy.
Mech. Assy.
Mech. Assy.
Mech. Assy.
PCB
Miscellaneous
Mech. Assy.
Mech. Assy.
Mech. Assy.
Mech. Assy.
PCB
Mech. Assy.
Miscellaneous
Mech. Assy.
Optics Assy
Optics Assy
Optics Assy
Optics Assy
Mech. Assy.
Mech. Assy.
Mech. Assy.
Mech. Assy.
Mech. Assy.
Mech. Assy.
Mech. Assy.
Mech. Assy.
Mech. Assy.
Miscellaneous
Mech. Assy.
PCB
Optics Assy
Miscellaneous
Optics Assy
Elite/ElitePro Service Manual
084869-47
084869-60
182353-50
190856-02
182356-50
064252-45
065456-10
099635-03
190693-00
181121-05
181121-06
190653-00
181121-27
181121-79
065011-20
181103-64
190850-20
181109-31
181109-25
181109-26
181109-27
181109-06
181103-85
181121-31
181121-45
181103-65
Optical Sensor Rotor Waste Full
Rotor Waste Micro Switch Assy
Speaker Board Assy
Power Entry Module
Needles & Wash-R Sensor Interc. Board
O-Ring for Sample Tray Indexing Pin
Push-Push Latch
Set Screw M4x10 for Caliper Arm Leveling
PM Kit ACL 8-9-10K, Elite, ElitePro
Visor Elite
Visor ElitePro
Kit Service Tools
Door, Rotor Waste Area
Mouse USB, Optical 2 Button with Wheel
Keyboard
Protective Glass, Barcode scanner
Kit, Dilutor Gasket
LCD Monitor ACL
Cable VGA LCD
Cable RS232 LCD
Cable Power LCD
Preheater, Rotor, Elite
Cover Interface Cable Ref-E Cable Connection
Barcode Scanner Linear Handheld
Kit, Upgrade, Barcode Scanner Linear
Flange Adjustable (Grey plastic flange to support
sample tray
Optics Assy
Miscellaneous
Miscellaneous
Miscellaneous
PCB
Miscellaneous
Miscellaneous
Miscellaneous
Miscellaneous
Miscellaneous
Miscellaneous
Miscellaneous
Miscellaneous
Miscellaneous
Miscellaneous
Miscellaneous
Miscellaneous
Miscellaneous
Miscellaneous
Miscellaneous
Miscellaneous
Miscellaneous
Miscellaneous
Miscellaneous
Miscellaneous
Miscellaneous
ACL 8-9-10000 unique service parts
182352-10
181121-30
190750-00
181103-58
181106-41
181103-49
190833-47
181121-80
CPU Master Board #1
Interface Board
Visor ACL 9000 instrument s/n 0186 and below
Visor ACL 8-9000 instrument s/n 0187 and above
Visor ACL 10000
Door, Rotor Waste
Mouse, Serial, 9-pin
Pentium Hardware Upgrade Kit
ACL 8-9-10000
ACL 8-9-10000
ACL 9000
ACL 8-9000
ACL 10000
ACL 8-9-10000
ACL 8-9-10000
ACL 8-9-10000
Note: The Hard Disk Drive Kit, part number 065033-01 does not contain software.
After replacement of the hard drive the hard drive must be partitioned and
formatted prior to the application software being loaded. Refer to section 7.16.
Chapter 9 – Part List
Page 9 of 9
ACL Elite / ElitePro Service Manual
Chapter 10
Drawings
This chapter is designed to group all the main drawings related to the specific chapters
included in this service manual. The drawings are organized by section number (chapters
where referenced) and then for number of drawing used in the section (chapter).
Following is the index of the drawings.
2.5.1
2.5.2
3.1.2
3.3.1
3.3.3
3.3.4
3.3.4
3.3.5
3.3.5
3.3.5
3.3.5
3.3.6
3.3.6
Drawing
Drawing
Drawing
Drawing
Drawing
Drawing
Drawing
Drawing
Drawing
Drawing
Drawing
Drawing
Drawing
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
2
3
4
1
2
Analysis Windows Like Menu Bar
Service Windows Like Menu Bar
Instrument Fluidic System Cycles
Mother Board & Interconnections
Quick Reference Board Functions
CPU Master Board
PC104 Board
Slave Board
Slave Board
Slave Board
Slave Board
Acquisition & Sensors Board
Acquisition & Sensors Board
3.3.6
Drawing 3
Acquisition & Sensors Board
3.3.6
Drawing 4
Acquisition & Sensors Board
3.3.6
Drawing 5
Acquisition & Sensors Board
3.3.6
3.3.6
Drawing 6
Drawing 7
Acquisition & Sensors Board
Acquisition & Sensors Board
3.3.6
Drawing 8
Acquisition & Sensors Board
3.3.7
3.3.7
3.3.7
Drawing 1
Drawing 2
Drawing 3
Rotor Exchange Module Board
Rotor Exchange Module Board
Rotor Exchange Module Board
3.3.7
Drawing 4
Rotor Exchange Module Board
3.3.7
3.3.7
Drawing 5
Drawing 6
Rotor Exchange Module Board
Rotor Exchange Module Board
Chapter 10 - Drawings
Expanded Diagram
Expanded Diagram
Diagram
General Block Diagram
Diagram
General Block Diagram
General Block Diagram
General Block Diagram
Communication Section
Memory Section
Main Logic Section
General Block Diagram
Multiplexer &
Acquisition Section
Channel Amplifier
Section
Sample Tray Detectors
Emitter Section
Sample Tray Detectors
Receiver Section
Needles Sensors Section
Reference Emulsion
Presence Sections
Analysis Compartment
Cover Sensor Section
General Block Diagram
Transport Motor Section
Rotor Arm Motors
Section
Memory &
Communication Section
Infra Red Sensors Section
Electro Magnet Control
Section
Page 1 of 41
ACL Elite / ElitePro Service Manual
3.3.8
3.3.8
Drawing 1
Drawing 2
Motors Board
Motors Board
3.3.8
Drawing 3
Motors Board
3.3.8 Drawing 4
3.3.8 Drawing 5
Motors Board
Motors Board
3.3.9
3.3.9
3.3.9
Drawing 1
Drawing 2
Drawing 3
Photom & Temp Control Board
Photom & Temp Control Board
Photom & Temp Control Board
3.3.9
Drawing 4
Photom & Temp Control Board
3.3.9
Drawing 5
Photom & Temp Control Board
3.3.9
Drawing 6
Photom & Temp Control Board
3.3.10
3.3.11
4.1.5
4.2
7.14
Drawing
Drawing
Drawing
Drawing
Drawing
Switching Power Supply Board
Instrument Ground Circuit
Rotor Exchange Module Replacement
Instrument Covers
Operating Temperatures & Internal Ventilation
Page 2 of 41
1
1
1
1
1
Chapter 10 - Drawings
General Block Diagram
Autosampler Motor
Section
Sample Arm Motors
Section
Dilutors Motors Section
Magnetic Stirrer Motors
Section
General Block Diagram
Rotor Motor Section
Analysis Compartment
Cover Motor Section
Rotor Thermoregulation
Section
Peltiers Thermoregulation
Section
Rotors Transport & Feed
Stack Section
General Block Diagram
ACL Elite / ElitePro Service Manual
Chapter 10 - Drawings
Page 3 of 41
ACL Elite / ElitePro Service Manual
Page 4 of 41
Chapter 10 - Drawings
ACL Elite / ElitePro Service Manual
Chapter 10 - Drawings
Page 5 of 41
ACL Elite / ElitePro Service Manual
Page 6 of 41
Chapter 10 - Drawings
ACL Elite / ElitePro Service Manual
Chapter 10 - Drawings
Page 7 of 41
ACL Elite / ElitePro Service Manual
Page 8 of 41
Chapter 10 - Drawings
ACL Elite / ElitePro Service Manual
Chapter 10 - Drawings
Page 9 of 41
ACL Elite / ElitePro Service Manual
Page 10 of 41
Chapter 10 - Drawings
ACL Elite / ElitePro Service Manual
Chapter 10 - Drawings
Page 11 of 41
ACL Elite / ElitePro Service Manual
Page 12 of 41
Chapter 10 - Drawings
ACL Elite / ElitePro Service Manual
Chapter 10 - Drawings
Page 13 of 41
ACL Elite / ElitePro Service Manual
Page 14 of 41
Chapter 10 - Drawings
ACL Elite / ElitePro Service Manual
Chapter 10 - Drawings
Page 15 of 41
ACL Elite / ElitePro Service Manual
Page 16 of 41
Chapter 10 - Drawings
ACL Elite / ElitePro Service Manual
Chapter 10 - Drawings
Page 17 of 41
ACL Elite / ElitePro Service Manual
Page 18 of 41
Chapter 10 - Drawings
ACL Elite / ElitePro Service Manual
Chapter 10 - Drawings
Page 19 of 41
ACL Elite / ElitePro Service Manual
Page 20 of 41
Chapter 10 - Drawings
ACL Elite / ElitePro Service Manual
Chapter 10 - Drawings
Page 21 of 41
ACL Elite / ElitePro Service Manual
Page 22 of 41
Chapter 10 - Drawings
ACL Elite / ElitePro Service Manual
Chapter 10 - Drawings
Page 23 of 41
ACL Elite / ElitePro Service Manual
Page 24 of 41
Chapter 10 - Drawings
ACL Elite / ElitePro Service Manual
Chapter 10 - Drawings
Page 25 of 41
ACL Elite / ElitePro Service Manual
Page 26 of 41
Chapter 10 - Drawings
ACL Elite / ElitePro Service Manual
Chapter 10 - Drawings
Page 27 of 41
ACL Elite / ElitePro Service Manual
Page 28 of 41
Chapter 10 - Drawings
ACL Elite / ElitePro Service Manual
Chapter 10 - Drawings
Page 29 of 41
ACL Elite / ElitePro Service Manual
Page 30 of 41
Chapter 10 - Drawings
ACL Elite / ElitePro Service Manual
Chapter 10 - Drawings
Page 31 of 41
ACL Elite / ElitePro Service Manual
Page 32 of 41
Chapter 10 - Drawings
ACL Elite / ElitePro Service Manual
Chapter 10 - Drawings
Page 33 of 41
ACL Elite / ElitePro Service Manual
Page 34 of 41
Chapter 10 - Drawings
ACL Elite / ElitePro Service Manual
Chapter 10 - Drawings
Page 35 of 41
ACL Elite / ElitePro Service Manual
Page 36 of 41
Chapter 10 - Drawings
ACL Elite / ElitePro Service Manual
Chapter 10 - Drawings
Page 37 of 41
ACL Elite / ElitePro Service Manual
Page 38 of 41
Chapter 10 - Drawings
ACL Elite / ElitePro Service Manual
Chapter 10 - Drawings
Page 39 of 41
ACL Elite / ElitePro Service Manual
Page 40 of 41
Chapter 10 - Drawings
ACL Elite / ElitePro Service Manual
Chapter 10 - Drawings
Page 41 of 41
ACL Elite / ElitePro Service Manual
Chapter 11
Service Notes
This chapter is designed to allow the service engineer to add to the service manual
any service product information (service notes) that will be released in the future
This is to allow the service engineer to add all the notes in a specific place or
otherwise to move the service notes to the specific chapter where the notes need to be
added.
Chapter 11 – Service Notes
Page 1 of 1
ACL Elite / ElitePro Service Manual
Chapter 12
ACL Elite/Elite Pro
Host Communication Protocol
Revision 2.3
Dec 2005
Chapter 12 – Appendix A
Page 1 of 42
ACL Elite / ElitePro Service Manual
Revision Date
December 07-2002
December 16-2002
Comments
Added transmission examples
Specified ASTM field numbers
Add Notes for information
Total number of pages
Reviewed Test Codes
Review some Notes
April 2004
Error code update
December 2005
Elite/Elite Pro update
Chapter 12 – Appendix A
Page 2 of 42
ACL Elite / ElitePro Service Manual
Index
1.0
1.1
2.0
2.1
3.0
Introduction
Purpose
General Description
Product Perspective
Specific Requirements
ERROR! BOOKMARK NOT DEFINED.
3.1
Protocol Specification
3.2
Low Level Interface
3.3
Data Link and Logical Layer
3.4
Sessions
4
4
5
5
6
6
6
6
3.4.1
Message Header and Message Terminator Records
3.5
3.5.1
3.5.1.1
3.5.1.2
Test Order Downloading
Receive Session from DMS
Test Request Message
Test Order Message
7
8
8
10
11
3.5.1.2.1
3.5.1.2.2
Patient Information Record
Test Order Record
10
12
3.5.2
3.5.3
3.5.4
3.6
3.7
4.0
4.1
Host Query
Test Request Message
Test Order Message
Rejected Test Order
Download Session Volumes
Test Results Uploading
Test Result Message
15
15
16
18
19
20
21
4.1.1
Patient Information Record
20
4.1.2
4.1.3
4.1.4
4.1.5
4.2
5.0
6.0
7.0
8.0
8.1
8.2
8.3
9.0
Test Order Record
Result Record
Comment Record
Error Codes
Upload Session Volumes
Not Supported Records
Transmission Abort
Appendix - ACL Elite/Elite Pro Test Codes
Appendix - ACL Elite/Elite Pro Supported Characters
Supported Characters for Sample ID
Supported Characters for Patient name and Department
Supported Characters for delimiters
Appendix - ACL Elite/Elite Pro Supported Units
23
24
23
24
26
27
27
28
31
31
31
31
32
Chapter 12 – Appendix A
Page 3 of 42
ACL Elite / ElitePro Service Manual
1.0
Introduction
1.1
Purpose
This document is a guide to integrate a Laboratory Information Management system
with the Instrumentation Laboratory ELITE/ELITE PRO family instruments using the
ASTM (American Society for Testing and Materials) specification to transfer
information between clinical instruments and computer systems.
ASTM specification E-1394-91 Standard Specification for Transferring Information
between Clinical instruments and Computer Systems and E-1381-91 Standard
Specification for the Low Level Protocol to transfer Messages between Clinical
Laboratory Instruments and Computer Systems have been used as standard to develop
ELITE/ELITE PRO Host Communication Protocol.
Specification E-1394 defines the logical layer of ASTM standard; all significant
information for ELITE/ELITE PRO instruments application can be found in chapters
Specific Requirements and following.
Specification E-1381 refers to low level protocol; significant information for
ELITE/ELITE PRO family instruments application can be found later on in this
document.
Chapter 12 – Appendix A
Page 4 of 42
ACL Elite / ElitePro Service Manual
2.0
General Description
2.1
Product Perspective
Communication sessions with host computer can be started on ELITE/ELITE PRO
family instruments by operator request or automatically at session completion.
If the operator requires a manual download session, the instrument will open
communication with the host computer that will provide transmission of all test
orders.
If the operator requires an upload session, the instrument will transmit a subset of
sample results (identified by the user) stored in the instrument patient database or QC
database or Analytical Reference database.
If the instrument is properly configured, automatic downloading or uploading sessions
can be started by ELITE/ELITE PRO instrument.
Automatic downloading will occur at session start if host query is configured. In this
condition the instrument will request test orders for specific sample IDs recognized on
the sample tray.
The second condition will occur, if automatic uploading has been requested, at session
completion.
In case the communication session is not generated from the instrument, any host
computer message is ignored.
All information received by the host computer must be associated with a Sample ID
which is the primary key of the database. In addition to programmed tests a certain
amount of information can be associated with a Sample ID (patient data) and stored in
ELITE/ELITE PRO database. This information is optional.
The sample ID is the primary key to access information in the database.
If the checks fail, any downloading operations will be aborted. See Test Order
Downloading section.
At most 1000 samples can be stored in ELITE/ELITE PRO database; each sample can
have a maximum of 30 tests associated (double tests are considered as 3 tests).
The system behavior when these limits are exceeded is explained in the paragraph
Test Order Downloading.
If 1000 samples are present in the database, the FIFO (First In First Out) will not
accept additional samples during a Manual Downloading.
The test ordering operation, to identify the type of ordered test, by host computer must
refer to a computer code that is instrument specific. Refer to Test Order Downloading
for further details and to the Appendix at the end of this document for the test codes
table.
Chapter 12 – Appendix A
Page 5 of 42
ACL Elite / ElitePro Service Manual
Note: for the downloading the Host should send to the ELITE/ELITE PRO string
information in single frame (single line) during the transmission or up to 240 bytes
maximum during the transmission.
.
3.0
Specific Requirements
3.1
Protocol Specification
3.2
Low Level Interface
Low level interface conforms to ASTM specification E-1381-91. The following
characteristics are supported and are configurable by Operator Interface:
Baud Rate
2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38600
Character Length
8 bit
Parity
No parity
Stop Bits
1
3.3
Data Link and Logical Layer
For the Data Link and Logical Layer the ASTM specification E-1381-91 has been
maintained as a reference. Protocol limits and constraints are those declared by the
standard.
To mention some of them, the data part of the frames exchanged between the
instrument and the host computer should be done as single frame. As a consequence
during transmission sessions specific routines provide the ability to divide large
records into multiple frames and during a reception session they re-build partial
frames in a single record. The application level has no evidence of this mechanism.
According to ASTM standard the following characters cannot be part of data records:
<SOH>, <STX>, <ETX>, <EOT>, <ENQ>, <ACK>, <DLE>, <NAK>, <SYN>,
<ETB>, <LF>, <DC1>, <DC2>, <DC3>, <DC4>.
Timeout and retry logic are those specified by the standard; the Low Level Clinical
Message State Diagram representing the implemented automatic is the reference.
In interrupt request status the instrument accept remote EOT.
3.4
Sessions
There are two types of sessions that the instrument handles with the ASTM interface:
the test orders download and the test results upload. These sessions can be initiated by
the operator or automatically activated by the instrument.
Chapter 12 – Appendix A
Page 6 of 42
ACL Elite / ElitePro Service Manual
When the user/operator requests a download operation (Receive Command), the
instrument will send a request to the host for available test orders (all) or for test
orders requested for specific samples, and the host will answer with the test orders
available for the instrument.
Test results upload (Transmit Command) are initiated by the user or automatically by
the instrument at the same way. The host is not allowed to transmit unsolicited
messages, any type of inquiries or test orders not explicitly required by the instrument.
3.4.1
Message Header and Message Terminator Records
Following ASTM specification, each type of transaction between the instrument
(DTE) and the host computer (DCE) has two common records that are the Message
Header record and the Message Terminator record. These records open and close data
transmission between ELITE/ELITE PRO instruments and host computer.
Their fields are described in the following:
Message Header Record:
Record Type ID
Delimiter Definition
Message Control ID
Access Password
Sender Name or ID
Sender Street Address
Reserved Fields
Sender Telephone Number
Characteristics of Sender
Receiver ID
Comment or special Instructions
Processing ID
Always set to ‘H’
The 5 ASCII characters composing this field define the
type of delimiters that will be used in the following
records. See Appendix B for supported delimiters.
Not provided
Not provided
Set to ‘ACL9000’ when transmitting to host or
receiving. As an option, the ability to identify
univocally the instrument by means of an extension to
the instrument name is also supported: the name syntax
becomes ‘ACL9000-xx’ where xx is a two digit code in
the range 01-99.
The extension to the instrument name is user
configurable in the set-up environment.
The instrument ID is always ACL9000 independently
from the model; ELITE/ELITE PRO.
Not provided
Not provided
Not provided
Not provided
Must be set to ‘ACL9000’ when receiving from host.
Depending on the instrument set-up, the ability to
identify univocally the instrument by means of the
extension to the instrument name is also supported: the
name syntax becomes ‘ACL9000-xx’ where xx is a two
digit code in the range 01-99.
If the ID is different from the expected one, the session
is interrupted.
Not provided
Always set to ‘P’ meaning Production
Chapter 12 – Appendix A
Page 7 of 42
ACL Elite / ElitePro Service Manual
Version No.
Date and Time of Message
Set to the current ASTM standard version = ‘1’
Format is YYYYMMDDHHMMSS
Example of message sent from the ELITE/ELITE PRO :
H|\^&|||ACL9000|||||||P|1|20021205123956<CR>
Example of message sent from Host:
H|\^&||||||||ACL9000||P|1|20021205123956<CR>
Message Terminator Record:
Record Type ID
Sequence Number
Termination Code
always set to ‘L’
always set to ‘1’
set to ‘N’ for normal termination and to ‘E’ for
abnormal termination while transmitting to host;
not considered for received data
Example of Terminator:
L|1|N<CR>
3.5
Test Order Downloading
Test order downloading is used to request test orders available on the host and to have
them on the instrument. This operation can be obtained in two ways: manually
opening a download session from the DMS environment or enabling on the
instrument the host query function.
In the first case the host will have to transmit to the instruments all pending test
requests; in the second case the instrument will automatically require specific
information for the samples placed on the sample tray and without any test requests.
Details for both modalities are explained in Receive Session from DMS and Host
Query paragraphs.
3.5.1
Receive Session from DMS
The operator manually initiates the test order download from the DMS environment.
The host will provide to the instrument all available test requests. The host can send
zero or more test orders in one or more messages, but all messages will be part of the
same transmission session.
During a transmission session more test orders can be required for the same sample.
The host sends usually all test orders for which it has not yet received results even if
they have been previously transmitted.
Chapter 12 – Appendix A
Page 8 of 42
ACL Elite / ElitePro Service Manual
ELITE/ELITE PRO instruments will process each received test order to validate fields
supported; some information will be extracted from the received record while other
information will be ignored.
Only test orders related to patient samples are considered, if the required sample ID
does not exist in the patient database and the required sample ID is not used in the QC
database, a new record is created. If the database is full, the transmission session will
be aborted.
If the test orders are for a sample already existing in the sample data base, the new
orders will be added to the existing tests but all tests already ordered or performed
will remain unchanged.
If a test order with more than the maximum number of programmable tests is sent, the
request is rejected. The limit is 30 single tests or 10 double tests.
If the test order is not recognized as one of those supported by ELITE/ELITE PRO
family instruments, it is rejected. The instrument will inform the host computer using
a record containing the list of rejected test orders.
During a downloading session the listed error conditions can be detected, the
associated instrument behavior and actions are listed as well:
Error Condition
Action
User Message
Sample ID used in the QC data base
Abort communication
Bad Sample ID (long, unsupported
characters)
Data Base full
Abort communication
Sample ID already
used in the QC data
base
Invalid Sample ID
Abort communication
Patient record has no associated test
order record
Test order has no associated patient
record
Instrument Identifier different from
ACL9000 or extended name
Too many test requests for the same
sample ID
Unknown test request
Bad Test
Reject test order
Patient Data Base is
full
Not identified sample
ID for patient data
No patient record for
ordered tests
Invalid instrument
identifier
-
Reject test order
Reject test orders
-
Illegal record format
Abort communication
Incorrect record
format in host
messages
Abort communication
Abort communication
Abort communication
All abort conditions imply that ELITE/ELITE PRO family instruments will send to
the host computer a message with the reason for transmission interruption (see Reject
Test Order) while a message is presented to the user on the instrument. When
Chapter 12 – Appendix A
Page 9 of 42
ACL Elite / ElitePro Service Manual
transmission abort is not implied, at transmission completion one or more records will
follow (see Reject Test Order) with an indication of rejected test orders.
Information rejected is typically unknown test requests or test requests exceeding the
sample record size in ELITE/ELITE PRO Data Management System. It must be
observed that if any of this information is rejected, it does not imply that all sample
data have been rejected.
The set of legal test requests are normally stored while the illegal requests for the
same sample ID will be rejected.
It also must be underscored that ELITE/ELITE PRO limits the size of handled records
(independently from the record type supported by ASTM) to 1024 byte during
downloading session.
Note: for the downloading the Host should send to the ELITE/ELITE PRO string
information in single frame (single line) during the transmission or up to 240 bytes
maximum during the transmission.
3.5.1.1
Test Request Message
The Test Request Message is used by ELITE/ELITE PRO to start the test order
download session. It is composed from a Message Header record, a Request
Information record and a Message Terminator record.
The “Request Information record” requests from the host ALL test orders available
for the specific instrument.
Following the ASTM specification the fields composing the Request Information are
described in the following.
Request Information Record:
Record Type ID
Sequence Number
Starting Range ID Number
Ending Range ID Number
Universal Test ID
Nature of Request Time Limit
Beginning request Results Date and
Time
Requesting Physician Name
User Field #1
User Field #2
Request Information Status Code
always set to ‘Q’
as defined by the standard set to ‘1’ when query is
sent
set to the string ‘ALL’
not provided
not provided
not provided
not provided
not provided
not provided
not provided
always set to ‘O’ (requesting test orders and
demographics only)
An example for the complete message (composed by header message, request
information record and message terminator record) is given by:
Chapter 12 – Appendix A
Page 10 of 42
ACL Elite / ElitePro Service Manual
H|\^&|||ACL9000|||||||P|1|19960210103227<CR>
Q|1|ALL||||||||O<CR>
L|1|N<CR>
3.5.1.2
Test Order Message
To answer the ELITE/ELITE PRO Test Request Message, the host computer sends the
Test Order Message. It contains the records specifying which tests are being requested
for each specified sample. The host computer may answer with one or more message;
each one contains one or more test order specifications. The test order specification
consists of a Patient Information record followed by one or more Test Order records.
The host can send for the same sample ID a Patient Information record followed by
many Test Order records or, for each test to be ordered, a pair composed by the
Patient Information record followed the Test Order record.
Comment Record messages during downloading operations are ignored by
ELITE/ELITE PRO.
3.5.1.2.1
Patient Information Record
The fields characterizing this record are specified in the following:
Patient Information Record:
Record Type ID
Sequence Number
Practice Assigned Patient ID
Laboratory Assigned Patient ID
Patient ID #3
Patient Name
Must be ‘P’
Must begin with ‘1’ and then must increment
by one for each new Patient Information
record
Ignored
Stored, if available, as a string in the Patient
ID field of the sample record.
No checks are performed for this field and the
string will be truncated to 15 characters.
Ignored
Stored, if available, as a unique string in the
‘name’ field of sample record considering only
the first two sub fields in this data field
(second and first name). The string will be
truncated to 30 characters. If a character not
supported is found (see Appendix for
supported characters), the patient name and
all the other strings in the same patient record
will be ignored.
If the patient name is not available 4 separators
must be transmitted: ^^^^.
Mother’s maiden Name
Birth date
Ignored
Stored, if available. The data will be converted
and displayed in the following in according to
ELITE/ELITE PRO supported format.
Expected format, conforming to ASTM
Chapter 12 – Appendix A
Page 11 of 42
ACL Elite / ElitePro Service Manual
Patient Sex
Patient Race-Ethnic Origin
Patient Address
Reserved Field
Patient Telephone Number
Attending Physician ID
Special Field #1
Special Field #2
Patient Height
Patient Weight
Patient’s Known or Suspected
Diagnosis
Patient Active Medications
Patient’s Diet
Practice Field #1
Practice Field #2
Admission and Discharged Dates
Admission Status
Location
Nature of Alternative Diagnostic
Code and Classifiers
Alternative Diagnostic Code and
Classifiers
Patient Religion
Marital Status
Isolation Status
Language
Hospital Service
Hospital Institution
Dosage Category
3.5.1.2.2
standard, is YYYYMMDD
Stored if available. Allowed characters are
‘M’, ‘m’, ‘F’, ‘f’, ‘U’, ‘u’; any other character
is interpreted as ‘U’.
Ignored
Ignored
Ignored
Ignored
Ignored
Ignored
Ignored
Ignored
Ignored
Ignored
Ignored
Ignored
Ignored
Ignored
Ignored
Ignored
Stored if available as a free string in the
‘department’ field of sample record. The string
will be truncated to 30 characters. See
Appendix B for supported characters.
Ignored
Ignored
Ignored
Ignored
Ignored
Ignored
Ignored
Ignored
Ignored
Test Order Record
The fields characterizing this record are specified in the following:
Test Order Record:
1. Record Type ID
2. Sequence Number
3. Specimen ID
Must be ‘O’ (letter)
Must begin with ‘1’ and then must
increment by one for each new test order
record for the same patient
This is the ELITE/ELITE PRO sample ID;
the field must be less than or equal to 15
Chapter 12 – Appendix A
Page 12 of 42
ACL Elite / ElitePro Service Manual
4. Instrument Specimen ID
5. Universal Test ID
6. Priority
7. Requested/Ordered Date and Time
8. Specimen Collection Date and Time
9. Collection End Time
10. Collection Volume
11. Collector ID
12. Action Code
13. Danger Code
14. Relevant Clinical Information
15. Date/Time Specimen Received
16. Specimen Descriptor
17. Ordering Physician
18. Physician’s Telephone Number
19. User Field No. 1
20. User Field No. 2
21. Laboratory Field No. 1
22. Laboratory Field No. 2
23. Date/Time Results Reported or Last
Modified
24. Instrument Charge to Computer System
25. Instrument Section ID
26. Report Types
27. Reserved Field
28. Location of Ward of Specimen
Collection
29. Hospital Information Flag
30. Specimen Service
31. Specimen Institution
characters and must be consistent with
rules on sample ID (ID already in use for
QC database are not legal). Non
conforming sample IDs will cause an abort
of the download process.
See Appendix B for ELITE/ELITE PRO
supported characters.
Ignored
The field is composed of 4 parts; only the
Manufacturer’s Code component is used as
a 4 character code (user configurable on
board); unknown test ID will be rejected.
If the field contains in any of the sub fields
the S char the sample ID will be
considered a priority sample; any
additional flag will be ignored. If the field
does not contain the S char or it is empty,
the sample will be identified as a routine
sample.
Ignored
Ignored
Ignored
Ignored
Ignored
Ignored
Ignored
Ignored
Ignored
Ignored both fields
Stored if available as a free string in the
‘physician’ field of sample record. The
string will be truncated to 30 characters.
See Appendix for supported characters.
Ignored
Ignored
Ignored
Ignored
Ignored
Ignored
Ignored
Ignored
Set to O (letter); other codes will cause
records rejection
Ignored
Ignored
Ignored
Ignored
Ignored
Chapter 12 – Appendix A
Page 13 of 42
ACL Elite / ElitePro Service Manual
An example for a complete test ordering is given by:
H|\^&||||||||ACL9000||P|1|19982110134700<CR>
P|1||PTNT1||ROSSI^MARIO^^^||19391127|M|||||||||||||||||DEP
1||||||||||<CR>
O|1|SMP01||^^^0001|S||||||||||^|DR. VERDI||||||||||O||||||<CR>
O|5|SMP02||^^^0001|||||||||||^|||||||||||O||||||<CR>
P|2||PTNT2||GIALLI^LUCA^^^||19551028|F||||||||||||||||||DEP
2||||||||||<CR>
O|1|SMP10||^^^0001|||||||||||^|||||||||||O||||||<CR>
L|1|N<CR>
Example of download without patient name:
H|\^&||||||||ACL9000||P|1|20021205123956<CR>
P|1||||^^^^|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||<CR>
O|1|LAURA01||^^^0001|||||||||||^|||||||||||O||||||<CR>
L|1|N<CR>
Note: Separators are always expected from Host and are always transmitted
independently from the information contained in the string.
Chapter 12 – Appendix A
Page 14 of 42
ACL Elite / ElitePro Service Manual
3.5.2
Host Query
Host query is automatically activated by the instrument each time the system is
properly configured. Beginning the pre-analysis phase of a single test or profile or test
group, one or more samples have no type of test requests associated.
The instrument will send, using the requested information record, the sample IDs
requiring test programming and will accept only test orders for those sample IDs.
The instrument will accept for the queried samples any test orders independently by the type
of test which will be executed in the starting session.
The mechanism supported by ASTM requires sending to the host a Request
Information record for each sample ID or sending to the host a range of queried
sample IDs. The mechanism supported by ELITE/ELITE PRO is the first option, so
will be independent of the sorting system used by instrument or host computer on the
samples.
As a consequence the instrument will send a query for the first sample, will wait for
the host information and will send later a new query for the next samples (if any). All
the host query sessions will be organized in this manner.
Because the instrument is asking for information regarding a specific sample ID, it
will reject any type of information associated with different sample IDs.
The host will provide to the instrument all available test requests. The host can send
zero or more test orders in one or more messages, but all messages will be part of the
same transmission session.
During a transmission session more test orders can be required for the same sample.
ELITE/ELITE PRO will process each received test order validating the fields that
ELITE/ELITE PRO supports; some information will be extracted from the received
record while other information will be ignored.
If the test order is not recognized as one of those supported by ELITE/ELITE PRO it
will be rejected. The instrument will inform the host computer using a record
containing the list of rejected test orders.
Host Query is only performed if the Sample ID is not located in the database for the
ACL system.
During a download session the listed error conditions can be detected, the associated
ELITE/ELITE PRO action is listed as well:
Chapter 12 – Appendix A
Page 15 of 42
ACL Elite / ElitePro Service Manual
Error Condition
Action
User Message
Sample ID used in the QC data base
Abort communication
Bad Sample ID (long, unsupported
characters)
Data Base full
Abort communication
Sample ID already
used in the QC data
base
Invalid Sample ID
Patient record has no associated test
order record
Test order has no associated patient
record
Instrument Identifier different from
ACL9000 or extended name
Too many test requests for the same
sample ID
Unknown test request
Bad Test
Illegal record format
Abort communication
Abort communication
Abort communication
Abort communication
Reject test order
Reject test order
Reject test orders
Abort communication
Patient Data Base is
full
Not identified sample
ID for patient data
No patient record for
ordered tests
Invalid instrument
identifier
Incorrect record
format in host
messages
All abort conditions imply that ELITE/ELITE PRO family instruments will send to
the host computer a message with the reason of transmission interruption (see Reject
Test Order) while a message is presented to the user on the instrument. When
transmission abort is not implied, at transmission completion one or more records will
follow (see Reject Test Order) with an indication of rejected test orders.
Information rejected is typically unknown test requests or test requests exceeding the
sample record size in ELITE/ELITE PRO Data Management System. It must be
observed that if any of this information is rejected, it does not imply that all the
sample data have been rejected.
The set of legal test requests are normally stored while the illegal requests for the
same sample ID will be rejected.
It also must be underscored that ELITE/ELITE PRO limits the size of handled records
(independently from the record type supported by ASTM) to 1024 byte during
downloading session.
Note: If the Sample ID is not present at the Host level during the Host Query, the Host
will return only the Header and the terminator.
H|\^&||||||||ACL9000||P|1|20021205123956<CR>
L|1|N<CR>
Note: If the Host requests a test that is disabled on the ELITE/ELITE PRO, the test
will not be programmed on the ELITE/ELITE PRO and a reject message of this type
will be returned back to the Host.
Chapter 12 – Appendix A
Page 16 of 42
ACL Elite / ElitePro Service Manual
C|1|I|UKNOWN_T|PatientID^0080|I<CR>
3.5.3
Test Request Message
The Test Request Message is used by ELITE/ELITE PRO to require information for
each specific sample that has no test orders in the instrument database. It is composed
from a Message Header, a Request Information and a Message Terminator record.
The Request Information record requests in this case information for one specific ID
at time. The ASTM protocol limits the number of Request Information records to one.
As a consequence the instrument will wait for the host answer before sending a
second Request Information record for a second sample.
Following the ASTM specification the fields composing the Request Information are
described in the following.
Request Information Record:
Record Type ID
Sequence Number
Starting Range ID Number
Ending Range ID Number
Universal Test ID
Nature of Request Time Limit
Beginning request Results Date and
Time
Requesting Physician Name
User Field #1
User Field #2
Request Information Status Code
always set to ‘Q’
as defined by the standard set to ‘1’ when query is
sent
set to the specific sample ID to require
information on; the meaningful component is the
second one
not provided
not provided
not provided
not provided
not provided
not provided
not provided
always set to ‘O’ (requesting test orders and
demographics only)
An example for the complete message (composed by header message, request
information record and message terminator record) is given by:
H|\^&|||ACL9000|||||||P|1|19960210103227<CR>
Q|1|^S001^||||||||O<CR>
L|1|N<CR>
Answer from Host:
H|\^&||||||||ACL9000||P|1|19960210103256<CR>
P|1||||ROSSI^MARIO^^^||19391127|M|||||||||||||||||DEP
1||||||||||<CR>
O|1|S001||^^^0001|||||||||||^| DR. VERDI ||||||||||O||||||<CR>
O|5|S001||^^^0002|||||||||||^|||||||||||O||||||<CR>
L|1|N<CR>
Chapter 12 – Appendix A
Page 17 of 42
ACL Elite / ElitePro Service Manual
3.5.4
Test Order Message
As an answer to the ELITE/ELITE PRO Test Request Message the host computer
sends the Test Order Message. It contains the records specifying which tests are being
requested for the queried Sample ID.
See Test Order Message for details.
3.6
Rejected Test Order
At completion of download operations, or at completion of the download operation
for a single sample in the host query mechanism, ELITE/ELITE PRO can transmit a
message to inform host computer about rejected test orders and samples or about the
reasons for transmission interrupt.
The Rejected Test Order Message consists of a Message Header record followed by
one or more Comment records and completed by the Message Terminator Record. A
comment record will be transmitted for each rejected information.
It must be observed that if no legal information has been received, the download
process is interrupted and the rejected test order message will signal the reason for the
interruption.
If the download process has been completed normally, the possible following rejected
test order message will report no legal test orders.
Comment Record structure is described in the following table:
Record Type ID
Sequence Number
Comment Source
Comment Text
Always set to ‘C’
Must begin with ‘1’ and then it will increment by one for each new
comment record
Always set to ‘I’ (as ASTM: clinical instrument system)
This field indicates the reason of the test order rejection. It is a
string with two components, each one can assume the reported
values:
Rejection Reason:
BAD_TEST: the transmitted test code is invalid
QC_MA_ID: the specified ID is already used as a material in the
QC
data base
BAD_S_ID: the specified ID is invalid
WRONG_ID: the host is sending information for a sample ID
different
from the expected one
PDB_FULL: patient data base is full
M_TEST_E: more tests than expected
UKNOWN_T: unknown test requested
INSTR_ID: invalid instrument identifier
NO_TESTS: no test ordered for patient record
Chapter 12 – Appendix A
Page 18 of 42
ACL Elite / ElitePro Service Manual
NO_PATIE: no patient record for ordered test
BAD_RECO: incorrect record format
Identification: This string contains the identification of the sample
causing the problem; if a test order caused the problem the sample
ID and test ID are transmitted sequentially. The character used to
separate the rejection reason, and the two strings used for the
identification field is ‘|‘.
Lacking information will be signaled as “UNKNOWN”.
If BAD_RECO is the reason of the rejection the field will contain
the record number and the field number caused the failure.
Always set to ‘I’ (as ASTM: instrument flag comment)
Comment Type
To summarize the possible values for the rejection reason and identification fields are
reported in the following table:
Rejection
Reason
QC_MA_ID
Transmissio
n
Interrupted
yes
BAD_S_ID
yes
PDB_FULL
yes
NO_TESTS
NO_PATIE
yes
yes
INSTR_ID
M_TEST_E
UNKWOWN_T
BAD_TEST
BAD_RECO
yes
no
no
no
yes
Identification: first sub_field
Identification: second
sub_field
sample ID (causing the
problem)
sample ID (causing the
problem)
sample ID (causing the
problem)
UNKNOWN
sample ID (causing the
problem)
UNKNOWN
sample ID
sample ID
sample ID
Record No. (debug purpose)
UNKNOWN
UNKNOWN
test_ID
UNKNOWN
test_ID
UNKNOWN
test ID (causing the problem)
test ID (causing the problem)
test ID (causing the problem)
Field No. (debug purpose)
An example for a complete rejection phase is given by:
H|\^&|||ACL9000|||||||P|1|19982110103227<CR>
C|1|I|M_TEST_E|SMP01
^010|I<CR>
C|2|I|BAD_TEST|SMP01
^000|I<CR>
L|1|N<CR>
3.7
Download Session Volumes
Approximate data volumes for download sessions is provided as a guide for
estimating the time required completing typical sessions. System latencies (both in
ELITE/ELITE PRO and host computer) are not considered.
The minimal session would occur if the host has no test orders available for
ELITE/ELITE PRO. In this condition ELITE/ELITE PRO sends the test request
Chapter 12 – Appendix A
Page 19 of 42
ACL Elite / ElitePro Service Manual
message, the host would respond with a message containing no test orders (only
message header and message terminator record).
In conditions in which the host has test orders for the instrument, the estimated data
volume is:
Test Request Message = Message Header (41) +17 + Message Terminator Record (6)
= 64
Test Order Message = Message Header (41) +
Number of patient records (82 + 55 *number of ordered test)
+ Message Terminator Record (6)
Test Order Rejected = Message Header (41) +
+ 41 * number of rejected records
+ Message Terminator Record (6)
So considering the following situation: the host has 50 sample IDs to be download,
each one with 4 tests, consider 10 rejected records the data volume can be estimated
in:
Test Request Message = 64
Test Order Message = 41+ 50 (82 + 55 *4) + 6 = 15147
Test Order Rejected = 41 + (41 * 10) + 6 = 457
Total = 15668 characters
At 9600 “baud rate” and with no system overhead it would take approximately 17
seconds and considering a system efficiency of 60% it becomes about 27 seconds.
All estimations have been done using the maximum expected length for string fields.
4.0
Test Results Uploading
Test Result Uploading allows transmission of results of the tests performed on
ELITE/ELITE PRO to the host computer. Results, related to patient, QC samples and
Analytical Reference materials, are transmitted on explicit user request or
automatically at session completion.
In the first case the user must require the transmission command in the DMS or in the
QC or in the AR environment, select the patient samples or QC samples or AR set of
data to be transmitted (in according with one of the supported selection criteria) and
start operation.
In the second case the transmission will happen automatically at session completion
and the instrument will provide to upload patient and/or QC samples data and/or AR
data.
The type of data to be transferred during an automatic upload session depends upon
the instrument set-up (the automatic data transmission can be set to “patient samples
only” or “QC and patient samples” or “QC and AR patient samples”).
If upload is manually requested, all data are transmitted independently from the
transmission flag.
Chapter 12 – Appendix A
Page 20 of 42
ACL Elite / ElitePro Service Manual
If transmission is performed automatically at session completion, the instrument will
upload for patient samples all the data available for the sample IDs just analyzed and
will upload, for QC data, the results just obtained.
From a general point of view the automatic data transmission of the patient samples is
equivalent to the manual data transmission, requested in DMS, of patient samples
belonging to a specific load-list. While the automatic data transmission of the QC data
or AR data is equivalent to the manual data transmission, requested in QC database or
AR database, or the data in a specified interval for the QC material present in the
load-list.
Considering that ELITE/ELITE PRO fills the strings used for Sample ID, department
and patient name with space characters (to align data), the host computer must ignore
space characters on the right of these fields.
If uploading is completed successfully for patient, QC samples and AR data, the
transmission flag associated to the single record will be updated from ‘L’ to ‘T’
(transmitted).
It must also to be underscored that on ELITE/ELITE PRO, modifications to sample
data already transmitted (such as adding of a new test result or modifications of
sample data) cause the transmission flag to change from ‘T’ to ‘L’.
It does not apply to QC or AR data because the only modification the user can request
on these data is to omit or to clear statistic. The effect of omit operation is to exclude
the data from the statistic but the data is not modified.
Modifications in the set-up values and note field do not modify the transmission status
of QC data and AR data.
While transmission is in progress the user will be updated on the number of the
sample being transmitted.
ELITE/ELITE PRO does not accept inquiries for test results.
4.1
Test Result Message
The Test Result Message is used by ELITE/ELITE PRO to transmit any available test
results for a sample. All available test results will be transmitted for patient samples
even if data have been already transmitted partially.
The message consist of a Message Header record, a Patient Information record, one
or more pair Test Order records followed by one or more Results records (depending
upon the number of available test results and the number of results for each specific
test).
The Result record can be completed with a Comment record containing flags
associated to the executed test.
Tests are uploaded using the same sorting used on board. The complete set of
available test results is globally uploaded to the host computer independently by the
set of results defined as to show in the sample list.
In some conditions, depending by the instrument status (i.e. calibrated, not calibrated,
AR used, etc.) only a subset of the results supported by the test will be transmitted to
the host computer.
Chapter 12 – Appendix A
Page 21 of 42
ACL Elite / ElitePro Service Manual
The Message Terminator record completes the transmitted data.
The same structure is used also to upload QC and AR data. In the following
paragraphs any differences in the way to treat patient, QC and AR data will be
underlined.
4.1.1
Patient Information Record
This information is transmitted to the host only if available on the instrument. The
Patient Information structure is:
Patient Information Record:
File Type
Patient Sample
QC Sample or AR
Record Type ID
Sequence Number
Must be ‘P’
Must begin with ‘1’ and then
must increment by one for each
new Patient Information record
must be ‘P’
must begin with ‘1’ and
then must increment by
one for each new Patient
Information record
not provided
not provided
Practice Assigned Patient ID
Laboratory Assigned Patient
ID
Patient ID #3
Patient Name
Not provided
Provided if defined as a string
containing up to 15 characters.
Not provided
Provided if known as a single
string containing up to 30
characters
Mother’s Maiden Name
Not provided
Birth date
Provided if known as a single
string without any checks
Patient Sex
Provided if known as a single
character
Patient Race-Ethnic Origin
Not provided
Patient Address
Not provided
Reserved Field
Not provided
Patient Telephone Number
Not provided
Attending Physician ID
Not provided
Special Field #1
Not provided
Special Field #2
Not provided
Patient Height
Not provided
Patient Weight
Not provided
Patient’s Known or Suspected Not provided
Diagnosis
Patient Active Medications
Not provided
Patient’s Diet
Not provided
Practice Field #1
Not provided
Practice Field #2
Not provided
Admission and Discharged
Not provided
Chapter 12 – Appendix A
not provided
not provided
not provided
not provided
not provided
not provided
not provided
not provided
not provided
not provided
not provided
not provided
not provided
not provided
not provided
not provided
not provided
not provided
not provided
not provided
Page 22 of 42
ACL Elite / ElitePro Service Manual
Dates
Admission Status
Location
Nature of Alternative
Diagnostic Code and
Classifiers
Alternative Diagnostic Code
and Classifiers
Patient Religion
Marital Status
Isolation Status
Language
Hospital Service
Hospital Institution
Dosage Category
4.1.2
Not provided
Provided if known as a 30
characters free string
not provided
not provided
Not provided
not provided
Not provided
not provided
Not provided
Not provided
Not provided
Not provided
Not provided
Not provided
Not provided
not provided
not provided
not provided
not provided
not provided
not provided
not provided
Test Order Record
The fields characterizing this record are specified in the following:
Test Order Record:
File Type
Patient Sample
Record Type ID
Sequence Number
Must be ‘O’
Must begin with ‘1’ and then
must increment by one for
each new test order record for
the same patient
Provided, is the
ELITE/ELITE PRO sample
ID.
See Appendix for
ELITE/ELITE PRO
supported characters.
Specimen ID
Instrument Specimen ID
Universal Test ID
Priority
Requested/Ordered
QC Sample or AR data
Must be ‘O’
Must begin with ‘1’ and
then must increment by one
for each new test order
record for the same patient
Provided, is the
ELITE/ELITE PRO QC
material ID for QC data; or
is the ‘AR’ keyword for AR
data. See Appendix for
ELITE/ELITE PRO
supported characters.
Not provided
Not provided
The field is composed of 4
The field is composed of 4
parts, only the
parts; only the
Manufacturer’s Code
Manufacturer’s Code
component is used as a 4
component is used as a 4
character code (host codes are character code (host codes
user configurable on board).
are user configurable on
board).
Provided if set as a ‘S’ char
Not provided
for priority samples.
Not provided
Not provided
Chapter 12 – Appendix A
Page 23 of 42
ACL Elite / ElitePro Service Manual
Date/Time
Specimen Collection Date
and Time
Collection End Time
Collection Volume
Collector ID
Action Code
Danger Code
Relevant Clinical
Information
Date and Time Specimen
Received
Specimen Descriptor
Ordering Physician
Physician’s Telephone
Number
User Field #1
User Field #2
Laboratory Field #1
Laboratory Field #2
Date/time Results Reported
or Last Modified
Instrument Charge to
Computer System
Instrument Section
Report Type
Reserved Field
Location of Ward of
specimen Collection
Hospital Information Flag
Specimen Service
Specimen Institution
4.1.3
Not provided
Not provided
Not provided
Not provided
Not provided
Not provided
Not provided
Not provided
Not provided
Not provided
Not provided
Set to ‘Q’
Not provided
Not provided
Not provided
Not provided
Not provided both fields
Provided, if available, as a
string containing up to 30
chars
Not provided
Not provided both fields
Not provided
Not provided
Not provided
Not provided
Not provided
Not provided
Not provided
Not provided
Not provided
Not provided
Not provided
Not provided
Not provided
Not provided
Set to F
Not provided
Not provided
Not provided
Set to F
Not provided
Not provided
Not provided
Not provided
Not provided
Not provided
Not provided
Not provided
Not provided
Result Record
The fields characterizing this record are specified in the following table.
A result record is send to the host computer for each available test result. For double
tests all available single values will be transmitted to the host computer (no mean
values). Each result record will contain one of available test results.
Result Record:
File Type
Patient Sample
QC Sample or AR data
Record Type ID
Sequence Number
Set to ‘R’
Must begin with ‘1’ and
Set to ‘R’
Must begin with ‘1’ and
Chapter 12 – Appendix A
Page 24 of 42
ACL Elite / ElitePro Service Manual
Universal Test ID
Data or Measurement Value
Units
Reference range
Result Abnormal Flag
Nature of Abnormality Flag
Result Status
Data of Change in Instrument
Normative Values or Units
Operator Identification
Date/Time Test Started
Date/Time Test Completed
Instrument Identification
then must increment by one
for each result record for the
same patient test record for
the same patient record
The field is composed of 4
parts, only the
Manufacturer’s Code
component is used as a 4
character code (host codes
are user configurable on
board).
The field contains the
obtained numeric value or
qualitative message (Error
xx). All numerical results
are sent. *
Provided if the previous
field is a numeric value; is a
free string (see Appendix C
for standard units)
maximum number of
characters is 8).
Not provided
Not provided
Not provided
Set to ‘F’
Not provided
then must increment by one
for each result record for the
same patient test record for
the same patient record
The field is composed of 4
parts, only the
Manufacturer’s Code
component is used as a 4
character code (host codes
are user configurable on
board).
The field contains the
obtained numeric value or
qualitative message (Error
xx). All numerical results
are sent. *
Provided if the previous
field is a numeric value; is a
free string (see Appendix C
for standard units)
maximum number of
characters is 8).
Not provided
Not provided
Not provided
Set to ‘F’
Not provided
Not provided
Not provided
Execution time, string of the
type
YYYYMMDDHHMMSS
Not provided
Not provided
Not provided
Execution time, string of the
type
YYYYMMDDHHMMSS
Not provided
* Specific ranges must be set at the Host level.
4.1.4
Comment Record
The Comment record allows integration of the transmitted test results with possible
error messages.
One or more comment records can follow the result records. Fields characterizing this
record are specified in the following.
Comment Record:
Record Type ID
Sequence Number
set to ‘C’
must begin with ‘1’ and then must increment by one
Chapter 12 – Appendix A
Page 25 of 42
ACL Elite / ElitePro Service Manual
Comment Source
Comment Text
Comment Type
for each comment record
set to ‘I’
this field specifies the instrument errors (see table) as
a numeric code (2 characters) plus the associated
message
set to ‘I’
Chapter 12 – Appendix A
Page 26 of 42
ACL Elite / ElitePro Service Manual
4.1.5
Error Codes
TEMPERATURE WARNING
ROTOR STACK TEMPERATURE Out of Range
SLIDER TEMPERATURE Out of Range
REAGENT TEMPERATURE Out of Range
INCUBATION TEMPERATURE Out of Range
=
=
=
=
41,
43,
45,
49,
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
50,
51,
52,
53,
54,
55,
56,
57,
58,
59,
60,
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
73,
74,
75,
76,
77,
78,
79,
80,
83,
=
=
86,
87,
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
98
99
205,
206,
207,
208,
209,
210,
211,
212,
213,
214,
MECHANICAL WARNING
AUTOSAMPLER WARNING
ROTOR MOTOR WARNING
HORIZONTAL MOTOR WARNING
VERTICAL MOTOR WARNING
REAGENT DILUTOR WARNING
SAMPLE DILUTOR WARNING
PHOTOMETRIC COVER WARNING
STIRRER1_FAIL
STIRRER2_FAIL
STIRRER3_FAIL
STIRRER4_FAIL
LIQUID WARNING
LIQUID_SENSOR OFF (SAMPLE)
LIQUID_SENSOR OFF (REAGENT)
LIQUID_SENSOR_FAIL (SAMPLE)
LIQUID_SENSOR_FAIL (REAGENT)
MATERIAL_SHORT
MANDATORY_MATERIAL_SHORT
FLUSH_PRE_WARNING
FLUSH WARNING
CLEANING_NOT_PERFORMED
MISCELLANEOUS WARNING
COVER_OPEN_DURING_LOADING_OR_INCUBATION
TIMEOUT_EXPIRED_DURING_LOADING
ERRORS ON RESPONSE
OUTSIDE SCALE RANGE LOW
OUTSIDE SCALE RANGE HIGH
SATURATION_ERROR
FIRST_THRESHOLD_ERROR
SECOND_THRESHOLD_ERROR
DELTA_ERROR
INITIAL_SLOPE_ERROR
FINAL_SLOPE_ERROR
FINAL_REACTION CURVE ERROR
FIRST_DERIVATIVE_ERROR
SECOND_DERIVATIVE_ERROR
FIRST_PART_REACTION CURVE ERROR
Chapter 12 – Appendix A
Page 27 of 42
ACL Elite / ElitePro Service Manual
ERRORS ON CALIBRATION CURVES
INSUFFICIENT_STANDARD POINTS IN ONE_SEGMENT
INVALID CURVE INSUFFICIENT DATA
NUMBER OF_STANDARD OUT OF RANGE
INVALID_TRANSLATION_OR_MANDATORY_STANDARD
INVALID_STD_INSUFFICIENT_REPLICATES
INSUFFICIENT_REPLICATES
INVALID_REPLICATES
CV_OUT_OF_RANGE
SLOPE OUT OF RANGE: INVALID CALIBRATION CURVE
R2_OUT_OF_RANGE
NOT MONOTONIC CURVE
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
215,
216,
217,
219,
220,
221,
222,
223,
225,
226,
228,
ERRORS ON ANALYTICAL REFERENCE, QC, RATIO AND NORMALIZED RATIO
AR_INVALID
AR_OUT_OF_RANGE
AR_NOT_CHECKED
DUPLICATE OUT OF RANGE
QC_INVALID
QC_OUT_OF_RANGE
RATIO_CALCULATION_ERROR
RATIO_CALCULATION_ERROR: S/Sa out of range
NORMALIZED RATIO ERROR: AR/Ara out of range
NORMALIZED RATIO: CALCULATION ERROR
STD_NOT_FOUND
AR_NOT_FOUND
ACTIVATE SAMPLE NOT_FOUND
ARa_NOT_FOUND
RATIO_NOT_FOUND
AR_OUT_OF_RANGE
AR_NULL
STD_NULL
SAMPLE_NULL
REF_NULL
AR_RATIO_ NULL_
ACTIVATED_AR NULL_
NULL_DIFFERENCE
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
229,
230,
233,
239,
240,
242,
249,
250,
251,
252,
253,
254,
255,
256,
257,
258,
259,
260,
262,
263,
264,
265,
266,
Out of range indications referring to normal or test ranges are not transmitted to the
host computer. The * symbol (outside Normal Range) is presented only on the
Cumulative and Sample Reports.
An example for a complete test uploading sequence is given by:
Chapter 12 – Appendix A
Page 28 of 42
ACL Elite / ElitePro Service Manual
Sample
H|\^&||||||||ACL9000||P|1|19982110134700<CR>
P|1||PTNT1||BLU^^^^||19391127|M|||||||||||||||||DEP
1||||||||||<CR>
O|1|SMP01||^^^0001|S||||||||||^|DR. VERDI||||||||||O||||||<CR>
R|1|^^^0001|12.8|||||F||||19960119114215|<CR>
C|1|I|31^ Invalid for QC |I<CR>
P|2||PTNT1||Gialli^^^^||19391127|M|||||||||||||||||DEP
1||||||||||<CR>
O|1|SMP10||^^^0001|S||||||||||^|DR. VERDI||||||||||O||||||<CR>
R|1|^^^0001|14.5|s||||F||||19960119114215|<CR>
C|1|I|31^ Invalid for QC |I<CR>
L|1|N<CR>
QC
H|\^&|||ACL9000|||||||P|1|20021205123956<CR>
P|1||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||<CR>
O|1|Normal C.||^^^0001|||||||Q||||^|||||||||||F||||||<CR>
L|1|N<CR>
AR
H|\^&|||ACL9000|||||||P|1|20021205123956<CR>
P|1||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||<CR>
O|1|AR||^^^0001|||||||Q||||^|||||||||||F||||||<CR>
L|1|N<CR>
4.2
Upload Session Volumes
Approximate data volumes for upload sessions is provided as a guide for estimating
the time required to complete typical sessions. Obviously, system latencies (both in
ELITE/ELITE PRO and host computer) are not considered.
The minimal session would occur if ELITE/ELITE PRO has no test results to be
transmitted; no data is sent and the data volume is zero.
In conditions in which the ELITE/ELITE PRO has results to be transmitted, the data
volume can be estimated on the Test Order and Test Result record size base.
Test Order Message = Message Header (41) +
Number of patient records (82 + Results) + Message Terminator
Record (6)
Results = number of ordered test (55 + 60*number of test result + 56* number of error
messages)
Consider the following situation: ELITE/ELITE PRO has 50 sample IDs to be
uploaded each with 4 tests, each test with 3 results and each test with 2 flags, the data
volume can be estimated in:
Chapter 12 – Appendix A
Page 29 of 42
ACL Elite / ElitePro Service Manual
Test Result Message = 41+ 50 (82 + 4(55 + 60*3 + 56*2)) + 6
Total = 69547 characters
At 9600 “baud rate” and with no system overhead it would take approximately 73
seconds and considering a system efficiency of 60% it becomes about 116 seconds.
5.0
Not Supported Records
The Scientific record and the Manufacturer Information record are not supported by
ELITE/ELITE PRO protocol.
As a consequence the instrument ignores any type of information they contain.
6.0
Transmission Abort
The download or upload transmission session can be interrupted for an explicit user
request detected on the instrument, because the host computer is not responding or
because the host computer required interruption of the transmission process.
Further, as reported above, the download process can be interrupted because an illegal
sample Identifier has been received. Instrument behavior in this particular condition
was defined in and Reject Test Orders.
ELITE/ELITE PRO family instruments behavior in each of the listed conditions is
described in the following:
Condition
Action
ELITE/ELITE PRO’s
operator requested stop
download process
ELITE/ELITE PRO will signal the end of transmission to the host
and will discard any following messages. The host must consider
the interrupt request.
It must be emphasized that ELITE/ELITE PRO will signal the
transmission interruption with a message that is a rejected test
order message if any information has been rejected or with a
message header plus a message terminator record if no
information has been rejected.
ELITE/ELITE PRO will complete the message in progress with
the message terminator and will not transmit any further test
results.
During download and upload transmission sessions, operation by
ELITE/ELITE PRO is stopped. If download was in progress, no
rejected test messages will be transmitted.
ELITE/ELITE PRO ’s
operator requested stop
upload process
Host computer is not
responding
Host computer required
EOT
A message will inform the user that the transmission has been
interrupted: “Host Computer not responding”
Both during download and upload sessions, operation by
ELITE/ELITE PRO is stopped. If download was in progress, no
Chapter 12 – Appendix A
Page 30 of 42
ACL Elite / ElitePro Service Manual
rejected test messages will be transmitted.
It must be emphasized that the host computer must request the
transmission interruption with a message composed by a message
header plus a message terminator record.
Incorrect record format
7.0
A message will inform the user that the transmission has been
interrupted: “Host Computer required interrupt transmission”
Transmission/reception is aborted and the user is informed:
“Incorrect format in host messages”
Appendix- ELITE/ELITE PRO Test Codes
Test codes are user definable. Codes from 1 to 500 are assigned to IL pre-defined
tests. Codes greater than 500 are assigned to the user definable tests. IL Library
proposes the default test codes reported in the following table.
Test Code
001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
009
010
011
012
013
014
015
016
017
018
023
024
Test Code
for host
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007
0008
0009
0010
0011
0012
0013
0014
0015
0016
0017
0018
0023
0024
Test ID
(8 char. max)
PT
PT e
PT d
PT ed
PT HS
PT HS e
PT HS d
PT HS ed
PT HS +
PT HS + e
PT HS + d
PT HS + ed
R-PT
R-PTe
PT R
PT R e
PT R d
PT R ed
R-PT d
R-PT ed
Extended Test Name
(15 char. max)
PT
PT Extended
PT Double
PT Ext. Db.
PT HS
PT HS Extended
PT HS Double
PT HS Ext. Db.
PT PLUS
PTPLUS Extended
PT PLUS Double
PT PLUS Ext. Db.
Recombipl-PT
Recombipl-PTex
PT Rec.
PT Rec Extended
PT Rec. Double
PT Rec Ext. Db.
Rec-PT Double
Rec-PT Ext Db
030
031
032
033
034
035
036
037
038
039
040
041
042
043
044
045
046
047
048
049
0030
0031
0032
0033
0034
0035
0036
0037
0038
0039
0040
0041
0042
0043
0044
0045
0046
0047
0048
0049
FIB_
FIB
FIB e_
FIB e
FIB d_
FIB d
FIB ed_
FIB ed
FIB HS_
FIB HS
FIB HSe_
FIB HSe
FIB HSd_
FIB HS d
FIBHSed_
FIB HSed
FIB HS+_
FIB HS+
FIB HS+e_
FIB HS+e
FIB (PT)
FIB (PT)
FIB (PT e)
FIB (PT e)
FIB (PT d)
FIB (PT d)
FIB (PT ed)
FIB (PT ed)
FIB (PT HS)
FIB (PT HS)
FIB (PT HS e)
FIB (PT HS e)
FIB (PT HS d)
FIB (PT HS d)
FIB (PT HS ed)
FIB (PT HS ed)
FIB (PT PLUS)
FIB (PT PLUS)
FIB (PLUS e)
FIB (PLUS e)
Chapter 12 – Appendix A
Page 31 of 42
ACL Elite / ElitePro Service Manual
Test Code
050
051
052
053
054
055
056
057
058
059
060
061
062
063
064
065
074
075
076
077
Test Code
for host
0050
0051
0052
0053
0054
0055
0056
0057
0058
0059
0060
0061
0062
0063
0064
0065
0074
0075
0076
0077
Test ID
(8 char. max)
FIB HS+d_
FIB HS+d
FIB+ed_
FIB+ed
R-FIB_
R-FIB
R-FIBe_
R-FIBe
FIB R_
FIB R
FIB Re_
FIB Re
FIB Rd_
FIB Rd
FIB Red_
FIB Red
R-Fibd_
R-Fibd
R-Fibed_
R-Fibed
Extended Test Name
(15 char. max)
FIB (PLUS db)
FIB (PLUS db)
FIB (PLUS ed)
FIB (PLUS ed)
Recombipl-FIB
Recombipl-FIB
Recombipl-FIBex
Recombipl-FIBex
FIB (Rec)
FIB (Rec)
FIB (Rec e)
FIB (Rec e)
FIB (Rec d)
FIB (Rec d)
FIB (Rec ed)
FIB (Rec ed)
Recombipl-FIBd
Recombipl-FIBd
Recombipl-FIBed
Recombipl-FIBed
080
081
082
083
084
085
086
087
088
089
090
091
092
093
094
095
096
097
098
099
0080
0081
0082
0083
0084
0085
0086
0087
0088
0089
0090
0091
0092
0093
0094
0095
0096
0097
0098
0099
APTT Ly
APTT Lye
APTT Lyd
APTTLyed
APTT-SP
APTT-SPe
APTT-SPd
APTTSPed
APTT-C
APTT-C e
APTT-C d
APTT-Ced
APTTSYS
APTTSYSe
APTTSYSd
APTTSSed
APTTSYF
APTTSYFe
APTTSYFd
APTTSFed
APTT Ly
APTT Ly Ext.
APTT Ly Db.
APTT Ly Ext.Db.
APTT-SP
APTT-SP Ext.
APTT-SP Db.
APTT-SP Ext.Db.
APTT-C
APTT-C Ext.
APTT-C Db.
APTT C-Ext.Db.
APTT SynthASil
APTT SynthASile
APTT SynthASild
APTTSynthASiled
APTT SynthAFax
APTT SynthAFaxe
APTT SynthAFaxd
APTT SynthAFaxed
102
107
112
117
0102
0107
0112
0117
FVIII SF
FIX SF
FXI SF
FXII SF
FVIII SynthAFax
FIX SynthAFax
FXI SynthAFax
FXII SynthAFax
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
0120
0121
0122
0123
0124
0125
0126
0127
0128
0129
0130
0131
TT-5
TT e-5
TT d-5
TT ed-5
TT-8
TT e-8
TT d-8
TT ed-8
TT-2
TT e-2
TT d-2
TT ed-2
TT - 5
TT Ext. 5
TT Dbl. 5
TT Ext. Dbl. 5
TT - 8
TT Ext. 8
TT Dbl. 8
TT Ext. Dbl. 8
TT - 2
TT Ext. 2
TT Dbl. 2
TT Ext. Dbl. 2
150
151
152
153
0150
0151
0152
0153
PCX
HPX
P-ClotLy
P-ClotSP
Pro-IL-Complex
Hepatocomplex
Pro-Clot Ly
Pro-Clot SP
Chapter 12 – Appendix A
Page 32 of 42
ACL Elite / ElitePro Service Manual
Test Code
154
159
160
161
199
200
Test Code
for host
0154
0159
0160
0161
0199
0200
Test ID
(8 char. max)
P-ClotC
PS
Free PS
Pro S
AT*
AT
Extended Test Name
(15 char. max)
Pro-Clot C
Protein S
Free Protein S
Protein S
Antithr. Liquid
Antithr. In cup
201
202
203
204
205
206
0201
0202
0203
0204
0205
0206
FIB-C_
FIB-C
FIB-C l_
FIB-C l
FIB-C h_
FIB-C h
Fib. Clauss
Fib. Clauss
Fib. Clauss low
Fib. Clauss low
Fib Clauss high
Fib. Clauss high
225
208
210
212
213
214
220
221
225
250
251
275
276
0225
0208
0210
0212
0213
0214
0220
0221
0225
0250
0251
0275
0276
APCR-V
HEP LMW
HEP UHF
PLG
PL-IN
P-C
F8 Chr H
F8 Chr L
APCR V
D-Dimer
D-Dh
F8SP-P
F9SP-P
APCR V
Heparin LMW
Heparin UHF
Plasminogen
Plasmin Inhib.
Protein C
F8Chr High
F8Chr Low
APCR V
D-Dimer
D-Dimer high
FVIII SP Par
FIX SP Par
300
302
304
305
0300
0302
0304
0305
FVIII Ly
FVIII SP
FVIII C
FVIII SS
F VIII - Ly
F VIII - SP
F VIII – C
FVIII SynthASil
310
312
314
315
0310
0312
0314
0315
FIX Lyo
FIX SP
FIX C
FIX
F IX - Ly
F IX - SP
F IX - C
FIX SynthASil
320
322
324
325
0320
0322
0324
0325
FXI Lyo
FXI SP
FXI C
FXI SS
F XI - Ly
F XI - SP
F XI - C
FXI SynthASil
330
332
334
335
0330
0332
0334
0335
FXII Lyo
FXII SP
FXII C
FXII SS
F XII - Ly
F XII - SP
F XII - C
FXII SynthASil
336
338
340
342
343
0336
0338
0340
0342
0343
FVII PT
FVII HS
FVII HSP
FVII R
R FVII
F VII - PT
F VII - HS
F VII - HS Plus
F VII - R
FVII RecombPT
350
352
354
356
357
0350
0352
0354
0356
0357
FX PT
FX HS
FX HSP
FX R
R FX
F X - PT
F X - HS
F X - HS Plus
FX-R
FX RecombPT
360
362
364
366
0360
0362
0364
0366
FV PT
FV HS
FV HSP
FV R
F V - PT
F V - HS
F V - HS Plus
FV-R
Chapter 12 – Appendix A
Page 33 of 42
ACL Elite / ElitePro Service Manual
Test Code
367
Test Code
for host
0367
Test ID
(8 char. max)
R FV
Extended Test Name
(15 char. max)
FV RecombPT
370
372
374
376
377
0370
0372
0374
0376
0377
FII PT
FII HS
FII HSP
FII R
R FII
F II - PT
F II – HS
F II - HS Plus
F II – R
FII RecombPT
155
156
400
401
155
156
0400
0401
SCT-S
SCT-C
VWF:Ag
vWF:AgH
SCT Screen
SCT Confirm
vWF Antigen
vWF Antigen Hig
410
411
0410
0411
LAC_S
LAC_C
LAC_S
LAC Confirm
Note: This table represents the situation for the IL Library 7.
8.0
Appendix – ELITE/ELITE PRO Supported Characters
8.1
Supported Characters for Sample ID
The ASCII set of characters considered is in the decimal range 32 to 126, because a
Sample ID can be accepted only if it contains at least one character different from a
space.
8.2
Units
Supported Characters for Patient name, Department and
Is the ASCII set of characters considered in the decimal range 32 to 255.
8.3
!
&
+
@
_
Supported Characters for delimiters
“
‘
/
[
{
#
(
:
\
|
$
)
;
]
}
%
*
=
^
~
ASCII character 127 is not allowed as delimiter.
Note: Separators are always expected from Host and are always transmitted
independently from the information contained in the string.
Chapter 12 – Appendix A
Page 34 of 42
ACL Elite / ElitePro Service Manual
9.0
Appendix - ELITE/ELITE PRO Supported Units
Unit
Abbreviation
Time
Activity
Ratio
International Normalized Ratio
s
%
R
INR
NR
mg/dL
g/L
ng/mL
U/mL
μg/L
μmol/L
IU/mL
mg/L
ug/mL
Concentration
Delta Optical Absorbance
Delta
Activated Sample Sa
Curve behavior
Δ Abs
Δ (Δ ASCII code is 7F)
Sa (Hex code EC)
offset
min
max
Final
User defined
free string containing up to 8
chars
Notes: For duplicate (d) and extended duplicate (ed) tests only the individual
replicate results are sent to the host system. The mean value is not sent from the
ACL8/9/10000 system. This applies to all sample types including patient, QC and
Analytical reference.
Chapter 12 – Appendix A
Page 35 of 42
ACL Elite / ElitePro Service Manual
Chapter 12 – Appendix A
Page 36 of 42
ACL Elite / ElitePro Service Manual
Chapter 12
Appendix B
ACL Elite / ElitePro
Bar Code Label Specification
(REV 0.0)
Chapter 12 – Appendix A
Page 37 of 42
ACL Elite / ElitePro Service Manual
Index
1.0
1.1
1.2
1.3
2.0
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
Introduction
Purpose
Definitions, Acronyms and Abbreviations
References
General Description
Supported Codes and Checksum type
Barcode Symbol Specifications
Barcode Parameters
Barcode Label Positioning
Barcode Label Dimensions
1.0
Introduction
In the following sections the characteristics of the bar code labels that can be read
with the Welch Allyn SCANTEAM 3700 scanner installed on ACL 9000 family
instruments are described.
1.1
Purpose
Purpose of this document is to give indication of the scanner characteristics in terms
of readable codes, identify the requirements the barcode labels have to satisfy and
define constraints in terms of label positioning within ACL 9000 instrument.
1.2
Definitions, Acronyms and Abbreviations
WA
Walch Allyn SCANTEAM 3700
Near Distance
is the nearest distance that a scanner can accurately digitize a
given bar code.
Far Distance
is the farthtest distance that a scanner can accurately digitize a
given bar code.
Scan Width
is the length of the widest bar code that can be successfully
interpreted by the scanner.
Quiet Zone
is the blank area located just before and just after the bar space
pattern.
Chapter 12 – Appendix A
Page 38 of 42
ACL Elite / ElitePro Service Manual
1.3
References
Ref. 1
2.0
SCANTEAM 3700 - Technical Manual - Walch Allyn
General Description
The WA is a fixed mount CCD bar code scanner with integrated decoder for easy
integration into host equipment (ACL 9000 family instruments in our case).
The 3700 features Walch Allyn’s time-proven decoding algorithms in a microprocessor-controlled bar code scanner/decoder and offers configurable operating
parameters.
The following mean features are available with every WA:
•
•
•
•
•
2.1
High scan rate per second (100 is the standard)
Flexible scan trigger configurations
Decoder configurable for high security
Scan voting to ensure bar code data integrity
Ease of configuration through RS-322 interface
Supported Codes and Checksum type
Code Type
Code 128
Code 39
Interleaved 2 of 5
Codabar
Checksum Type
No checksum
Modulus 43
No Checksum
USS - Modulus 10
OPCC - Modulus 10
No checksum
AIM - Modulus 16 with start/stop digits
NW7 - Modulus 11
NW7 - Modulus 16 with start/stop digits
No Checksum
Chapter 12 – Appendix A
Data Digits
up to 15
up to 15
up to 15
up to 15
up to 15
up to 15
up to 15
up to 15
up to 15
up to 15
Page 39 of 42
ACL Elite / ElitePro Service Manual
2.2
Bar Code Symbol Specifications
All bar code symbols have to satisfy the appropriate AIM Uniform Symbology
Specification. In particular the following characteristics have to considered:
•
Background substrate
The barcode symbol should be printed on a material type that is reflective and has a
matte (not glossy) finish. A background diffuse reflectance of at least 70% to 80% is
suggested for optimum contrast.
•
Ink color and type
The ink type has to be compatible with 660 nm LEDs used in the scanner. The
barcode symbols inked bars should not exceed 10% reflectance at 660 nm that is
being used for reading, whether printed with black ink or colored ink.
•
Voids and Specks
The code has to be printed clearly, free of voids, specks, blemishes and lines which
could “fool” the scanner.
•
Definition
The bars in the barcode symbols should be well defined. Their edges should not be
rough or fuzzy, so that bar and spaces have the proper widths intended for the used
barcode symbology used. Definition should be sharp and consistent.
•
Tolerance
The ratio of the widths and spaces in a barcode symbol must conform to the
appropriate AIM barcode specifications and can cause problems if not correct
throughout the barcode. Problems can occur if bar edges are smeared or rough, or
when they exhibit voids.
Chapter 12 – Appendix A
Page 40 of 42
ACL Elite / ElitePro Service Manual
2.3
Barcode Parameters
Parameters have to be considered in that context are:
•
Density (bar code): refers to the number of cheracters in a linear inch of bar code.
•
Ratio: refers to the ratio of the nominal wide element width to the nominal narrow
element width.
In order to ensure a good bar code reading (in addition to what indicated in the 2.2
section) the parameters above mentioned should be as follows:
•
Density: not less 10 Mils
•
Ratio: not less 2.5
These values are valid for all the above mentioned bar code types.
The relationship between reading distances, scan width and bar code density are
displayed in the following:
Near
Distance
Far Distance
63.5 mm
(161.29’’)
34.3 mm
(87.122’’)
114.5 mm
(290.83’’)
130.3 mm
(330.962’’)
Scan Width
(near
distance)
101.6 mm
(258.064’’)
82.3 mm
(209.042’’)
Scan Width
(far
distance)
152.4 mm
(387.096’’)
178.3 mm
(452.882’’)
Density
(bar code)
7.5 MIL
13 MIL
In Appendix Decoder Zone Map the attached drawing defines the “decoder zone map”
for the data above displayed. The displayed graph has been experimentally obtained
from Welch Allyn Laboratories because the WA equipped for the IL requirement has
not a standard optics.
Chapter 12 – Appendix A
Page 41 of 42
ACL Elite / ElitePro Service Manual
2.4
Barcode Label Positioning
In Appendix Barcode Label Dimension the attached drawing defines the barcode
labels dimensions and identifies constraints in positioning labels on vacutainers. The
13x75 vacutainers have been considered. The proposed barcode labels dimension and
positioning apply to all sample tray models. The following measurements are
reported:
Barcode label feature
Maximum label length (global label size)
Maximum barcode length (printed area)
Quite zone (white area before and after the printed area)
Label position (it is identified as the label edge
measured starting from the vacutainer lower part)
2.5
Dimension
52.6 mm (2.071”)
39.6 mm (1.559”)
6.35 mm (0.256”)
58 mm (2.283”)
Barcode Label Dimensions
Quite Zone
6.5 mm (.256”)
Label Length
52.6 mm max (2.071”)
Barcode Length
39.6 mm max (1.559”)
Quite Zone
6.5 mm (.256”)
Tube L standard - 13x75 mm Vacutainers
Label position
58 mm (2.283”)
Chapter 12 – Appendix A
Page 42 of 42